Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A
Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A
Harris Ridge Condos Panel Submittal REV A
REVISION A
for
Control Panel
for the Submersible Non-Clog Sewage Pumps
CONTRACTOR:
C.C. Carlton Industries, Ltd
ENGINEER:
Hanrahan, Pritchard Engineering, Inc.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Section 11306: Submersible Non-clog Pump
Smith Pump Company
Project Number: 172221
For questions please contact
Smith Pump Company, Inc.
301 M&B Industrial
Waco, Texas 76712
Attention:
Phone:
Facsimile:
E-mail:
Website:
254.776-0377
254-776-0023
[email protected]
www.smithpump.com
Note to Contractor:
The proposed equipment will not be available or purchased from our vendors until written approval of the
Submittal is provided. Smith Pump Company will provide the equipment, as approved, and may not be
identical to the Engineers specifications. Please review carefully. It is the Contractors responsibility to
verify field conditions including voltage, elevations, etc. Changes after approval may result in additional
charges for modifications, field service, restocking, or other services.
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiumsRevision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
Table of Contents
Harris Ridge Condominiums
Contractor: C.C. Carlton Industries, Ltd
Project: Submersible Non-clog Pump
SPCO Project Number: 172221
Section 11306
Control Panel for Submersible Non-Clog Pump
ITEM
1
Table of Contents
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiumsRevision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiumsRevision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.
6002-334
172221-02
Harris Ridge Condos
Pump Voltage:
H.P. Pump 1: 7.5
H.P. Pump 2: 7.5
460 VAC
Phase: 3
Hz: 60
FLA: 10.8
FLA: 10.8
DESCRIPTION:
NEMA 12 Painted Steel Enclosure (60 x 60 x 24)
- 3 Point Latching Mechanism on Overlapping Exterior Doors
- 12 Leg Kits
- Door Stops
- Operator Controls on Exterior Door
Power Distribution Blocks
Ground Bus Bar with Insulating Barrier
Separate control circuit from motor power circuits
Fused Solid State Power Monitoring Unit
Molded Case Main Circuit Breaker with Auxiliary Shunt for RTU Interface
Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors for Pump Motors
Molded Case Odor Control Circuit Breaker
Molded Case Control Circuit Breaker for External 2KVA Transformer (Shipped Loose)
20 Amp Duplex GFCI Outlets (located on the Back Plate & Exterior Door)
250VA Control Transformers (One per Motor Starter)
NEMA 2 Motor Contactors with Solid State Electronic Overload Relays
Solid State Overload Relay Displays on Exterior Door
NEMA 4X Overload Reset Pushbuttons on Exterior Door
Analog Phone Modem with Surge Protective Device for RTU (Modicon PLC) Output to
Walnut Creek WWTP
850VA Un-Interruptible Power Supply For Control Circuit
Modicon PLC with CPU module, rack extension module, 4 ch analog input module, 8 ch
digital output module, 16 ch digital input module
Devar Pump Controller (On Exterior Door) with Operation by Submersible Transducer & Two
(2) Normally Open Floats (Low & High Level)
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relays
Monitors Motor High Winding Temperatures & Moisture within Pump Seal Chamber
Adjustable On-Delay Timers for Pump Start Delay
11 Pin Control Relays (As Needed)
Fluorescent Interior Work Lights with Manual Off/ On Switch
Elapsed Timer Meters 7 Digits, Non-Resettable
3 Position HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC Rotary Switches 30mm, NEMA 4X, Maintained
2 Position HORN ENABLE-DISABLE Rotary Switch 30mm, NEMA 4X, Maintained
Red PUMP RUN LED Indicator Lights 30mm, NEMA 4X, Push-To-Test
Page 1 of 2
SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.
6002-334
172221-02
Harris Ridge Condos
Pump Voltage:
H.P. Pump 1: 7.5
H.P. Pump 2: 7.5
460 VAC
Phase: 3
Hz: 60
FLA: 10.8
FLA: 10.8
DESCRIPTION:
Green PUMP STOP LED Indicator Lights 30mm, NEMA 4X, Push-To-Test
Black PUMP FAILURE Pushbuttons 30mm, NEMA 4X, Momentary
12 Channel Annunciator Unit with Soft Pushbuttons for Various Alarms & Resets
Terminals for Field Connections
Exclusions:
Smith Pump will not be responsible for:
Programming of RTU/PLC; programming to be performed by others.
Bubbler System w/ corresponding components
Page 2 of 2
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiumsRevision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
Rack 1 Slot 3
120 VAC
LP-2
Rack 1 Slot 2
Rack 1 Slot 1
120 VAC
LP-2 / UPS
120 VAC
LP-2 / UPS
120 VAC
LP-1
120 VAC
LP-2
24 VDC
--
--/--/--
---
---
120 VAC
LP-5
SMITH PUMP
COMPANY
PRODUCT CONTROLS
PROJECT HARRIS RIDGE CONDOS
CONTROL PANEL
INTERIOR LIGHTING
OWNER
Rack 1 Slot 4
ENGINEER
JSRA ENGINEERS
PROJECT
172221-02
SHEET 3 OF 6
DATE
8/14/15
SCALE
NA
BY
LSW
CK
JDS
REV
---
ref: 6002-249
BILL OF MATERIAL
HARRIS RIDGE CONDOMINUMS
CONTRACTOR: C.C CARLTON
DUPLEX NEMA 12 PAINTED STEEL CONTROL PANEL
ITEM
35
36
53
57
37
58
48
21
59
56
50
49
60
11
61
38
42
52
55
62
23
2
2
46
46
12
25
28
26
27
24
29
30
31
19
32
46
1
1
14
13
73
15
17
16
63
64
65
66
67
33
68
39
6
QTY
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
160
4
6
2
21
3
3
9
2
1
2
2
2
2
DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER
NEMA 12 Painted Steel Enclosure: 60" x 60" x 24", 3PT, Door Stops, 12" LegsHoffman
Painted Steel Panel Plate: 60" x 60"
Hoffman
Insulated Barrier: Bolt-On, 60" x 6"
Hoffman
Quarter-Turn Non-Locking Wing Handle
EXM
UPS, 850VA, 510 Watts, 120 Volt, Din Rail Mount
Sola
Ground Bar with 20 pre-drilled connection points
Square D
Two Wire Temperature Transmitter for 2 or 3 Wire RTDs, 0-200 F
Devar
Pump Controller, 120VAC, 4-20ma Input, 4 SPDT
Devar
Submersible Transducer, 4-20mA, 15 PSI, 60 Ft Cable, Intrinsically Safe
Dwyer
3 Pole Power Distribution Block, 175 Amp, 600 Volt, Phenolic
Marathon
1 Pole Power Splice Block, 115 Amp, 600 Volt, Thermoplastic
Marathon
1 Pole Power Distribution Block, 115 Amp, 600 Volt Thermoplastic
Marathon
3 Pole Power Splice Block, 90 Amp, 600 Volt, Thermoplastic
Bussmann
3 Pole Circuit Breaker: 60 Amp, 600VAC, 25K AIC
Square D
Circuit Breaker Auxillary Contact Field Installable
Square D
Motor Circuit Protector, 30 Amp, 1.5-25 Amp Full Load Range
Square D
2 Pole Circuit Breaker: 15 Amps, 480 Volt, 18/25K AIC
Square D
3 Pole Circuit Breaker: 30 Amps, 480 Volt, 18/25K AIC
Square D
Three Pole Fuse Block, Class CC, 600V, Isolating, Non-indicating
Allen Bradley
1 Amp Class CC Fuse, 600 Volt, Time Delay, Rejection Type
Mersen
Current Transformer, 200:5 ratio
Simpson
PM800 Power Monitor: Base Meter Unit with integrated display
Square D
PM800 Module, 2 digital outputs (relays), 6 digital inputs
Square D
Single White Receptacle, 20 Amp, 120 Volt
Leviton
Stainless Steel Cover: Single Receptacle
Leviton
DC Power Supply: [email protected], DIN Rail
Sola
24VDC Power Supply Module: 1.04 Amps, 36 Watts
Modicon
CPU Module: Ethernet/ USB/ Modbus Serial Port, 256 Inputs/ Outputs, 24VDCModicon
Analog Input Module, 16 Channels, 120VAC
Modicon
Analog Output Module, 8 Channel, 120VAC
Modicon
Analog Input Module: 4 Channel, 4-20 mA Inputs
Modicon
Rack Extenstion Module, 8 Slots
Modicon
Protective Covers for Rack Extenstion Module
Modicon
Protection Bar for Rack Extension Module
Modicon
Dual Line RJ11 Jacks Surge Protector
L-Com
Analog Phone Modem: Serial RS232 w/ DB9 Connector, RJ-11 Modular Jack Telenetics
Weatherproof Gray Gang Box - Duplex
Red Dot
RJ11 Stainless Steel Cover Plates
Various
RJ11 Connectors
Various
End Barrier for Terminal Block, White
Allen Bradley
Terminal Block, 600 Volt, 30 Amp, #30-#12 AWG, White
Allen Bradley
Side Jumper, 10 Pole
Allen Bradley
End Anchor for Terminal Block
Allen Bradley
End Barrier for Isolating Fuse Block
Allen Bradley
Fuse Block, 300V, 1/4-1-1/4" Fuse, Isolating, Non-indicating
Allen Bradley
0.125 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
0.5 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
2 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
3 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
7 Amp Fuse, 250 Volt
Goulds
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relay: HMWT & Seal Failure
Multi-Tech
14 Pin Rectangular Base
Multi-Tech
NEMA 2 Contactor, 45 Amps, 120 Volt
Square D
3 Phase Electronic Overload Relay
Symcom
BOM 1 of 2
PROJECT #: 172221-02
MODEL NO: 6002-334
7.5 HP, 480 Volt , 3 Phase
PART NO.
A606024LP-MOD
A60P60
F88BK60
880 SCQ4-WNH
SDU-850
PK18GTA
SM812EC-0012
3020-4-420
PBLTX-15-60
1423570
1411300
1411400
NDN111-WH
HGL36060
S29450
HJL36030M71
FAL24015
FAL34030
1492-FB3C30
ATQR1
37022
PM820MG
3020-PM8M26
T5020-W
84004-40
SDN2.5-24-100P
BMX CPS 3500
BMX P34 2020
BMX DAI 1604
BMX DRA 0805
BMX AMI 0410
BMX XBP 0800
BMX XEM 010
BMX XSP 0800
HGLN-D2T
MIU14.4
IH3-1
43080-1S1
41108-RW3
1492-N36
1492-HM1
1492-SJ6-10
1492-N47
1492-N37
1492-H6
GGC-1/8
GGC-1/2
GGC-2
GGC-3
GGC-7
MOS-1P
PB12P
8502SDO2V02S
777-P2
BILL OF MATERIAL
BOM 2 of 2
PROJECT #: 172221-02
QTY
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
2
8
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
30
6
30
125"
2
21
2
33
39
6
9
3
4
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
2
DESCRIPTION
Communication Module for 777 Remote Display
Local Display/ Controller for 777 Overload Relay
Two Pole Fuse Block, Class CC, 600V, Isolating, Non-indicating
1 Amp Class CC Fuse, 600 Volt, Time Delay, Rejection Type
250VA Control Transformer: 240/480 Volts IN, 110 Volts OUT
Stainless Steel Cover: Duplex GFCI Receptacle
Weatherproof Gray Outlet Box: Duplex GFCI Receptacle
Duplex GFCI Ivory Receptacle, 20 Amp, 120 Volt
Annunciator: 12 LED Red Lights, 4 NO Pushbuttons
30mm Maintained 3 Position Selector Switch, 2 NO & 2 NC
NEMA 4X 30mm Pushbutton, NO & NC Contact
Red Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
30mm Maintained 2 Position Selector Switch
External Elapsed Time Meter, 110 Volt, Non-resettable, 7 figure Display
Multi-Function Timer, 5 timing ranges, DPDT, 120V, 11 pin
11 Pin Socket: 300 Volt, 10 Amp, 3PDT
120 Volt Fluorescent Light Enclosure - 18"
PANELITE Remote Door Switches
120 Volt Flurorescent Light Bulb
Control Relay, 5 Amp, 120VAC, 3PDT, LED Indicator
Circuit Protection Varistor: 130VAC, 170VDC; 340V; 10A; Metal Oxide; 180pF
11 Pin Socket: 300 Volt, 10 Amp, 3PDT
Corrosion Inhibitor Strip
Green Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
PART NO.
RS485-MS-2W
RM1000
1492-FB2C30
ATQR1
SP250MQMJ
HUWIS26
IH3-1
7899-I
AN-3196B-F3A-B-X-NR-AR-PM-NR-Y
9001SKS43BH2
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKT38LRR31
9001SKS11B
711-0160-G
9050JCK70V20
SR3P-05
LF120V18
ALFSWD
F18T8TW/K24
8501-KP13
V07E130P
SR3P-05
AHC160R
9001SKT38LGG31
Devar
Square D
Multi-Tech
Square D
Symcom
Square D
Square D
Square D
Square D
3020-4-420
PM820MG
MOS-1P
8502SDO2V02S
777-P2
9001SKT38LRR31
9050JCK70V20
8501-KP13
9001SKT38LGG31
SPARE PARTS
Pump Controller, 120VAC, 4-20ma Input, 4 SPDT
PM800 Power Monitor: Base Meter Unit with integrated display
Dual Channel Pump Protection Relay: HMWT & Seal Failure
NEMA 2 Contactor, 45 Amps, 120 Volt
3 Phase Electronic Overload Relay
Red Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
Multi-Function Timer, 5 timing ranges, DPDT, 120V, 11 pin
Control Relay, 5 Amp, 120VAC, 3PDT, LED Indicator
Green Push-To-Test LED Light: 30mm, NEMA 4X, 120VAC
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC,
172221HarrisRidgeCondominiums
Revision:Original
LarryWingo/JosephScott
July27,2015
Bulletin 1492
Markers
per Card
1492-L
1492-L
1492-J, L
1492-J, L
Marker Size
Pkg
Qty.
100
3 x 5 mm
1492-M3X5
120
3 x 12 mm
1492-M3X12
Cat. No.
200
5 x 5 mm
1492-M5X5
144
5 x 8 mm
1492-M5X8
144
5 x 10 mm
1492-M5X10
144
5 x 12 mm
1492-M5X12
96
5 x 15 mm
1492-M5X15
20
5 x 30 mm
1492-M5X30
200
6 x 5 mm
1492-M6X5
120
6 x 10 mm
1492-M6X10
120
6 x 12 mm
1492-M6X12
108
7 x 12 mm
1492-M7X12
160
8 x 5 mm
1492-M8X5
120
6 x 10 mm
1492-MN81
40
10 x 10 mm
1492-MN83
56
8 x 9 mm
1492-MS8X9
56
8 x 12 mm
1492-MS8X12
40
8 x 17 mm
1492-MS8X17
1667 PanelConnect
40
9 x 20 mm
1492-MS9X20
40
10 x 17 mm
1492-MS10X17
120
5 x 8 mm
1492-MR5X8
120
6 x 8 mm
1492-MR6X8
120
5 x 12 mm
1492-MR5X12
120
6 x 12 mm
1492-MR6X12
84
8 x 12 mm
1492-MR8X12
1492-WM3, -WMD1
80
5 x 5 mm
1492-MS5X5
80
5 x 9 mm
1492-MS5X9
1492-J, -L
80
5 x 12 mm
1492-MS5X12
80
6 x 9 mm
1492-MS6X9
80
6 x 12 mm
1492-MS6X12
96
5 x 10 mm
1492-MH5X10
96
5 x 15 mm
1492-MH5X15
80
6 x 12 mm
1492-MH6X12
Markers
per Card
Marker Size
Pkg.
Qty.
Cat. No.
32
9 x 24 mm1
1492-MW9X24
32
5 x 23 mm1
1492MW10X23
32
8 x 23 mm1
1492MW14X23
12
11 x 44 mm1
1492MW11X60
32
5 x 21 mm
1492-MW5-21
32
6 x 21 mm
1492-MW6-21
32
7 x 21 mm
1492-MW7-21
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1492-L
Cable Markers
1492-MW
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
12-91
Bulletin 1492
1492-15A, 1492-25A
1492-N23
1492-15E, 1492-25E
C
0.56
(14.3 mm)
1.44 (36.5 mm)
1492-N2
A = Width
B = Height
A = Width
B = Height
1492-N47
Cat. No.
1.70 (43.2 mm)
0.34
(8.6 mm)
1492-15A
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
0.75 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm) (19.1 mm)
1492-15E
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm)
1492-25A
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.203 in.
0.97 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.2 mm) (24.6 mm)
1492-25E
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.234 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.9 mm)
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 The 1492-SJS Insulating Sleeve reduces exposure to live parts on the 1492-N39 and 1492-N49. The 1492-SJS used with the 1492-N39 and 1492-H1 or 1492-
www.ab.com/catalogs
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
12-111
13
Bulletin 1492
Multiple Wire Connection Combination for Stranded Copper Conductors of the Same Gross Section for Allen-Bradley
Terminal Blocks
Terminal Blocks
Wire Size AWG (mm2)
#22
Cat. No.
1492-H4, -H5, -H6, -H7
#20 (0.5)
#18 (0.75)
#16 (1.5)
#14 (2.5)
#12 (4)
#20 (0.5)
#18 (0.75)
#16 (1.5)
#14 (2.5)
#12 (4)
#10 (6)
#8 (10)
Cat. No.
1
1492-HM1
1492-HM2
1492-HC6
1
1492-HM3
The total current flow through these terminal blocks (the sum of all inputs or the sum of all outputs)
must not exceed the rated current for the device.
6
7
Description
Type
Rating
H2C, HM2C
10 A
H2C, HM2C
600V
All
-4+104 F (-20+40 C)
All
-40+167 F (-40+75 C)
Diode Terminal Blocks Types H2D, HHM2D, WD2D, WD2DR, RD3DF and RD3DR
Description
8
9
Symbol
Type
Rating
V (RRM)
H2D, HM2D
600V
V (RWM)
V (R)
RD3DF, RD3DR
WD4DF, WD4DR
300V
V (RSM)
H2D, HM2D
600V
V (Rms)
H2D, HM2D
600V
I (O)
All
1.0 A
30 A (1 cycle)
10
I (FSM)
All
V (F)
All
1.1V
I (R)
All
10 A
T (A)
All
4+104 F (20+40 C)
T (S)
All
40+167 F (40+75 C)
The maximum voltage rating of the diode terminal blocks listed in the above table should not be exceeded even through the maximum reverse voltage rating of
the diode alone is 1000V.
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-114
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
Bulletin 1492
1492-WFB4
0
0.36"
(9.1 mm)
0.31"
(8 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
H6/WFB4
H5/WFB424
H4/WFB4250
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
Black No-indication
Black w/LED
Black w/Neon
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Steel)
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Angled Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Steel)
3 ft Scored A-B Rail
3 ft Rigid A-B Rail
3 ft High Rise A-B Rail
Standoff Brackets (Use Every 12 in.)
End Barrier
End Anchors and Retainers:
Screwless End Retainer
DIN Rail Normal Duty
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
A-B Rail Heavy Duty
10-Pole Side Jumper
Side Jumper Insulating Sleeve
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
Marking Systems:
Snap-In Marker Card For Base
Block
For Handle
Adhesive Labels
2 mA @ 24V
2 mA @ 24V
2 mA @ 300V
2 mA @ 300V
1/4 x 1-1/4 in.
5 x 20 mm
See page 12-42
Cat. No.
1492-H6
1492-H5
1492-H4
Pkg Qty.
25
25
25
Cat. No.
1492-WFB4
1492-WFB424
1492-WFB4250
Pkg Qty.
50
50
50
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-N1
1492-N22
1492-N44
1492-N25
1492-N37
10
2
2
20
20
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
Not Required
10
2
2
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-N23
1492-N49
1492-SJS
100
50
10
10
10
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-SJFB8-10
100
50
10
1492-PPSL3
50
1492-MS8X12 (56/card)
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-MS8X12 (56/card)
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-ALHFB (50/sheet)
5
5
1
1492-MS8X9 (56/card)
1492-ALHFB (50/card)
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-39
Bulletin 1492
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
1492-WM4, W4
50
1492-N42
1
2
1492-N49
1
1492-SJS
10
1492-SJ5-10
50
1492-SJ5A-10
50
1492-SJ5A-24
50
1492-SJ5B-24
50
1492-SJ5B-10
10
1492-JT3M
1492-W10
10
1492-SJ8-10
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-4
1492-SJ8A-3
1492-SJ6-10
1492-SJ6A-50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-2
50
1492-SJLM5-2
1492-WMD1
10
10
1492-SJFB8-10
5
6
10
1492-W3, WR3
3
4
10
1492-SJMD5-12
1492-WM3
10
1492-SJM5-10
10
1492-SJT5-20-R
10
1492-SJT5-20-B
Note: Side jumpers carry the same current rating as the terminal block used
with it
1 Side jumper insulating sleeve only for use with Cat. No. 1492-N49
Use jumper on single side of terminal block only
Uninsulated
Two-Level Jumper
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
20
1492-CJL5D
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-86
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
Bulletin 1492
0
1
1492-FPK2
1492-FPK224
1492-FPK248
1492-FPK2120
Non-Indicating
LED
LED
LED
LED
Leakage Current
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 24V
1.6 mA @ 264V
Working Voltage
1036V AC/DC
3570V AC/DC
60150V AC/DC
140250V AC
Characteristic
Indicator Type
Fuse Size
5 x 20 mm
Marker
1492-M5X5
1492-FPK2250
2
3
4
5
6
CSA Number
File
Guide
File
Class
E40735
XCFR2
LR67896
622801
1492-R
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
XCFR8
1492-RG
E160646
E40735
E187022
KDER2
XCFR2
XCIB2
1492-UF3
E40735
XCFR2
LR67896
622801
1492-W
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
LR67896
LR14074
622801
622801
1492-WG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
LR67896
LR14074
622801
622801
1492-J
E40735
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-JG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-L
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
1492-LG
E40735
E187022
XCFR2
XCIB2
223923
622801
622801
These numbers are actually UL file and guide numbers, as these products are UL Recognized Components per Canadian Safety Standards (cUR).
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-98
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
Bulletin 1492
In general, accessories for terminal blocks are not eligible for recognition by UL, CSA, or other third party approval agencies. The suitability of
the installation must be judged in the end use application due to the wide variety of possible uses. However, accessories are designed to
meet, and are tested to, the terminal block assembly requirements such as electrical spacings, etc.
#28
#26
#24
#22
#20
#18
#16
#14
#12
#10
#8
1492-CA1
1492-CAM1
1492-H4
1492-H5
1492-H6
1492-H7
1492-HM3
#6
#4
#2
#1
1/0
2/0
3/0
Cat. No.
1492-J10
1492-J16
1492-J2Q
1492-J3
1492-J35
1492-J3F
1492-J3P
1492-J4
1492-J4CTB
1492-J4Q
1492-J4TW
1492-J50
1492-J6
1492-J70
1492-JC3
1492-JD3
1492-JD3DF
1492-JD3DR
1492-JD3F
1492-JD3FB
1492-JD3PSS
1492-JD3PSSTP
1492-JD3PTP
1492-JD3RB***
1492-JD3RC001
1492-JD3SS
1492-JD4
1492-JD4C
1492-JDC3
1492-JDG3
1492-JDG3FB
1492-JDG3P
1492-JDG3PSS
1492-JDG3PSSTP
1492-JDG3PTP
1492-JDG4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
12-95
Bulletin 1492
1492-15A, 1492-25A
1492-N23
1492-15E, 1492-25E
C
0.56
(14.3 mm)
1.44 (36.5 mm)
1492-N2
A = Width
B = Height
A = Width
B = Height
1492-N47
Cat. No.
1.70 (43.2 mm)
0.34
(8.6 mm)
1492-15A
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
0.75 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm) (19.1 mm)
1492-15E
1.5 in.
1.03 in.
0.594 in. 0.234 in.
(38.1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm) (5.9 mm)
1492-25A
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.203 in.
0.97 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.2 mm) (24.6 mm)
1492-25E
1.88 in.
1.19 in.
0.688 in. 0.234 in.
(47.8 mm) (30.2 mm) (17.5 mm) (5.9 mm)
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 The 1492-SJS Insulating Sleeve reduces exposure to live parts on the 1492-N39 and 1492-N49. The 1492-SJS used with the 1492-N39 and 1492-H1 or 1492-
www.ab.com/catalogs
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
12-111
13
Bulletin 1492-FB
Fuse Holders
UL Listed for Branch Circuit Protection
Overview
The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-FB fuse holder line from Rockwell Automation
has a distinctive, standalone design with many unique features. These fuse
holders provide ease of use and installation (no special tools are needed),
with a versatile, space saving and nger-safe design. This product line also
stands out among the competition because of its distinct look, marker
ready feature, and expanded ventilation. The fuse clips are silver-plated
for improved fuse contact and there is a standardized LED indication
feature for both AC and DC voltages.
The class CC and J holders are UL listed for branch circuit protection.
Class CC and J fuses are ideal for wire protection, small motor loads,
and for group protection of small motor loads. The midget holders are
a UL recognized product where supplementary (1 1/2 x 13/32) fuses
are applied. The midget fuse holder is also approved for 10 x 38 IEC
midget fuses.
The 1492-FB fuse holder family is designed for use in many OEM applications
such as power supplies, equipment protection, primary and secondary
control transformers, solenoids, lighting and heater loads, and drives.
Product Selection
Fuse Holders
For Class CC Fuse
30 A*
Cat. No.
1492-FB1C30
1492-FB1C30-L
1492-FB1C30-D1
Description
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication (110-600V)
Fuse Holder with Indication, 1272V
Pieces per Carton
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication
Pieces per Carton
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder with Indication
Pieces per Carton
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
6
1492-FB2J30
1492-FB2J60
1492-FB2J30-L
1492-FB2J60-L
3
1492-FB3J30
1492-FB3J60
1492-FB3J30-L
1492-FB3J60-L
2
1492-FB2C30
1492-FB2C30-L
1492-FB3C30
1492-FB3C30-L
* All major fuse brands and current ranges have been evaluated for this fuse holder. Due to the heat they generate, the following fuses must be de-rated:
Ferraz Shamut ATQR 1.25 1 = 0.42 A max.
Ferraz Shamut ATQR 1.40 1 = 0.47 A max.
Specications
CC
1492-FBnC30 B
1492-FB1C30-D1 B
1492-FBnC30-L B
Approvals
Class CC
UL, CSA, CE
Maximum Voltage
600V Max
Maximum Current
30 A
M
1492-FBnM30 B
1492-FB1M30-D1 B
1492-FBnM30-L B
Midget
13/32 X 1 1/2
10 x 38 mm
UR, CSA, CE
600V Max
(690V AC max IEC)
30 A
(32 A IEC)
200 kA sym
Fuse Dependent
50 kA max UL
Product Type
(n = # of poles)
J60
1492-FBnJ60 B
1492-FBnJ60-L B
Class J
UL, CSA, CE
600V Max
30 A
60 A
200 kA sym
-4 130 F
-20 55 C
Cu, Stranded
Conductor Range
J30
1492-FBnJ30 B
1492-FBnJ30-L B
One wire
per Terminal
Two wires
per Terminal
(both wires must be same size)
0.43 in
(11 mm)
#18 4 AWG
(0.75 25 mm2)
0.79 in
(20 mm)
#18 1 AWG
(0.75 50 mm2)
#14 1 AWG
(2.5 50 mm2)
#18 8 AWG
(0.75 10 mm2)
#18 6 AWG
(0.75 16 mm2)
#14 #6 AWG
(2.5 16 mm2)
# 18 # 8 22 lbin
#6 #4 26 lbin
(0.75 25 mm2 2.5 nm)
Terminal
Tightening Torque
35 lbin
(4 nm)
Accessories
Bus Bars, Pin Style, When used with 1492-FB, type CC fuse holders, 600V AC
Cuttable, copper bus bar provided in 1 m length. UL 508 Listed, E56639, Category NMTR, cULus. CE to IEC 664
100 kA SCCR when used with Bus Protection, noted in table below.
Bus bars may also be used with 1492-FB - midget (10 x 38) fuse holders and 1492-SP Miniature Circuit Breaker/Supplementary Protector
Description
1-Phase
57
2-Phase
29
3-Phase
19
Package Quantity
Bus Protection
Max. Fuse Type J
175 A
200 A
175 A
200 A
175 A
200 A
Ampacity
80 A
100 A
80 A
100 A
80 A
100 A
Cat. No.
1492-A1B8
1492-A1B1
1492-A2B8
1492-A2B1
1492-A3B8
1492-A3B1
1492-A1E
10
10
1492-AME
10
10
80 A/100 A
1492-AAP
1492-AAT1
Copyright 2011 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Bulletin 1492
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
1492-WM4, W4
50
1492-N42
1
2
1492-N49
1
1492-SJS
10
1492-SJ5-10
50
1492-SJ5A-10
50
1492-SJ5A-24
50
1492-SJ5B-24
50
1492-SJ5B-10
10
1492-JT3M
1492-W10
10
1492-SJ8-10
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-4
1492-SJ8A-3
1492-SJ6-10
1492-SJ6A-50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-JD3FB, JDG3FB
50
1492-SJ8A-2
50
1492-SJLM5-2
1492-WMD1
10
10
1492-SJFB8-10
5
6
10
1492-W3, WR3
3
4
10
1492-SJMD5-12
1492-WM3
10
1492-SJM5-10
10
1492-SJT5-20-R
10
1492-SJT5-20-B
Note: Side jumpers carry the same current rating as the terminal block used
with it
1 Side jumper insulating sleeve only for use with Cat. No. 1492-N49
Use jumper on single side of terminal block only
Uninsulated
Two-Level Jumper
Pkg
Qty.
Cat. No.
20
1492-CJL5D
9
10
11
12
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-86
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
Bulletin 1492
1492-W4
1492-W6
0.20"
(5 mm)
1.78" (45.3 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
Wire Range (Rated Cross Section)
Wire Strip Length
Recommended Tightening Torque
Density
Housing Temperature Range
Terminal Blocks
Color:
Grey
Red
Blue
Black
Green
Yellow
Orange
Brown
White
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Steel)
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Angled Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Steel)
End Barrier
End Anchors and Retainers:
Screwless End Retainer
DIN Rail Normal Duty
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
Jumpers:
Insulated Side Jumper
Center Jumper 50-pole
Center Jumper 40-pole
Center Jumper 10-pole
Center Jumper 5-pole
Center Jumper 4-pole
Center Jumper 3-pole
Center Jumper 2-pole
Center Jumper Link
Center Jumper Cover White1
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
Separation Plate
Test Plug
Stackable Test Plug (with Legs)
Stackable Test Plug (without Legs)
Test Plug Adapter
Electrical Warning Plate (1-pole)
Electrical Warning Plate (4-pole)
Marking Systems:
Snap-in Marker Cards
0
1
0.24"
(6 mm)
1.78" (45.3 mm)
0.28"
(7 mm)
1.87" (47.6 mm)
10
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB10
10
2
2
50
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
100
50
10
1492-CJ5-50
1492-CJ5-10
1492-CJ5-5
1492-CJ5-4
1492-CJ5-3
1492-CJ5-2
1492-CJL5
1492-CJCW5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
100
50
50
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-SJ5-10 (10-pole)
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-N42 (2-pole)
1492-SJ6-10 (10-pole)
1492-CJ6-50
1492-CJ6-10
1492-CJ6-5
1492-CJ6-4
1492-CJ6-3
1492-CJ6-2
1492-CJL6
1492-CJCW6
1492-CJ7-40
1492-CJ7-10
1492-CJ7-5
1492-CJ7-4
1492-CJ7-3
1492-CJ7-2
1492-CJL7
1492-CJCW6
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
1492-PP3
50
1492-PP3
50
1492-PP10
50
1492-SP3
1492-TA285
1492-EWP5
1492-EWP5-4
50
10
10
10
1492-SP3
1492-TP28
1492-TP6EWL
1492-TP6E
1492-TA40
1492-EWP6
1492-EWP6-4
50
10
10
10
10
10
10
1492-TP28
1492-TA40
1492-EWP7
1492-EWP7-4
10
10
10
10
1492-MS5X12 (80/card)
1492-MS6X12 (80/card)
1492-MS6X12 (80/card)
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 May only be used as a marking surface. Cannot be installed over a center jumper.
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-11
Bulletin 1492
0.24"
(6 mm)
Specifications
Certifications
Voltage Rating
Maximum Current
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Grey
Grey/Green/Yellow
Red
Blue
Black
Green
Yellow
Orange
Brown
White
Accessories
Mounting Rails:
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Steel)
1 m Symmetrical DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Aluminum)
1 m Angled Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Steel)
End Barriers
Grey
End Anchors and Retainers:
Screwless End Retainer
DIN Rail Normal Duty
DIN Rail Heavy Duty
Jumpers:
Side Jumper 10-pole insulated
Screw Center Jumper 50-pole
Screw Center Jumper 10-pole
Screw Center Jumper 5-pole
Screw Center Jumper 4-pole
Screw Center Jumper 3-pole
Screw Center Jumper 2-pole
Center Jumper Cover White
Center Jumper Link
Screw Type Jumper Notching Tool
Other Accessories:
Partition Plate
End Cover
Test Plug Socket
Test Plug
Test Adapater
Electrical Warming Plate
Marking Systems:
Snap-in marker cards
Cat. No.
1492-W4TW
1492-W4TW-RE
1492-W4TW-B
1492-W4TW-BL
1492-W4TW-G
1492-W4TW-Y
1492-W4TW-OR
1492-W4TW-BR
1492-W4TW-W
Pkg Qty.
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pkg Qty.
50
Cat. No.
1492-J4M
Pkg Qty.
20
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
Cat. No.
Pkg Qty.
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
199-DR1
10
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EB3TW
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
1492-EBR3
10
2
2
50
1492-DR5
1492-DR6
1492-DR7
Not Required
10
2
2
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-ERL35
20
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
100
50
1492-SJ6-101
10
1492-SJ5-10
10
1492-CJ6-50
1492-CJ6-10
1492-CJ6-5
1492-CJ6-4
1492-CJ6-3
1492-CJ6-2
1492-CJCW6
1492-CJL6
5
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
1492-CJD5-50
1492-CJD5-10
1492-CJD5-5
1492-CJD5-4
1492-CJD5-3
1492-CJD5-2
1492-CJCW5
1492-CJL5
5
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
1492-CJJ6-10
1492-CJJ6-4
1492-CJJ6-3
1492-CJJ6-2
1492-T1
20
50
50
50
1492-PP10
50
1492-EBR3
50
1492-EBJ16
20
1492-EC3TW
1492-TP28
1492-TA40
10
10
10
1492-TA285
10
50
20
25
50
1492-MS6X9 (80/card)
1492-MS5X9 (80/card)
1492-TPS23L
1492-TP23
1492-TPJ6
1492-EWPJ5
1492-M6X12
(120/card)
13
www.ab.com/catalogs
12-16
0.965"
(24.5 mm)
0.20"
(5 mm)
1492-J4M
1492-WR3
1492-W4TW
Publication A117-CA001A-EN-P
Mtg. holes
.18 (4.57) dia.
.28 (7.11) c'bores
1.46
(37.13)
1.71
(43.48)
Dovetail
Option
.62
(15.75)
1.87
(47.50)
1.44
(36.57)
07-05-07
BU-SB07255
2F
2F
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed in conduit systems to:
Accommodate wiring devices
Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system
Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors
Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future
system changes
Connect conduit systems
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the
penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting
Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and
extreme cold conditions
Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean
Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food
processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are
common
Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of
fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase
your return on investment
Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging
cleaners to keep them looking like new
Internal green grounding screw - standard
Tapered threads for protection of wire insulation
Wide selection of covers available
Single or double conduit entry
Ample wiring room provided for easy installations
Dimension
A
B
C
D
E
F
Length of box
Overall length (including hubs)
Width of box
Overall width (including hubs)
Height of box
Overall height (including hubs)
Standard Materials:
www.crouse-hinds.com
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
35
2F
2F
Trade Size
FD2SS
/ 4"
4.63
5.41
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDC2SS
/ 4"
4.63
6.19
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
Trade Size
FDS2SS
/ 4"
4.63
5.41
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.03
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDA2SS
/ 4"
4.63
4.63
2.94
2.94
3.03
3.80
Catalog Number
Trade Size
FDX2SS
/ 4"
4.63
6.19
2.94
4.50
3.03
3.03
Catalog Number
DS7000BC
DS7000BF
36
www.crouse-hinds.com
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
DS7000SF
DS7000RF
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Application
Dry-tite boxes and covers protect wiring devices,
switches, electronic components and terminal
blocks in dry, damp and wet locations
Accessible wiring chamber provides a convenient
location to maintain or change a system, pull conductors and make splices
Junction box for branch conduits
General
Material
Finish
Powder-coated
Color
Silver
Volume (cu.in.)
17
Number of Gangs
One
Dimension Information
Hub Size (inches)
1/2
A (inches)
4 9/16
B (inches)
2 13/16
C (inches)
D (inches)
5/8
G (inches)
3 1/4
H (inches)
1 7/8
J (inches)
1 1/2
Packaging
T&B Inner Pack
Package in Units
50
Each
Application Support
Available on Website
Available on Website
Notes
Rain tight when used with appropriate Red Dot covers.
Certifications
RoHS Compliance
Yes
Certifications
File Nbr:
E 28688
[RTD] TEMPERATURE
2 WIRE TRANSMITTER
MODEL SM812EC
* LOW COST
* THERMO-HEAD
INSTALLATION
* 0.1% ACCURACY
*
DESCRIPTION
Conversion of RTD, (Resistance Temperature Detector)
signals is accomplished using the DEVAR Model
SM812EC signal transmitter. Surface mount technology
provides a slim profile allowing the SM812EC to mount
directly within miniature thermal connection heads. The
SM812EC accommodates Pt 100 RTDs and provides
a 4 to 20 mA output current proportional to the detected
temperature.
The SM812EC is available in a varety of precalibrated
temperature ranges. The span and zero potentiometers
provide span and zero adjustments of + 25% of the
normal range. Standard ranges, model numbers and
RTD resistance values at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% are
listed in table 1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
+ 0.1% span, includes effects of linearity,
hysterisis, and repeatability referred to
temperature input.
Nonlinearity:
0.1% relative to a 100 Pt RTD,
= 0.00385 standard curve for nominal range.
4:1 minimum improvement on nonlinearity
otherwise.
Thermal Effect:
1) Zero Shift of + 0.02% / Span / F
2) Span Shift of + 0.02% / Span / F
Circuitry:
Epoxy Encapsulated
Analog Circuitry w/ sealed potentiometers.
Power Supply:
1) Working voltage of 8.5 to 35 VDC
2) Supply Voltage Effect < + 0.001% / Span / Volt
Loop Considerations:
1) Loop Resistance Load Effect < + 0.002% Span /
300 Ohms
2) Maximum Loop resistance (V supply -8.5V) /
20mA
RFI immunity:
Rated class 3-C: 0.25% of span per SAMA PMC
33.1 -1987-2abc
Frequency Response:
Output -3dB @ 3Hz Input
Temperature range:
1) Ambient: -13 to 185F
2) Storage: -85 to 257F
Humidity:
0 to 95% noncondensing
Input:
Output:
1) Signal range: 4 to 20 mADC
2) Absolute Limit: 2 to 29 mA
3) Open RTD Indication: Output > 22mA
Calibration Range Adjustabilty:
1) Zero 25% of normal span
2) Span 25% of normal span
Range F
-40/120
0/200
0/300
0/500
0/750
0/1000
-30/130
40/140
50/85
0/150C
0/100
20/120
0/150
0/200C
30/100
35/85
0/250
-40/25C
0/50C
32/122
-200/0
0/100C
30/110
-100/0C
-50/50C
0/320C
30/130
-30/20
-40/25
30/65
50/100
0%
84.27
93.03
93.03
93.03
93.03
93.03
86.47
101.74
103.90
100.00
93.03
97.39
93.03
100.00
99.57
100.65
93.03
84.27
100.00
100.00
48.46
100.00
99.57
60.25
80.31
100.00
99.57
86.47
84.27
99.57
103.90
25%
93.03
103.90
109.30
120.04
133.33
146.48
95.21
107.15
105.80
114.57
98.48
102.82
101.19
119.40
103.36
103.36
106.61
90.69
104.88
104.88
59.80
109.73
103.90
70.33
90.19
130.90
104.98
89.21
87.84
101.46
106.61
50%
101.74
114.68
125.37
146.48
172.36
197.69
103.90
112.53
107.69
128.98
103.90
108.22
109.30
138.50
107.15
106.07
120.04
97.07
109.73
109.73
71.00
119.40
108.22
80.31
100.00
161.04
110.38
91.94
91.40
103.36
109.30
75%
110.38
125.37
141.24
172.36
210.14
246.65
112.53
117.90
109.57
143.23
109.30
113.61
117.36
157.31
110.92
108.76
133.33
103.42
114.57
114.57
82.07
128.98
112.53
90.19
109.73
190.45
115.75
94.67
94.94
105.25
111.99
100%
118.97
135.97
156.90
197.69
246.65
293.38
121.11
123.24
111.46
157.31
114.68
118.97
125.37
175.84
114.68
111.46
146.48
109.73
119.40
119.40
93.03
138.50
116.83
100.00
119.40
219.12
121.11
97.39
98.48
107.15
114.68
3-WIRE
RTD
+
POWER
SUPPLY
LOAD
0.375"
0.269" DIA
1 3/4"
ZERO
SPAN
0.191" DIA
THRU (2) PLACES
1 9/32"
PUMP CONTROLLER
MODEL 3020
* UP TO 4 PUMP CONTROLS
WITH OR WITHOUT
ALTERNATION
* 14 SEGMENT L.E.D. DISPLAY
FOR TRUE ALPHANUMERICS
* 7.5 AMP S.P.D.T. CONTROL
CONTACTS
* 4 TO 20mA, ANALOG
RETRANSMISSION
AVAILABLE
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 3020
INPUT
0/20mA, 4/20mA, 0/5V, 1/5V, 0/10V, or -10/10V
selected from keypad
ENCLOSURE
1/8 DIN, polycarbonate bezel, aluminum body
splash proof front panel
ALARMS
Status Indication: Front panel LEDs, flashing display, horn;
flashing display and horn active or inactive, menu selectable
Impedance:
Voltage input: > 1 Megohms
Current input: 10 Ohms
PERFORMANCE
Accuracy: 0.01%of input range
Contacts:
SPDT (form C) relays; 1 phase; 7.5 amps at 240 VAC / 24
VDC; 1/3HP at 120VAC 7.2FLA; 1/2HP at 240 VAC, 4.9FLA
POWER / VOLTAGE
Connections: 15 position, plug-in terminal block for power
and relay contacts; 9 position, plug-in terminal block for input,
output and excitation voltage; 24 to 14 AWG
DISPLAY
Six bright red LED, 0.54 inch high, 14 segment alphanumeric
characters. Four characters are used for process indication,
and two characters for dummy zeros or process descriptors.
Display range is +9999 to -1999 counts. Display provides
plain English prompts during configuration.
OPTIONS
-420
-020
-D232
-D485
-005
-010
-105
-NE4C
-NE4S
-NE4D
-NE7
-M36G
NEMA 4 Cover
NEMA 4X Enclosure (1 Unit)
NEMA 4X Enclosure (2 Units)
Explosion Proof Housing
2 Pipe Mount Kit (NE4S,NE4D,NE7)
2 YEARS
Made in USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
3020-4
indicator / controller with 4 alarms
-XXX
select desired options
3020-4-420
Series
PBLT2
&
PBLTX
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLTX
3-7/16
[87.31]
2-3/16
[55.56]
BREATHER TUBE
1/4 x THRU
[6.35 x THRU]
7-63/64
[202.80]
1-1/2 1/2 NPT
[38.10]
60
TYP
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLT2
2-3/16
[55.56]
Scan here
to watch
product video
BREATHER TUBE
PBLT2 and PBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured for years of
trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the height of liquid above
the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The transmitters consist of a
piezoresistive sensing element, encased in a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and
slurry applications with features to protect the unit from these demanding applications.
Large diameter 316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating
solids.
The PBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology,
grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and lightning ground strike
transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is not covered by warranty). The PBLTX
is UL approved intrinsically safe for use in hazardous locations when used with proper
barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented cable.
Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospheric
pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance free filter eliminating
particulate or water droplets from entering the transducers.
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
LEVEL
FEATURES
Excellent chemical compatibility with 316 construction and ETFE cable
Lightning and surge protection on PBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on PBLTX models
Large diameter, non-clogging, damage resistant, 316 SS diaphragm seal
APPLICATIONS
Wastewater: Sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical storage tanks;
Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Sumps; Reservoirs.
Model
PBLT2-5-40
PBLT2-10-40
PBLT2-15-60
PBLT2-20-60
PBLT2-5-40-PU
PBLT2-10-40-PU
PBLT2-15-60-PU
PBLT2-20-60-PU
PBLT2-3.5M-5M-PU
PBLT2-5M-10M-PU
PBLT2-10M-18M-PU
320
Range psi
(ft w.c.) [m w.c.]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 ( 34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
4.97 (11.48) [3.5]
14.21 (32.81) [10]
25.58 (59.06) [18]
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
16.40 (5)
32.81 (10)
59.06 (18)
Cable Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS,
epoxy, cable: ETFE or polyurethane.
Accuracy: 0.25% full-scale (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Temperature Limit: PBLT2: 0 to 200F
(-18 to 93C); PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18
to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range:
PBLT2: 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C);
PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F.
Pressure Limit: 2X full-scale.
Power Requirement: PBLT2: 13 to 30
VDC, PBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval - Change model number from PBLT2 to PBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths - Contact the factory
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, intrinsically safe zener barrier
A-625, 316 SS Cable Hanger use with NPT option for attaching
chain for easy pulling out of application
1.751
11:1.881
t
1.142
.791
locu
Lockln.erta
Key locks
p.843
p.344
p.344
p.344
'T' handl. .
Wing handlu
Wing padlock
p.344
p.344
p.344
lntertor handle
p.344
Combination
Padlocks
'L' handlu
p.344
Duet cap
p.346
The 880 SCQ4 acceaorlea are to be uaed with theee encloure .ertea, amongst othera :
5100 ES
6412 ES
5412 DDS
8412
5412 ESA
Combination lock
llO~K
CATALOG # :
KEY NUMBER :
K-1.1
K8y Included? :
M...rtal:
ForuHwllh :
p1a11111.-1
ESri-.1412
EBA, 6412 ESDD..
CATALDG#:
KEY NUMBER:
K8y Included? :
.......
Foruwlth:
llOSCQ4-NL
Non
No
Plllbld ....I
ES Hrln, 1412
E8A, 6412 ESDD. ..
Padlock provisions
CATALOG # :
KEY NUMBER:
CATALOG# :
880 PDLK375
KEY NUMBER: K-1.1
K8y Included? : YH
Matertal :
BteelJPIMllc
For u wllh :
880 PLESQ31
General purpo
880 PLES0375
P9cllock
K8y Included? : No
Material :
For UH wllh :
Stalnleu ateel
ES Mrt... 8412
ESA, 6412 ESDD.
CATAlDG # :
KEY NUMBER :
K8y Included? :
Mmertal :
For UM with :
CATALOG# :
KEY NUMBER :
880 PL
UH padlock
No
Plated steel
ES ri-, 8412
ESA, 5412 ESDD...
B80 Pl.SS
U.. padlock
K8y Included?: No
M...rial:
For UH wfth :
Stlllnl... lll:MI
ES urlea, 8412
ESA, 5412 ESDD.
1 point lock :
880 ~L
a point lock :
1e& ESL2A
KEY NUMBER: K-1.1
IC8y Included? : V..
Material :
Zinc CUI
For uH wllh :
ES rt-. 1412
CATALDG # :
KEY NUMBER:
K.-v Included? :
11.mrtal :
For u with :
Wing knob
CATALOG ti:
KEY NUMBER :
IC8y Included? :
Material:
Foruwllh :
~-
180 SCQ4.T
"-T
~
Palyamlde GFJ21nc
ES Hrlea, 1412
E8A, 6412 ESDD...
880 SCQ4.8H
K.SH
V..
Polyamlde GiF/Zlnc
ES HrtH, 1412
ESA. &412 ESDD...
Star handle
l80 &CQt.WNH
None
NCI
Polyamld GF/Zlnc
ESrl-,1412
EBA, M12 ESDD.
CATALOG#:
KEY NUMBER:
Key Included? :
M...rial:
For UH with :
llO SCQ4.STH
Nona
No
Polyamlde GF/Zlnc
ES ...lea, 8412
ESA, 15412 ESDD.-
Interior handle
CATALOG ti :
880 SCQ4.DIH
KEY NUMBER : Nona
* C.nnm be uaed with by lock.
Mnlrial :
Red polyamld
For u with :
ES rt-. 9412
E&A, M12 ESDD...
CATALOG# :
KEY NUMBER :
IC8y Included? :
M"'9rtal:
Foruwllh:
l80 8CQ4.WNP
Padlock
Na
Polyamlde OF/Zinc
ESri-.1412
ESA, IS412 ESDD..,
ELECTRONIC/GLASS FUSES
GGC / GGC-V
GGM / GGM-V
Glass Body
Fast Acting
1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 Axial Leads Optional
Glass Body
Fast Acting
5mm x 20mm
1-1/2 Axial Leads Optional
Standard
Fuse Ampere Ratings
Standard
Fuse Ampere Ratings
CATALOG
NUMBER
GGC1/100
GGC1/32
GGC1/16
GGC1/10
GGC1/8
GGC15/100
GGC175/1000
GGC3/16
GGC2/10
GGC1/4
GGC3/10
GGC3/8
GGC4/10
GGC1/2
GGC6/10
GGC3/4
GGC8/10
GGC1
GGC1-1/4
GGC1-1/2
GGC1-3/4
GGC1-6/10
GGC2
GGC2-1/4
GGC2-1/2
GGC3
GGC3-2/10
GGC4
GGC5
GGC6
GGC6-3/10
GGC7
GGC7-1/2
GGC8
GGC10
GGC12
GGC15
GGC20
GGC25
GGC30
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AXIAL LEAD
CAT. NO
AMPERE
RATING
VOLTS
GGC-V1/100
GGC-V1/32
GGC-V1/16
GGC-V1/10
GGC-V1/8
GGC-V15/100
GGC-V175/1000
GGC-V3/16
GGC-V2/10
GGC-V1/4
GGC-V3/10
GGC-V3/8
GGC-V4/10
GGC-V1/2
GGC-V6/10
GGC-V3/4
GGC-V8/10
GGC-V1
GGC-V1-1/4
GGC-V1-1/2
GGC-V1-3/4
GGC-V1-6/10
GGC-V2
GGC-V2-1/4
GGC-V2-1/2
GGC-V3
GGC-V3-2/10
GGC-V4
GGC-V5
GGC-V6
GGC-V6-3/10
GGC-V7
N/A
GGC-V8
GGC-V10
GGC-V12
GGC-V15
GGC-V20
GGC-V25
GGC-V30
1/100A
1/32A
1/16A
1/10A
1/8A
15/100A
175/1000A
3/16A
2/10A
1/4A
3/10A
3/8A
4/10A
1/2A
6/10A
3/4A
8/10A
1A
1-1/4A
1-1/2A
1-3/4A
1-6/10A
2A
2-1/4A
2-1/2A
3A
3-2/10A
4A
5A
6A
6-3/10A
7A
7-1/2A
8A
10A
12A
15A
20A
25A
30A
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
125V
125V
32V
32V
32V
I.R.
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
5
5
5
CATALOG
NUMBER
AXIAL LEAD
CAT. NO
AMPERE
RATING
VOLTS
I.R.
GGM1/16
GGM1/10
GGM1/8
GGM2/10
GGM1/4
GGM3/10
GGM4/10
GGM1/2
GGM6/10
GGM7/10
GGM3/4
GGM8/10
GGM1
GGM1-2/10
GGM1-1/4
GGM1-1/2
GGM1-6/10
GGM2
GGM2-1/2
GGM3
GGM4
GGM5
GGM6
GGM7
GGM8
GGM10
GGM15
GGM-V1/16
GGM-V1/10
GGM-V1/8
GGM-V2/10
GGM-V1/4
GGM-V3/10
GGM-V4/10
GGM-V1/2
GGM-V6/10
GGM-V7/10
GGM-V3/4
GGM-V8/10
GGM-V1
N/A
GGM-V1-1/4
GGM-V1-1/2
GGM-V1-6/10
GGM-V2
GGM-V2-1/2
GGM-V3
GGM-V4
GGM-V5
GGM-V6
GGM-V7
GGM-V8
GGM-V10
GGM-V15
1/16A
1/10A
1/8A
2/10A
1/4A
3/10A
4/10A
1/2A
6/10A
7/10A
3/4A
8/10A
1A
1-2/10A
1-1/4A
1-1/2A
1-6/10A
2A
2-1/2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
10A
15A
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
250V
125V
125V
125V
125V
125V
250V
250V
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C 14
Gross Automation (877) 268-3700 www.ferrazshawmutsales.com [email protected]
Primary Voltage:
Secondary Voltage:
240 x 480
120 x 240
230 x 460
115 x 230
220 x 440
110 x 220
Overall
Dimensions
50/60 Hertz
Mounting
Centers
Mounting
Slot
Height
with
Fuse
Block
Adapter
Approx.
Ship
Weight
Lbs.
1.7
GXH
Height
with
Finger
Guard
0.42/0.21
2.60
3.35
2.60
2.13
2.17
0.22 x 0.44
2.98
2.79
0.83/0.42
2.99
3.74
2.85
2.52
2.60
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
1.25/0.63
2.99
4.29
2.85
2.52
3.15
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
4.3
SP250MQMJ
2.08/1.04
3.78
4.09
3.40
3.31
2.99
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
6.5
SP350MQMJ
2.92/1.46
3.78
4.69
3.40
3.31
3.58
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
8.2
300
SP500MQMJ
4.17/2.08
4.49
4.69
3.78
3.78
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.16
3.97
11
500
SP750MQMJ
6.25/3.13
5.25
4.691
4.37
4.50
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
16
1000
650
SP1000MQMJ
8.33/4.17
5.25
5.471
4.37
4.50
4.45
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
21
1500
1000
SP1500MQMJ
12.5/6.25
5.25
6.851
4.37
4.50
5.83
0.31 x 0.81
4.75
4.56
28
2000
1300
SP2000MQMJ
16.7/8.33
3000
2000
SP3000MQMJ
25.0/12.5
5000
3000
SP5000MQMJ
41.7/20.8
VA
Rating
CE VA
Rating
Catalog
Number
Mtg.
Fig.
Output
Amps
50
50
SP50MQMJ
100
100
SP100MQMJ
150
150
SP150MQMJ
250
160
350
250
500
750
6.38
5.87
5.31
5.75
4.84
0.31 x 0.81
5.50
5.31
35
7.50
7.50
6.50
6.30
7.28
0.44 x 1.00
6.50
6.50
64
8.98
9.88
7.76
7.40
7.28
0.44 x 1.00
N/A
N/A
97
Primary and Secondary voltage links/jumpers supplied standard with all transformers.
Special voltages and VA sizes available upon request.
1
Note For 750 through 2000 VA units actual overall depth is 0.24 plus the value in column B.
* See page 10 for dimensional drawings.
Primary Voltage:
Secondary Voltage:
VA
Rating
CE VA
Rating
Catalog
Number
240 x 480
12 x 24
Mtg.
Fig.
Output
Amps
230 x 460
11.5 x 23
220 x 440
11 x 22
Overall
Dimensions
A
Mounting
Centers
C
50/60 Hertz
Mounting
Slot
GXH
Height
with
Finger
Guard
Height
with
Fuse
Block
Adapter
Approx.
Ship
Weight
Lbs.
50
50
SP50QR
4.17/2.08
2.60
3.35
2.60
2.13
2.17
0.22 x 0.44
2.98
2.79
1.7
100
100
SP100QR
8.33/4.17
2.99
3.54
2.85
2.52
2.40
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
150
150
SP150QR
12.5/6.25
2.99
4.29
2.85
2.52
3.15
0.22 x 0.44
3.23
3.04
4.3
250
160
SP250QR
20.8/10.4
3.78
4.09
3.40
3.31
2.99
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
6.5
350
250
SP350QR
29.2/14.6
3.78
4.69
3.40
3.31
3.58
0.22 x 0.44
3.78
3.59
8.3
500
300
SP500QR
41.7/20.8
4.49
5.47
3.78
3.78
3.66
0.31 x 0.81
4.16
3.97
11
Primary and Secondary voltage links/jumpers supplied standard with all transformers.
Special voltages and VA sizes available upon request.
* See page 10 for dimensional drawings.
Page 5
Dimensional Drawings
Some actual transformer units may differ from dimensional drawings shown below.
C
GxH
GxH
FIGURE B
FIGURE A
GxH
FIGURE C
Page 10
SPEC-00295
K63.422.2211
7
763.422.2600
FINISH
ACCESSORIES
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
NEMA/EEMAC Type 12
CSA, File No. 42186, Type 12
IEC 60529, IP55
BULLETIN: A12L
APPLICATION
Standard Product
Catalog Number
A544208LPG
A544208LP
A604808LPG
A604808LP
A604810LPG
A604810LP
A606010LPG
A606010LP
A726010ULPG
A726010ULP
A727210ULPG
A727210ULP
A604812LPG
A604812LP
A606012LPG
A606012LP
A726012ULPG
A726012ULP
A727212ULPG
A727212ULP
A604816LPG
A604816LP
A606016LPG
A606016LP
A726016ULPG
A726016ULP
AxBxC in.
54.00 x 42.00 x 8.00
54.00 x 42.00 x 8.00
60.06 x 48.06 x 8.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 8.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 10.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 10.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 12.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 12.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 16.06
Mild Steel
AxBxC mm
1372 x 1067 x 203
1372 x 1067 x 203
1526 x 1221 x 205
1526 x 1221 x 205
1526 x 1221 x 256
1526 x 1221 x 256
1526 x 1526 x 256
1526 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1526 x 256
1830 x 1830 x 256
1830 x 1830 x 256
1526 x 1221 x 306
1526 x 1221 x 306
1526 x 1526 x 306
1526 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1526 x 306
1830 x 1830 x 306
1830 x 1830 x 306
1526 x 1221 x 408
1526 x 1221 x 408
1526 x 1526 x 408
1526 x 1526 x 408
1830 x 1526 x 408
1830 x 1526 x 408
Interior
Finish
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gauge
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Panel
A54P42
A54P42
A60P48
A60P48
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
Conductive
Panel
A54P42G
A54P42G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
Panel
Gauge
12
12
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Stiffener
(in.)
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
Stiffener
(mm)
381
381
381
381
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
S (in.)
15.92
15.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
S (mm)
404
404
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Spec-00295 K
Catalog Number
A727216ULPG
A727216ULP
A604820LPG
A604820LP
A726020ULPG
A726020ULP
A727220ULPG
A727220ULP
A604824LPG
A604824LP
A606024LPG
A606024LP
A726024ULPG
A726024ULP
A727224ULPG
A727224ULP
AxBxC in.
72.06 x 72.06 x 16.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 16.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 20.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 20.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 20.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 48.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
60.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 60.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 24.06
72.06 x 72.06 x 24.06
Interior
Finish
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
Gray
White
AxBxC mm
1830 x 1830 x 408
1830 x 1830 x 408
1526 x 1221 x 510
1526 x 1221 x 510
1830 x 1526 x 510
1830 x 1526 x 510
1830 x 1830 x 510
1830 x 1830 x 510
1526 x 1221 x 611
1526 x 1221 x 611
1526 x 1526 x 611
1526 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1526 x 611
1830 x 1830 x 611
1830 x 1830 x 611
Gauge
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Panel
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
A60P48
A60P48
A60P60
A60P60
A72P60
A72P60
A72P72
A72P72
Conductive
Panel
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
A60P48G
A60P48G
A60P60G
A60P60G
A72P60G
A72P60G
A72P72G
A72P72G
Panel
Gauge
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Stiffener
(in.)
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
15.00
15.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
24.00
24.00
Stiffener
(mm)
610
610
381
381
533
533
610
610
381
381
533
533
533
533
610
610
S (in.)
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
15.92
15.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
19.92
23.92
23.92
S (mm)
608
608
404
404
506
506
608
608
404
404
506
506
506
506
608
608
<
<
&
%
$
$
<<
&&
*Important: Visit tools.hoffmanonline.com/attachments to access our Cooling Selection Tool to determine the
appropriate cooling solution for your application.
Popular Accessories
Enclosure Width (B Dimension)
42.00 in. (1067 mm)
48.06 in. (1221mm)
60.06 in. (1526mm)
72.06 in. (1830mm)
Lights
LED24V15
LED24V15
LED24V15
LED24V15
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Spec-00295 K
Hole Seals
AS050
AS050
AS050
AS050
Window Kits
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
APWK53NF
Mild Steel
Material
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Painted steel
Accessories
Panel Size
D x E (in.)
9.00 x 21.00
9.00 x 21.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 9.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
13.00 x 13.00
15.00 x 15.00
15.00 x 15.00
17.00 x 9.00
17.00 x 9.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 13.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
17.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 13.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 17.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
21.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 13.00
33.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 17.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 21.00
27.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 27.00
27.00 x 27.00
33.00 X 13.00
33.00 x 13.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 21.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 27.00
33.00 x 33.00
33.00 x 33.00
33.00 x 33.00
37.00 x 21.00
37.00 x 21.00
37.00 x 29.00
37.00 x 29.00
39.00 x 21.00
39.00 x 21.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 27.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 33.00
39.00 x 39.00
Panel Size
D x E (mm)
229 x 533
229 x 533
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 229
330 x 330
330 x 330
330 x 330
330 x 330
381 x 381
381 x 381
432 x 229
432 x 229
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 330
432 x 432
432 x 432
432 x 432
432 x 432
533 x 330
533 x 330
533 x 330
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 432
533 x 533
533 x 533
533 x 533
533 x 533
686 x 330
838 x 686
686 x 432
686 x 432
686 x 432
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 533
686 x 686
686 x 686
686 x 686
838 X 330
838 x 330
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 533
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 686
838 x 838
838 x 838
838 x 838
940 x 533
940 x 533
940 x 737
940 x 737
991 x 533
991 x 533
991 x 686
991 x 686
991 x 686
991 x 838
991 x 838
991 x 838
991 x 991
Panel Gauge
or Thickness
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
Edge
Flanges
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
T (in.)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
T (mm)
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
Number
of Holes
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
6
6
4 (no D dim. center hole)
4 (no D dim. center hole)
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Spec-00310 P
Catalog Number
A42P42G
A48P24
A48P24G
A48P30
A48P30G
A48P36
A48P36G
A48P36SS6
A48P36AL
A48P42
A48P42G
A48P48
A48P48G
A54P42
A54P42G
A60P24
A60P24G
A60P30
A60P30G
A60P36
A60P36G
A60P36SS6
A60P36AL
A60BFP42
A60BFP42G
A60P48
A60P48G
A60P60
A60P60G
A72P36
A72P36G
A72P60
A72P60G
A72P72
A72P72G
Material
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
Painted steel
Conductive steel
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Spec-00310 P
Panel Size
D x E (in.)
39.00 x 39.00
45.00 x 21.00
45.00 x 21.00
45.00 x 27.00
45.00 x 27.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 33.00
45.00 x 39.00
45.00 x 39.00
44.00 x 44.00
44.00 x 44.00
50.00 x 38.00
50.00 x 38.00
57.00 x 21.00
57.00 x 21.00
57.00 x 27.00
57.00 x 27.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
57.00 x 33.00
56.00 x 38.00
56.00 x 38.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 44.00
56.00 x 56.00
56.00 x 56.00
69.00 x 33.00
69.00 x 33.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 56.00
68.00 x 68.00
68.00 x 68.00
Panel Size
D x E (mm)
991 x 991
1143 x 533
1143 x 533
1143 x 686
1143 x 686
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 838
1143 x 991
1143 x 991
1118 x 1118
1118 x 1118
1270 x 965
1270 x 965
1448 x 533
1448 x 533
1448 x 686
1448 x 686
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1448 x 838
1422 x 965
1422 x 965
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1118
1422 x 1422
1422 x 1422
1753 x 838
1753 x 838
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1422
1727 x 1727
1727 x 1727
Panel Gauge
or Thickness
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
12 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
0.10 in./3 mm
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
Edge
Flanges
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
T (in.)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.75
0.75
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
T (mm)
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
22
22
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
22
22
22
22
22
22
19
19
22
22
22
22
Number
of Holes
8
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
10
10
12
12
10
10
8
8
12
12
10
10
Accessories
F22HD
F22HB
F22WG
F44HD
F44HB
F44BK60
F44B360
F44BB2C
F44BB3C
F44WG
F66WR44c,d
F66WRE44c,d
F66HD
F66HB
F66BK60
F66B560
F66BB2C
F66BB3C
F66WG
F88WR66c,d
F88WRE66c,d
F88WR44c,d
F88WRE44c,d
F88HD
F88HB
F88BK60
F88WG
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60-in. long.
Standard packages of wireway contain one gasket and one set of screws to join sections, except Cross fittings which contain three of each, Tee fittings which contain two of each and Telescope fittings which contain
none. Additional gasket and screw sets may be ordered by catalog number.
UL 870
Box Connector
When wireway enters an enclosure, a box connector should be used
on the inside of the enclosure to ensure a tight and stable seal.
Bulletin: F20
D
in./mm
3.88
99
5.38
137
7.62
194
9.62
244
Catalog Number
F22WB
F44WB
F66WB
F88WB
E
in./mm
3.88
99
5.38
137
7.62
194
9.62
244
All dimensions are to outside surfaces. Allow .12 in. (3 mm) additional for gasket at joints.
Barrier Kits
3 Compartment
Catalog Number
F44BB3C
F66BB3C
in.
0.00
0.00
mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
All dimensions are to outside surfaces. Allow .12 in. (3 mm) additional for gasket at joints.
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60 in. long.
Bracket Mounted
Catalog Number
F44B360
F66B560
AxB in.
0.00
0.00
AxB mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
All dimensions are to outside surfaces. Allow .12 in. (3 mm) additional for gasket at joints.
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60 in. long.
2 Compartment
Catalog Number
F44BB2C
F66BB2C
in.
0.00
0.00
mm
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
W (mm)
76
114
All dimensions are to outside surfaces. Allow .12 in. (3 mm) additional for gasket at joints.
Package consists of five barriers or five barrier brackets. Each barrier is 60 in. long.
Bolt-On
Catalog Number
F44BK60
F66BK60
F88BK60
in.
4.00 x 4.00
6.00 x 6.00
8.00 x 8.00
Catalog Number
F22WG
F44WG
F66WG
F88WG
mm
102 x 102
152 x 152
203 x 203
W (in.)
3.00
4.50
6.00
W (mm)
76
114
152
AxB in./mm
2.50 x 2.50
64 x 64
4.00 x 4.00
102 x 102
6.00 x 6.00
152 x 152
8.00 x 8.00
203 x 203
Corrosion Inhibitors
Industrial Corrosion Inhibitors
Standard Product
Catalog Number
AHCI1DV
AHCI5E
AHCI10E
AHCI60R
AHCI240R
AHCI238S
Package Qty.
50
25
12
3
1
6
Unprotected by Chemical
Severe surface attack; tarnish; pitting
Surface discoloration; pitting
Severe corrosion
Heavy corrosive attack
Severe corrosion
Moderate corrosive attack
Lighting Packages
PANELITE LED Enclosure Light
2
4 VDC operation for superior
lighting performance with minimal
power consumption
140-degree cone angle casts a
broad covering of neutral light
Center section rotates 120 degrees
to re-direct light where needed
Long life; 70 percent of initial
luminance at 50,000 hours (at 25 C)
High power LED emitters produce
470 Lumens for superior lighting
performance; provides up to 50
percent more usable light than
comparable length fluorescent
lights
Can be wired using optional
PANELITE Cable Accessories or
can be hard-wired with terminal
blocks included in hardware kit
Up to five lights can be daisychained together using hard-wired
connection to power supply or
catalog number LPC72 power
cable with leads
Catalog Number
LED24V15
Description
LED Light, 15 in.
PP
VDC
24
Amps
.5
W
in./mm
15.00
381
X
in./mm
8.00
203
PP
PP
PP
PP
Bulletin: A80LT
1
20 VAC, 50/60 Hz operation
Can be wired using optional
PANELITE Cable Accessories or
can be hard-wired with terminal
blocks included in hardware kit
Available in 15-, 18- and 28-in.
lengths with ability to daisy chain
up to five lights together using
one power supply
Fluorescent bulb not included
W
VAC Hz
Amps in./mm
Catalog Number Description
LF120V15
Fluorescent Light, 15 in. 120 50/60 .13
14.50
368
LF120V18
Fluorescent Light, 18 in. 120 50/60 .13
17.50
445
LF120V28
Fluorescent Light, 28 in. 120 50/60 .26
27.75
705
X
in./mm
9.63
245
12.63
321
22.88
581
Bulb
(purchase
separately)
F6T5
F8T5
F14T5
Bulletin: A80LT
PP
:
;
PP
PP
Catalog Number
ALFSWD
PLFSWD
Description
Door switch assembly (order connection cable separately)
Door switch assembly for PROLINE (order connection cable separately)
FEATURES
Bulletin: A80LT
APPLICATION
Catalog Number
LDSWITCH
.25
[6]
.25
[6]
Bulletin: A80LT
Catalog Number
PDLFBRKT
Description
Mounting Bracket Kit
Max. Voltage
250 AC / 48 DC
1.08
[27]
5.70
[145]
.88
[22]
7.25
[184]
87574479
Catalog Number
LEDPUCK
AxBxC in./mm
2.25 x 3.75 x 1.38
57 x 95 x 35
Product Weight
0.22 lbs.
Bulletin: A80LT
Accessories
Sockets
DEC
SR3P Sockets
SR3P-05
Style
32when
using BAA
Tenninal/Torque
(9 - 11.5 inlbsl
WireSiza
Maximum up to 2-#12AWG
Electrical Rating
300V, 10A
Compatible Relay
RR3PA. RR2KP
Compatible Timer
Hold-Down Spring
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-203 (limers)
8.5
a
SR3P-05C Fingersafe
Style
Tenninal/Torque
Wire Size
Maximum up to 2-#12AWG
Elactrical Rating
300V. 10A
Compatible Relay
Compatible Timer
Hold-Down Spring
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-203 (Timers)
Terminal
Arrangement
--:n
1
I
I
I
I
~-,-~
{TOPVIEW)
SR3P-06
Style
Tenninal/Torque
Wire Size
Maximum up to 2-#12AWG
Electrical Rating
30DV. 10A
Compatible Relay
Compatible Timer
Tenninal
Arrangement
2-ill4.2 Moundng Hole !~
(M4 screw hole
~
)
'~,
33
Hold-Down Spring
Hold-Down Clip
SFA-202 (Timers)
F-12
www_idec.com
_ _ _ _...-t_5_m_1n.
(i
~~'
'
(TOPVIEW)
DSL/Telephone lines
T1/E1/J1 Telco lines
Features
Description
The HGLN-D2T is a high performance lightning and surge protector
that provides superior protection for two DSL, Telephone and T1
lines from transients and surges.
The design of the HGLN-D2T incorporates the use of three terminal
differential gas discharge tubes which provide superior common
and differential mode protection against conducted transients
versus the use of lower cost two terminal tubes. The HGLN-D2T
utilizes the gas discharge tubes on each pair to provide superior
power handling capability.
The HGLN-D2T features two RJ11 jacks for ease of installation. Additional features include a ground lug directly on
the lightning protector housing providing superior grounding. Integral mounting feet are provided on the cast
aluminum house.
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Connections
Clamping Voltage
230 volts
Pinout
Mechanical Specifications
Enclosure Material
Cast Aluminum
Ground Lug
10 AWG Max.
Operating Temperature
Weight
Dimensions (H x W X D)
RoHS Compliant
Yes
T5020-W
Description
20 Amp, 125 Volt, NEMA 5-20R, 2P, 3W, Narrow Body Single Receptacle, Straight
Blade, Tamper Resistant, Commercial Grade, Grounding, Back & Side Wired, Steel
Strap, - WHITE
Product Features
Color: White
NEMA: 5-20R
AC Horsepower Ratings
At Rated Voltage 1 HP
Environmental Specifications
Flammability Rated V-2 per UL94
Operating -40C to 60C
Temperature
Mechanical Specifications
Terminal ID Brass-Hot, GreenGround, WhiteNeutral
Terminal Accom. 14-10 AWG
Product ID Ratings are
permanently marked
on device
Electrical Specifications
Dielectric Voltage Withstands 2000V per
UL498
Current Limiting Full Rated Current
Temperature Rise Max 30C after 250
cycles OL at 200
percent rated current
Material Specifications
Face Material Thermoplastic Nylon
Body Material Thermoplastic Nylon
Line Contacts Brass Triple-Wipe
UL498 File E13399
Terminal Screws Brass 10-32
Grounding Screw Brass 8-32
Yoke Zinc-Plated Steel
Clamp Nuts Zinc-Plated Steel
Ground Clips Brass-Plated
Standards and Certifications
NEMA WD-6
ANSI C-73
UL Fed Spec WC-596 File E13399
CSA C22.2 No. 42 File 152105
NOM 057
N7899-I
Color:
Environmental Specifications
Flammability: Rated V-2 per UL94
Operating Temperature: -35C to +66C
Ivory
NEMA: 5-20R
Material Specifications
Face Material: Thermoplastic
Body Material: Polycarbonate
Line Contacts: Brass Triple Wipe .031
Thick
Terminal Screws: Plated Steel
Grounding Screw: Plated Steel
Yoke: Zinc-Plated Steel
Clamps: Brass
Notes: w/ Wallplate
Mechanical Specifications
Terminal ID: Brass-Hot, Green-Ground,
Silver-Neutral
Terminal Accom.: 14-10 AWG
Product ID: Ratings are permanently
marked on device
Product Features
Feature: SmartlockPro Slim
Amperage: 20 Amp
Voltage: 125 Volt
NEMA: 5-20R
Pole: 2
Wire: 3
Trip Level: Class A, 5mA plus or minus
1mA
Termination: Back & Side
Face Material: Thermoplastic
Body Material: Polycarbonate
Grounding: Self-Grounding
Strap Material: Galvanized Steel
Color: Ivory
UL Fed Spec WC-596: Yes
Standards and Certifications: UL/CSA
Warranty: 2-Year Limited
Notes: w/ Wallplate
84004-40
Wallplates
Brand Features
Familiar and functional, Leviton Traditional Wallplates are designed for use with
Traditional Leviton devices. They represent styles and form factors that have stood the
test of time. Their clean lines work in virtually any location, whether in new or retrofit
construction, and they install quickly and easily. Leviton offers Traditional Wallplates in
a vast array of colors and configurations.
Item Description
1-Gang Single 1.406 Inch Hole Device Receptacle Wallplate, Standard Size, 302
Stainless Steel, Device Mount, - Stainless Steel
Technical Information
Product Features
Type: Standard Size
Gang: 1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
FEATURES
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION
Dimensions:
Materials:
Capacity:
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
Taiwan
WARRANTY INFORMATION
ELECTRONIC FILES
Page 1 of 2
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
E [email protected]
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
E [email protected]
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
E [email protected]
China
T +852.2774.9876
E [email protected]
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
E [email protected]
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
[email protected]
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
E [email protected]
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
E [email protected]
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040
E [email protected]
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
E [email protected]
Copyright 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
APPLICATION
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
43080-1S2
43080-1S1
43080-1S3
43080-1S4
4.50"
43080-2S6
4.50"
4.50"
4.59"
4.59"
.45"
43080-2S8
43080-xSx, 43080-S12
43080-2S4
43080-2S2
43080-1S6
4.59"
.45"
.45"
43080-S12
4.50"
4.50"
4.59"
4.59"
.45"
.45"
PART NUMBERS
Description
Part No.
43080-1S1
43080-1S2
43080-1S3
43080-1S4
43080-1S6
43080-2S2
43080-2S4
43080-2S6
43080-2S8
43080-S12
Page 2 of 2
F15 5629
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
E [email protected]
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
E [email protected]
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
E [email protected]
China
T +852.2774.9876
E [email protected]
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
E [email protected]
tel 1
-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
[email protected]
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
E [email protected]
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
E [email protected]
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040
E [email protected]
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
E [email protected]
Copyright 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
41108-Rx3
FEATURES
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
SPECIFICATION
UL listed
CSA certified
NEC Article 800
ANSI/TIA-568-C
ANSI/TIA-1096-A
RoHS 2 (Directive 2011/65/EU)
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Materials:
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
USA
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Page 1 of 2
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
E [email protected]
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
E [email protected]
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
E [email protected]
China
T +852.2774.9876
E [email protected]
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
E [email protected]
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
[email protected]
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
E [email protected]
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
E [email protected]
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040
E [email protected]
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
E [email protected]
Copyright 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
41108-Rx3
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
41108-Rx3
ELECTRONIC FILES
For CAD files, typical specs, or technical drawings (.DXF, .DWG), visit www.leviton.com.
41108-Rx3
Front View
Side View
.83
.83"
.64"
.64
1.18"
1.18
PART NUMBERS
Description
Part No.
41108-Rx3
x = colors: Ivory (I), White (W), Grey (G), Black (E), Orange (O), Blue (L), Yellow (Y), Dark Red (R), Brown (B),
Light Almond (T), Green (V), Purple (P), Crimson Red (C)
Page 2 of 2
D15 5496
Asia / Pacific
T +1.631.812.6228
E [email protected]
Canada
T +1.514.954.1840
E [email protected]
Caribbean
T +1.954.593.1896
E [email protected]
China
T +852.2774.9876
E [email protected]
Colombia
T +57.1.743.6045
E [email protected]
tel 1-800-824-3005
tel +1-425-486-2222
[email protected]
www.leviton.com
Europe
T +33.6.8869.1380
E [email protected]
India / SAARC
T +971.4.886.4722
E [email protected]
Mexico
T +52.55.5082.1040
E [email protected]
South Korea
T +82.2.3273.9963
E [email protected]
Copyright 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
RoHS
Description
The UltraMOV Metal Oxide Varistor Series is designed
for applications requiring high peak surge current ratings
and high energy absorption capability. UltraMOV
varistors are primarily intended for use in AC Line Voltage
applications such as Surge Protection Device (SPD),
Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS), AC Power Taps,
AC Power Meters, or other products that require voltage
clamping of high transient surge currents from sources
such as lightning, inductive load switching, or capacitor
bank switching.
Agency Approvals
Agency
Agency Approval
Agency File
Number
UL1449
E320116
CECC 42201-006
IEC 61051-1
IEC 61051-2
IEC 60950-1 (Annex Q) for 14mm
and 20mm only
116895
22.2-1
91788
CECC 42201-006
IEC 61051-1
IEC 61051-2
IEC 60950-1 (Annex Q) for 14mm
and 20mm only
E1273/F
Additional Information
Datasheet
Resources
Samples
Continuous
Units
130 to 625
1,750 to 10,000
12.5 to 400
-55 to +85
-55 to +125
<0.01
%/C
2500
1000
CAUTION: Stresses above those listed in "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress only rating and operation of the
device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied.
2015 Littelfuse, Inc.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Revised: 03/06/15
V07E130P
V10E130P
V14E130P
V20E130P
V07E140P
V10E140P
V14E140P
V20E140P
V07E150P
V10E150P
V14E150P
V20E150P
V07E175P
V10E175P
V14E175P
V20E175P
V07E230P
V10E230P
V14E230P
V20E230P
V07E250P
V10E250P
V14E250P
V20E250P
V07E275P
V10E275P
V14E275P
V20E275P
V07E300P
V10E300P
V14E300P
V20E300P
V07E320P
V10E320P
V14E320P
V20E320P
V07E385P
V10E385P
V14E385P
V20E385P
V07E420P
V10E420P
V14E420P
V20E420P
V07E440P
V10E440P
V14E440P
V20E440P
V07E460P
V10E460P
V14E460P
Branding
P7V130
P10V130
P14V130
P20V130
P7V140
P10V140
P14V140
P20V140
P7V150
P10V150
P14V150
P20V150
P7V175
P10V175
P14V175
P20V175
P7V230
P10V230
P14V230
P20V230
P7V250
P10V250
P14V250
P20V250
P7V275
P10V275
P14V275
P20V275
P7V300
P10V300
P14V300
P20V300
P7V320
P10V320
P14V320
P20V320
P7V385
P10V385
P14V385
P20V385
P7V420
P10V420
P14V420
P20V420
P7V440
P10V440
P14V440
P20V440
P7V460
P10V460
P14V460
RMS
Volts
DC
Volts
Energy
2ms
VM(AC)
VM(DC)
WTM
(V)
130
130
130
130
140
140
140
140
150
150
150
150
175
175
175
175
230
230
230
230
250
250
250
250
275
275
275
275
300
300
300
300
320
320
320
320
385
385
385
385
420
420
420
420
440
440
440
440
460
460
460
(V)
170
170
170
170
180
180
180
180
200
200
200
200
225
225
225
225
300
300
300
300
320
320
320
320
350
350
350
350
385
385
385
385
420
420
420
420
505
505
505
505
560
560
560
560
585
585
585
585
615
615
615
(J)
12.5
25
50
100
13.5
27.5
55
110
15
30
60
120
17
35
70
135
20
42
80
160
25
50
100
170
28
55
110
190
30
60
125
250
32
67
136
273
36
75
150
300
40
80
160
320
44
85
170
340
48
90
180
Peak Current
8 x 20s
ITM
ITM
1 x Pulse 2 x Pulse
(A)
(A)
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
10000
6500
1750
1200
3500
2500
6000
4500
Specifications (25C)
Maximum
Varistor Voltage
Clamping
Typical
at 1mA DC Test
Voltage
Capacitance
Current
8 x 20s
VNOM
VNOM
IPK
f = 1MHz
VC
Min
Max
(V)
(V)
(V)
(A)
(pF)
184.5
225.5
340
10
180
184.5
225.5
340
25
450
184.5
225.5
340
50
1000
184.5
225.5
340
100
1900
198
242
360
10
160
198
242
360
25
400
198
242
360
50
900
198
242
360
100
1750
216
264
395
10
150
216
264
395
25
360
216
264
395
50
800
216
264
395
100
1600
243
297
455
10
130
243
297
455
25
350
243
297
455
50
700
243
297
455
100
1400
324
396
595
10
100
324
396
595
25
250
324
396
595
50
550
324
396
595
100
1100
351
429
650
10
90
351
429
650
25
220
351
429
650
50
500
351
429
650
100
1000
387
473
710
10
80
387
473
710
25
200
387
473
710
50
450
387
473
710
100
900
423
517
775
10
70
423
517
775
25
180
423
517
775
50
400
423
517
775
100
800
459
561
840
10
65
459
561
840
25
170
459
561
840
50
380
459
561
840
100
750
558
682
1025
10
60
558
682
1025
25
160
558
682
1025
50
360
558
682
1025
100
700
612
748
1120
10
55
612
748
1120
25
140
612
748
1120
50
300
612
748
1120
100
600
643.5
786.5
1180
10
50
643.5
786.5
1180
25
130
643.5
786.5
1180
50
260
643.5
786.5
1180
100
500
675
825
1240
10
45
675
825
1240
25
120
675
825
1240
50
220
Poles
1411403
1412403
1413403
1414403
1411400
1412400
1413400
1414400
1320570
1321570
1322570
1323570
1421570
1422570
1423570
1320580
1321580
1322580
1323580
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1402402
1403402
Load Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#10-#18
AWG
#2-#14
AWG
#10-#16
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
Phenolic
2/0-#14
AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#4-#14
AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2/0-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Thermoplastic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
***
#2-#14
AWG
Amps
Material
60
Thermoplastic
115
Thermoplastic
175
Thermoplastic
175
Phenolic
175
Thermoplastic
2
3
175
Phenolic
1402401
1403401
2
3
175
1402404
1403404
2
3
1331554
1332554
1333554
1441401
1442401
1443401
1431552
1432552
1433552
1431553
1432553
1433553
1441560
1442560
1443560
1331552
1332552
1333552
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
*** Openings rated for #2-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:
(2) #8 CU Str, (2) #10 CU Str, (2) #12 CU Str, And
(2) #14 CU Str
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#2-#14
AWG
*
*
39
Connector
Configuration
**
#4-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
4
6
Power Blocks
Catalog #
Poles
1411403
1412403
1413403
1414403
1411400
1412400
1413400
1414400
1320570
1321570
1322570
1323570
1421570
1422570
1423570
1320580
1321580
1322580
1323580
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1402402
1403402
Load Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#10-#18
AWG
#2-#14
AWG
#10-#16
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
2/0-#14
AWG
Phenolic
2/0-#14
AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#4-#14
AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2/0-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Phenolic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
#2-#14
AWG
335
Thermoplastic
400 kcmil
- #6 AWG
***
#2-#14
AWG
Amps
Material
60
Thermoplastic
115
Thermoplastic
175
Thermoplastic
175
Phenolic
175
Thermoplastic
2
3
175
Phenolic
1402401
1403401
2
3
175
1402404
1403404
2
3
1331554
1332554
1333554
1441401
1442401
1443401
1431552
1432552
1433552
1431553
1432553
1433553
1441560
1442560
1443560
1331552
1332552
1333552
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
*** Openings rated for #2-14 AWG are multiple wire rated:
(2) #8 CU Str, (2) #10 CU Str, (2) #12 CU Str, And
(2) #14 CU Str
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Per Pole
#2-#14
AWG
*
*
39
Connector
Configuration
**
#4-#14
AWG
**
#4-#14
AWG
4
6
Power Blocks
Catalog #
Catalog #
Hinge
Cover
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
Poles
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Adder
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Connector
Configuration
Line Wire
Range
Openings
Connector Load Wire Openings
Per Pole Configuration
Range
Per Pole
Amps
Material
115
Thermoplastic
#2 - #14
AWG
#2 - #14
AWG
115
Phenolic
#2 - #14
AWG
#2 - #14
AWG
175
Thermoplastic
#2/0 - #14
AWG
#2/0 - #14
AWG
175
Phenolic
#2/0 - #14
AWG
#2/0 - #14
AWG
255
Phenolic
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
255
Phenolic
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
250 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
310
Thermoplastic
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350 kcmil
- #6 AWG
350
Thermoplastic
#2/0 -#14
AWG
#2/0 -#14
AWG
420
Phenolic
600 kcmil
- #4 AWG
600 kcmil
- #4 AWG
420
Thermoplastic
600 kcmil
- #2 AWG
600 kcmil
- #2 AWG
510
Thermoplastic
250 kcmil
- #1/0 AWG
250 kcmil
- #1/0 AWG
620
Phenolic
350 kcmil
- #4 AWG
350 kcmil
- #4 AWG
CH = Available with hinge cover attached (See page 54 for available covers)
See pages 56-59 for dimensional information
47
Power Blocks
1411300
1412300
1413300
1414300
1421552
1422552
1423552
1320572
1321572
1322572
1323572
1421572
1422572
1423572
1402801
1403801
1431123
1432123
1433123
1402303
1403303
1431126
1432126
1433126
1331126
1332126
1333126
1331305
1332305
1333305
1441557
1442557
1443557
1331360
1332360
1333360
1331320
1332320
1333320
1451129
1452129
1453129
ATQR Time-delay/Class CC
Take control of fault currents headed for your control
transformer
ATQR small-dimension fuses feature time-delay characteristics ideally suited for the
high inrush currents of control transformers, solenoids, and similar inductive loads.
Mersens ATQR fuses provide superior protection for the branch circuits of electrical
distribution systems.
Features/Benefits:
High visibility orange label ensures instant brand recognition, and simplifies
replacement
Highlights:
Time-delay
Best choice for small transformer
protection
Current-limiting
Applications:
Ratings:
Volts : 600VAC
: 300VDC
: 200kA I.R. AC
: 100kA I.R. DC
Control transformers
Solenoids
Inductive loads
Lighting, heating & generalpurpose loads
Approvals:
A10
ATQR Time-delay/Class CC
ATQR1/10
ATQR8/10
ATQR2-8/10
ATQR7-1/2
ATQR1/8
ATQR1
ATQR3
ATQR8
ATQR3/16
ATQR1-1/8
ATQR3-2/10
ATQR9
ATQR2/10
ATQR1-1/4
ATQR3-1/2
ATQR10
ATQR1/4
ATQR1-4/10
ATQR4
ATQR12
ATQR3/10
ATQR1-1/2
ATQR4-1/2
ATQR15
ATQR4/10
ATQR1-6/10
ATQR5
ATQR17-1/2
ATQR1/2
ATQR1-8/10
ATQR5-6/10
ATQR20
ATQR6/10
ATQR2
ATQR6
ATQR25
ATQR2-1/4
ATQR6-1/4
ATQR30
ATQR2-1/2
ATQR7
ATQR3/4
UltraSafe
Indicating
Fuse Holder
ADDER
Screw
Connector
w/ Double
Quick Connects
Pressure Plate
Connector
w/ Double
Quick Connects
Copper
Box
Connector
30310R
30320R
30350R
USCC1I
30311R
30321R
30351R
USCC2I
30312R
30322R
30352R
USCC3I
30313R
30323R
30353R
USFMCCI
Dimensions
For the most current product performance data visit us-ferrazshawmut.mersen.com and use catalog search.
A11
Contents chapter 3
Communication
b Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/16
b Description, specifications and references
Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub and transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unmanaged switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managed switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/24
3/26
3/28
3/30
3/33
b Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/40
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/41
b Wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/46
10
3/1
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Communication, integrated ports and modules
Applications
Type
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Structure
Physical interface
Connector type
Access method
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
RJ45
CSMA-CD
Data rate
10/100 Mbit/s
Medium
Configuration
100 m (copper cable), 4,000 m (multi-mode optical fiber), 32,500 m (single-mode optical fiber)
1 (integrated port)
With BMX P34 1000 processor:
1 Ethernet module
With BMX P34 2000/2010 processor:
2 Ethernet modules
With BMX P34 2020/2030 processor:
2 Ethernet modules and 1 processor
integrated port
Serial link
CANopen bus
Standard services
Modbus/TCP messaging
Conformity class
Transparent Ready
class B30
Alarm viewer
Graphic Data
Editor
Hosting and display
of user web pages
(14 Mb)
7
I/O Scanning service
Global Data service
NTP time synchronization
FDR service
SMTP E-mail notification service
Yes (client)
Yes, via EF function block of Unity Pro u 4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes (version module u 2.0)
Yes (client/server)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Processor or module
Page
3/22
Transparent Ready
communication
services
Transparent Ready
class C30
10
3/2
3/23
Server
CANopen
63 (1)
20 m (1 Mbit/s)...2,500 m (20 Kbit/s)
1
5
Serial link
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
CANopen
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
9
BMX P34 2010
3/41
3/45
(1) The maximum is 63, and depends on the type of the devices that are connected. It may be necessary to create a memory space table. See pages 6/8 and 6/9.
3/3
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
functions
With the BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module supplied as standard with
BMX RWS FC032M memory card, the web server also offers the following functions:
b Management of PLC alarms (system and application) with partial or total
acknowledgement (ready-to-use Alarm Viewer function pages).
b Hosting and display of web pages created by the user.
The embedded web server is a realtime data server. The data can be presented in
the form of standard web pages in HTML format and can be accessed using any web
browser that supports the embedded Java code. The standard functions provided by
the web server are supplied ready-to-use and do not require any programming of
either the PLC or the client PC device supporting a web browser.
6
Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables
The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for
realtime read/write access to PLC data in the form of lists.
Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or
modified can be created by the user and saved in the standard web server module.
9
Data editor variables table
.
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
3/4
References:
pages 3/22
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
FactoryCast web services
BMX NOE 0110 module FactoryCast web server
With the BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module, the web server offers in addition
to the standard web services, the functions below:
These alarms are stored in the diagnostic buffer managed by the Modicon M340
platform (special memory space for storing the diagnostics events).
.
The diagnostics viewer is a web page comprised of a list of messages that provide
the following information for each alarm:
v Dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a detected fault
v Alarm message
v Alarm status
v Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)
Graphic Data Editor function
This function is used to create the graphic views animated by the PLC variables that
can be accessed via their address or their symbol (access to located data). The
ready-to-use graphic editor is available online, connected to the BMX NOE 0110
module.
These views are created from a library of predefined graphic objects by simple
copy/paste operations. The objects are configured to suit the users requirements
(color, PLC variables, name, and so on).
List of proposed graphic objects:
b Analog and digital indicators
b Horizontal and vertical bar charts
b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values
b Push-button boxes
b Functions for recording trends
b Vats, valves, motors, and so on
Customized graphic objects can be added to this list. They can be reused in user
web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages.
The views created are saved in the BMX NOE 0110 module and displayed using any
web browser.
User web page hosting and display function
The BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module has a 16 Mbyte non-volatile memory
(accessible as a hard disk). This allows hosting of web pages and any user-defined
Word or Acrobat Reader document (for example, maintenance manuals, wiring
diagrams, etc).
The web pages can be created using any standard tool for creation and editing in
HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects
linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data
Editor. They are then downloaded to the BMX NOE 0110 module via configuration
software of FactoryCast web server.
10
3/5
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
FactoryCast web services and SOAP/XML web services
FactoryCast web server configuration software
The FactoryCast web server configuration software is supplied on CD-ROM with the
BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module.
This software is used for configuration and administration of the web server
embedded in these modules. It is compatible with Microsoft Windows 2000 and
Windows XP operating systems. It provides the following functions:
b Setting the parameters of the FactoryCast functions
v Definition of access security, passwords
v Importing of PLC symbol databases
v Definition of access to write-enabled variables
b Management of the web site:
v Management of default web site pages
v Management of user web site pages
v Graphic object editor for animating web pages
v Downloading of web pages between the PC and the module
v Debugging of web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including
animations and Java beans)
b Simulation mode
The application and the web site (including the Java animations) can be set up in
online mode or in simulation mode. Simulation mode is used to test the operation of
the web application without a FactoryCast module (with no physical connection to a
PLC) which simplifies debugging.
A graphics editor integrated in the configuration software can be used to easily
customize graphic objects (bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator
input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc).
b Creation of user web pages (1)
Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (Microsoft
FrontPage or similar, not supplied).
Web pages created in the FactoryCast environment are actual animated supervision
screens used to monitor your process. Based on HTML and Java web technologies,
they provide realtime access to PLC variables using the FactoryCast graphic object
library (Java beans).
The BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module incorporates a standard SOAP/XML data
server that provides direct interoperability between automation devices and computer
management applications (for example, MES, ERP, SAP, pNet application).
(1) FactoryCast includes a plug-in for Microsoft FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to
set up animations for realtime access to the PLC variables in user created HTML pages.
Pages are created in the HTML editor by inserting customized graphic objects.
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
3/6
References:
pages 3/22
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions (continued)
Development tool
SOAP server
WSDL
1, 2
Visual Studio pNET
SOAP
request
BMX NOE 0110
FactoryCast
module
pNET Java
Access to data via symbol Read, operation to read item list value
Write, operation to write item list value
Browse, operation to browse item list
10
Specifications:
pages 3/22
References:
pages 3/22
3/7
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction
Applications
Transportation
Network
management
Global
Data
SMTP
NTP
Transport
RTPS
UDP
DHCP
FTP
TFTP
Web
server
HTTP
SMTP
TCP
UDP
Messaging
I/O
Scanning
Modbus
TCP
IP
Link
IP
3
Physical
Note: The Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services depends on the type of processor or
Ethernet module. For details, see Specifications of BMX P34 2020/2030 (page 3/22) or
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet modules (page 3/23).
Pages 3/9 to 3/21 present the various options available through these services to
facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system integrating
Transparent Ready devices.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/8
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions
The HTTP protocol (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is a protocol used to transmit Web
pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since
1990.
Web servers embedded in Transparent Ready automation products provide easy
access to products located anywhere in the world from a standard Internet browser
such as Internet Explorer.
BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531)
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides the basic elements for file sharing. The FTP
protocol is used by several systems to exchange files between devices.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a network transfer protocol used to connect
to a device and download code to it.
For example, it can be used to transfer a boot code to a workstation without a disk
drive or to connect and download updates of network device firmware.
Note: Transparent Ready devices implement FTP and TFTP to transfer certain information to or
from products, in particular for downloads of firmware or user-defined Web pages.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/9
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Functions (continued)
Ethernet universal services (continued)
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157)
The Internet community has developed the SNMP standard to manage the various
network components via a single system. The network management system can
exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function allows the manager to
display the status of the network and products, modify their configuration and feed
back alarms in the event of a detected fault.
Note: Transparent Ready products are compatible with SNMP and can be integrated naturally
in a network administered via SNMP.
COM/DCOM Distributed Component Object Model
Note: These technologies are used in the OFS (OLE for Process Control Factory Server) data
server software.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/10
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions (continued)
dec
02
01
07
05
15
04
03
06
16
43/14
hex
02
01
07
05
0F
04
03
06
10
2B/0E
The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally familiar with its 9 million
installed connections. Thousands of manufacturers are already using this protocol.
Many have already developed a Modbus/TCP connection and numerous products
are presently available.
The simplicity of Modbus/TCP enables a field device, such as an I/O module, to
communicate on Ethernet without the need for a powerful microprocessor or a large
amount of internal memory.
Modbus/TCP, high-performance
Due to the simplicity of its protocol and the fast speed of 100 Mbps Ethernet, the
performance of Modbus/TCP is excellent. This allows this type of network to be used
in realtime applications such as I/O scanning.
Modbus/TCP, a standard
Specifications of Modbus/TCP
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/11
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Functions (continued)
I/O Scanning service
Word table
Read
1
Write
2
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Input words
Output words
of devices
The I/O Scanning Service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on
the Ethernet network after simple configuration, without the need for any special
programming.
I/O scanning is performed transparently by means of read/write requests according
to the Modbus client/server protocol on the Modbus/TCP profile.
This scanning principle via a standard protocol is used to communicate between a
equipment with the I/O Scanning service with any device supporting a Modbus TCP in
mode server.
This service allows you to define:
b A%MW word zone reserved for reading inputs.
b A%MW word zone reserved for writing outputs.
b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan.
During operation, the module:
b Manages Modbus/TCP connections for each remote device.
b Scans devices and copies the I/O to the configured %MW word zone .
b Feeds back status words used to check that the service is working correctly from
the PLC application.
b Applies pre-configured fallback values if a communication problem occurs
An offer of hardware and software products used to implement the I/O Scanning
protocol on any type of device that can be connected to the Ethernet network is
available (please consult the Modbus-IDA web site: www.modbus-ida.org).
Specifications
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/12
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Functions (continued)
FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service
The faulty device replacement service uses standard address management
technologies (BOOTP, DHCP) and the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file
management service, in the aim of simplifying maintenance of Ethernet products.
It is used to replace an inoperative device with a new device that will be detected,
reconfigured and automatically rebooted by the system.
The main steps in replacement are:
Modicon M340
BMX CPS
power
supply
Processor
BMX NOE
module
Internal
clock
NTP
server
NTP request
NTP
client
Ethernet network
NTP response
The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol) that
is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet from a server or
another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc).
Operation
The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be
configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also
available.
Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the
Transparent Ready private MIB that can be accessed via the SNMP network
management service.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/13
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Functions (continued)
Global Data service
Distribution group 1
Data exchange 4 Kb max.
IP multicast 239.255.255.251
Modicon Premium
2
Modicon Quantum
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Modicon Premium
Modicon M340
IP multicast 239.255.255.250
Data exchange 4 Kb max.
Distribution group 2
The Global Data service exchanges data in real time between stations belonging to
the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or even to
share a common database between a number of distributed applications.
Exchanges are based on a producer/consumer type standard protocol, helping to
guarantee optimum performances with a minimum load on the network. This RTPS
(Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by Modbus-IDA (Interface for
Distributed Automation), and is already a standard adopted by several
manufacturers.
Specifications
To further optimize the performance of the Ethernet network, Global Data can be
configured with the multicast filtering option enabled. This, when combined with
switches in the ConneXium range, will distribute data only to Ethernet ports where
there is a station subscribed to the Global Data service. If these switches are not
used, Global Data is sent in multicast mode to each switch port.
The diagnostic screens show the status of Global Data using a color code:
b Configured/not configured/detected fault
b Published/subscribed
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
3/14
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
Functions (continued)
SNMP network management service
From a network management station, the SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) protocol monitors and checks components of the Ethernet architecture and
thus helps ensure quick diagnostics in the event of a problem.
It is used to:
b Interrogate network components such as computer stations, routers, switches,
bridges or terminal devices to display their status.
b Obtain statistics about the network.
This network management software adheres to the conventional client/server model.
However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols that use this
terminology, we talk instead about:
b ConneXview network diagnostics software, TCS EAZ 01P SFE10. For more
information, please consult our Machines & Installations with industrial
communications catalog.
b Network manager for the client application that operates on the computer station.
b SNMP agent for the network device server application
The Transparent Ready private MIB presents management objects specific to the
Schneider Electric offer. These objects simplify the installation, setup and
maintenance of Transparent Ready devices in an open environment using standard
network management tools.
Transparent Ready devices support 2 levels of SNMP network management:
b The Standard MIB II interface: An initial level of network management is accessible
via this interface. It enables the manager to identify the devices making up the
architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of
Ethernet Modbus/TCP interfaces.
b The Transparent Ready MIB interface: The management of Transparent Ready
devices is improved via this interface. This MIB has a set of information enabling the
network management system to supervise the Transparent Ready services.
The Transparent Ready MIB can be downloaded from the FTP server of any
Transparent Ready Ethernet module in a PLC.
10
Introduction:
pages 3/4
Performance:
pages 3/16
Selection:
page 3/21
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance
The next few pages will provide information and instructions to determine the users
network performance needs. Given that the performance of an Ethernet architecture
is linked to several parameters, some of the information required to calculate the
network performance will not be supplied on these pages. The following will be
covered:
b Instructions for calculating the network load so as to design an Ethernet
network that meets the demands of the applications.
b Application response time to be obtained depending on the configuration used.
See page 3/17 to 3/19
b Processing capacities of Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and
Modicon Quantum platforms used to select the processor and define the
number of Ethernet connections required on the PLC depending on the application.
See pages 3/20 and 3/21.
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/16
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance (continued)
Report
TT
CT1 CT1
CT1 CT1
Station 1
CT2 CT2
Station 2
The network access time (NAT) appearing in the table below in ms, adds together
the module transit time and the waiting time before the message can be sent on the
network.
Action
Processing
Modbus/TCP
message requests
Exchanges between the PLC processor and the Ethernet module are synchronous
with the PLC scan time (CT), just like the I/O exchanges. On occurrence of the event (for
example, an input set to state 1), a message can only be sent after this input has been
taken into account (start of the next cycle) and execution of the PLC program
(Modicon M340, Modicon Premium or Modicon Quantum), are on average
around 1.5 cycle times after occurrence of the event.
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
Modicon Premium
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 110WS
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
< 25 ms
Modicon Quantum
140 NOE 771 01/111
140 CPU 113/311 pp
140 CPU 434/534 1p
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
The transaction time TT integrates the delay between sending a message from a
client station 1, its reception by the server station 2, processing the request, sending
the response and it being taken into account by the station 1 (for example, updating
an output).
As shown in the above block diagram:
b The transaction time TT should be between:
2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT
b The average duration TTav is equivalent to:
TTav = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT
Synchro pulse
TT
CT
CT
CT
Station 1
Publication
Subscription
Publication
CT
CT
Station 2
The transaction time TT integrates the delay between publication of a Global Data
service by station 1, its reception and its processing by the remote station 2 and it
being resent to the initial station 1:
For an exchanged variable:
b If CT < 5 ms,
transaction time:
TT = 5 to 6 x CT
b If CT u 10 ms,
transaction time:
TT = 3 x CT
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/17
Modicon M340
automation platform
Performance (continued)
Manager
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
The response time RT includes the time between taking a remote input into account
and updating the state of a remote output. It includes the processing time in the PLC.
RT
Hub
Input
Device 1
Output
Device 2
Input
TMod I
TNet
N x cycle T
TNet
Response time RT
TMod Q
Output
v TMod In and TMod Out: Response time of the read/written device, excluding the
electrical transit time at the input/output (TMod depends on the device, usually
between 1 and 8 ms)
v TIOS In and TIOS Out: Time between 2 read/write operations on the same device
(0.3 ms x number of scanned devices), at least equivalent to the configured scan
time
As TIOS is executed in parallel with the PLC scan, it can be hidden with respect to
the response time RT).
v Cycle T: PLC scan time.
v TNet : propagation time on the network (depends on the application, usually
TNet = 0.05 ms at 10 Mbit/s and 0.005 ms at 100 Mbit/s).
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/18
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Performance (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Performance
Application response time (continued)
I/O Scanning service response time (continued)
Response time
TMod In
TMod Out
TMod In
TMod Out
TMod In
TMod Out
Values
Min.
1 ms
5 ms
4 ms
4 ms
2 ms
2 ms
Typical
1 ms
5 ms
6 ms
6 ms
3 ms
3 ms
Max.
1 ms
5 ms
8 ms
8 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Below are the TIOS In/TIOS Out times measured between 2 scan cycles (Ethernet
network with switches)
Time (ms)
25
20
15
10
5
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
No. of scanned devices
6
1
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/19
Performance (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms
Processing capacity
Use the table below to compare for each station, the total number of messages
received on the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service if used (value R1, R2 or
Ri) with the station processor capacity.
Processing Modbus requests for each PLC scan
Modicon M340, Modicon Premium/Atrium platforms
Total messages received by the TSX 57 10
PLC from each communication
BMX P34 20/TSX 57 20
modules (1)
TSX 57 30
TSX 57 40
TSX 57 50/60 (2)
Modicon
Quantum
platform
Limitations of the
communication modules
All types of
Additional
communication read/write 4x
request
registers
1message/
4 messages/
140 CPU 113 (3)
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 311
1message/
4 messages/
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 434/534
4 messages/
8 messages/
cycle
cycle
140 CPU 651
16 messages/ 16 messages/ 4 messages/
8 messages/
cycle
cycle
cycle
cycle
messages/cycle: number of messages received per cycle from the PLC master task
(typical cycle of 50 to 100 ms)
Messages received
4 messages/cycle
8 messages/cycle
12 messages/cycle
16 messages/cycle
16/20 messages/cycle
Ethernet
modules
per PLC
max. 2
max. 2
max. 6
max. 6
Example:
Quantum 140 CPU 434 12p processor with 4 Ethernet 140 NOE 771 p1 modules:
- 20 messages/cycle for all types of communication request, and
- 32 messages/cycle for the read/write 4x registers
Ethernet transaction
processing capacity
Modbus messaging
I/O Scanning service
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020
BMX NOE 0110 BMX P34 2030
500
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
800
500
transactions/s
Server mode
(4)
Service not
available
Modicon Premium
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 4103/5103
TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100
TSX P57 10/20/30/40
60
450
transactions/s
transactions/s
Service not
2,000 transactions/s
available
(5)
Service not
800
available
Modicon Quantum
140 CPU 65 150
140 NOE 771 01
140 CPU 65 160
140 NOE 771 11
140 NWM 100 00 140 CPU 67 160
500
350
350
transactions/s transactions/s
transactions/s
2,000
2,000
2,000
transactions/s transactions/s (5) transactions/s
800
800
800
TSX P57 50
TSX P57 60
9
(1) A temporary overload, due for example to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection
of an Internet browser, on which a few PLC scans are permitted.
(2) Only with Unity Pro software.
(3) Only with Concept/ProWORX software.
(4) BMX P34 20p0 processors having the Modbus/TCP messaging in server mode can be
scanned by a product having the I/O Scanning service.
(5) Modules TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00: not featuring I/O Scanning and Global Data
services.
10
Introduction:
page 3/8
3/20
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
Performance (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms (continued)
Maximum number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections
The maximum number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections depends on the
platform as well as the type of connection to the Ethernet network:
b The 10/100BASE-TX port in network modules.
b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processors.
Number of
simultaneous
Modbus/TCP
connections
Client
Server
Modicon M340
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
16
16
16
16
Modicon Premium
Modicon Quantum
TSX ETY 210
TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 01/11
140 CPU 65 150
TSX ETY 110WS
TSX WMY 100
140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 65 160
TSX P57 10...57 60
140 CPU 434/534 14B
32
16 (1)
16 (1)
16 (1)
64 (1)
64 (1)
64 (1)
(1) With 64 simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections maximum (clients and servers).
Introduction:
page 3/8
or
Ethernet dedicated
module, example with the
BMX NOE 0100/0110
Modicon M340
Functions:
page 3/9
References:
pages 3/22
Connections:
pages 3/24
3/21
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processors with integrated
Modbus/TCP Ethernet port
Description
BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030 Modicon M340 processors with integrated
Ethernet port have the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display unit including at minimum 3 LEDs relating to the Ethernet port:
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet TCP/IP network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbit/s)
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW
operator interface)
4 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and
activating the standard web server, Transparent Ready class B10.
5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
network
Also included, depending on the model:
6 BMX P34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or
character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
7 BMX P34 2030 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the master CANopen
machine and installation bus
On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes:
v address set by the position of the two switches
v address set by the application parameters
v address set by the Ethernet BOOTP server
2
3
4
5
6
7
Specifications
Module type
Transparent Class
Ready
Standard web server
services
6
Structure
Modicon
M340
processor
Modbus/TCP
Global Data
advanced
NTP time synchronization
communication
FDR Client
Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
services
SMTP E-mail notification
Yes, via EF function block (SEND_EMAIL) of Unity Pro u 4.0
SOAP/XML Web services
References
Description
I/O capacity
Memory capacity
Processors with 1024 discrete I/O
256 analog I/O
integrated
36 app-sp. channels
Ethernet link
Other integrated
Reference
communication ports
Modbus serial link or BMX P34 2020
character mode
CANopen bus
BMX P34 2030
4096 Kb integrated
Transparent
Ready class B10
10
BMX P34 2020
3/22
Weight
kg
0.205
0.215
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network modules
Introduction
The BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 modules are a standard module
occupying a single slot in the rack of the Modicon M340 platform equipped with a
Standard or Performance processor.
Description
The BMX NOE 0100/NOE 0110 modules has the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot in the rack
2 A display unit consisting of 6 LEDs, including 3 relating to the Ethernet port:
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbit/s)
3 A slot equipped with a Flash memory card for application saving and activating the
standard web server, Transparent Ready class B30 or C30 depending on model
4 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
network
5 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the module
On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes:
v address set by the position of the two switches
v address set by the application parameters
v address set by the Ethernet network BOOTP server.
3
4
Specifications
Module type
Transparent Class
Ready
Standard web server
services
Configurable web server
User Web pages (available size)
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication service
Ethernet
I/O Scanning
Modbus/TCP
Global Data
advanced
NTP time synchronization
communication
FDR server
services
SMTP E-mail notification
SOAP/XML Web services
SNMP network administrator
Bandwidth management
Structure
Ethernet
module
Physical interface
Data rate
Medium
No. of Ethernet modules oer configuration
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Power supply
Conformity to standards
LED indicators
Server
Yes
Yes
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
10/100 Mbit/s with automatic recognition
Twisted pair
Max. 1 with BMX P34 1000 processor, max. 2 with BMX P34 20p0 processor
0+ 60C
10...95% non condensing during operation
IP 20
Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n142, CSA 22.2 n213 Class 1 Division 2 , e
Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green)
State of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green)
Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red)
3 LEDs specific to module operation (RUN, ERR, CARD ERR)
References
Description
Data rate
10/100 Mbit/s
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
network module
Weight
kg
0.200
0.200
Supplied as
standard with
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
Weight
kg
0.002
0.002
Replacement parts
Description
Flash memory
cards
Size
8 Mb
32 Mb
Reference
BMX RWS B000M
BMX RWS FC032M
3/23
10
Wiring system
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Introduction
Schneider Electric offers copper and fiber optic cables for connecting IP 20 and IP 67
Ethernet devices.
Examples
Mixed IP 20 and IP 67 wiring (copper)
2
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
3
8
2, 4
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
5
1, 3
1, 3
6
Key:
1, 3: Straight-through copper cables
2, 4: Crossed copper cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
See pages 3/26 and 3/27.
10
3/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Examples (continued)
Mixed copper and fiber optic wiring
1
Internet
MES client
Server
Firewall
1, 3
1, 3
Copper link
1, 3
Router
3
5, 6, 7
2, 4
2, 4
2, 4
Copper link
Magelis XBT
1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
2, 4
Preventa safety PLC
2, 4
Altivar 71
Modicon Quantum
Advantys STB
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4
Twido
1, 3
2, 4
Magelis XBT
1, 3
1, 3
Advantys STB
1, 3
Altivar 71
1, 3
7
Modicon M340
Modicon Premium
Ositrack
FactoryCast
gateway
8
Modbus
Managed
switch
Hub or
unmanaged switch
Key:
1, 3: Straight cables
2, 4: Crossed cord cables
5, 6, 7: Fiber optic cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
See pages 3/26 and 3/27.
10
3/25
Wiring system
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
1
Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors
For connection to terminal
devices (DTE)
4
490 NTp 000 pp
Crossed cord
cables
2
2 RJ45 connectors
For connections between
hubs, switches and
transceivers
Length
m (ft)
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
12 (39.4)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
Reference
5 (16.4)
15 (49.2)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
Weight
kg
Crossed cord
cables
4
2 RJ45 connectors
For connections between
hubs, switches and
transceivers
Length
m (ft)
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
12 (39.4)
40 (131.2)
80 (262.5)
Reference
490 NTW 000 02U
490 NTW 000 05U
490 NTW 000 12U
490 NTW 000 40U
490 NTW 000 80U
Weight
kg
Description
Ethernet copper cable
2 shielded twisted pairs
24 AWG
RJ45 connector
IP 20
M12 connector
D-Code,
IP 65/67
According to
Length
m (ft)
EIA/TIA-568 (80 m max. 300 m
link length)
(1000)
UL 508-CM, e
EN 50173 Class D
EIA/TIA-568-D,
EN 50173 Class D
(1) For Key to reference numbers, see pages 3/24 and 3/25.
10
3/26
Reference
TCS ECN 300R2
Weight
kg
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
Preformed at both
ends
Rep. Length
m (ft)
1 SC connector
1 MT-RJ connector
5 (16.4)
1 ST (BFOC) connector 6
1 MT-RJ connector
5 (16.4)
2 MT-RJ connectors
3 (9.8)
5 (16.4)
Reference
Weight
kg
Optical fiber
Type
Reference
Multimode 50/125 m
or 62.5/125 m
Single mode 9/125 m
Weight
kg
0.040
0.040
0.040
(1) Dimensions W x H x D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm
Copper cables
Power cables
Power
connectors
M12/RJ45
adaptor
Preformed at both
ends
Rep. Length
m (ft)
Reference
Weight
kg
1 IP 67 4-way M12
connector
and 1 RJ45 connector
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
10 (32.8)
25 (82)
40 (131.2)
2 IP 67 4-way M12
connectors
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
10 (32.8)
25 (82)
40 (131.2)
2 (6.6)
5 (16.4)
2.5 (8.2)
5 (16.4)
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5
XZC P1264L2
XZC P1264L5
10
3/27
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium hub
Introduction
Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media
(ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration.
The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies:
b Star topology using hubs
b Tree topology using hubs
Please consult our catalog Ethernet Modbus/TCP and the Web, Transparent
Ready.
Hub
DTE
DTE
Hub
Hub
DTE
Star topology
DTE
DTE
Hub
DTE
Tree topology
5
Hubs
Interfaces
6
Topology
4 x 10BASE-T ports
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
Up to 4
Redundancy
Power supply
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
Voltage
Consumption
Removable terminal block
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
10
3/28
WxHxD
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium transceiver
Introduction
The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following:
b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies for products with twisted pair cable
Ethernet connection
b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with a fiber optic
cable
Transceivers are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration.
ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas
subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long
distance communications.
DTE
3
DTE
DTE
5
Transceivers
Interfaces
Redundancy
Power supply
Voltage
Consumption
Removable terminal block
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
1 x 100BASE-TX port
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port
SC
Multimode optical fiber
3000 m (1)
3000 m (1)
8 dB
11 dB
P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
24 V c (1832), safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c)
5-way
0+ 60C
1095% non-condensing
IP 20
47 x 135 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.230 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
(1) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 2000 m).
3/29
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
1
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Collision
domain 1
Collision
domain 2
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
100 Mbps
fiber-optic ring
DTE
Collision
domain 3
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Switches
Voltage
Consumption
mA max.
Removable terminal block
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight
5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
M12 (type D)
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1095% non-condensing
IP 67
IP 20
60 x 126 x 31 mm
47 x 135 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.210 kg
0.230 kg
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Interfaces
Ethernet services
6
Topology
Number of switches
Redundancy
Power supply
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
9
Reference
IP 67 cables
10
Ethernet cables
Power supply cables
Reference
Power supply connectors
Reference
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5
Female M12 straight connector
XZC C12 FDM 50B
3/30
XZC P1264L2
XZC P1264L5
Female M12 angled connector
XZC C12 FCM 50B
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
Length of optical fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
Attenuation analysis
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage, safety extra low voltage
(SELV per IEC 61140)
Consumption
Connector
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
Weight
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
WxHxD
1 x 100BASE-FX port
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
5x
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX
ports
8 dB
11 dB
Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX (automatic switching depending on
whether cables are straight or crossed), automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbit/s and duplex
mode (on each port), automatic change of polarity
Unlimited
2.2 W max.
0.113 kg
10
3/31
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
3
Fiber optic ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
Length of optical fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Attenuation analysis
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
4x
3x
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
SC
Multimode optical fiber
4x
3x
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
32,500 m (2)
16 dB
Redundancy
8 dB
11 dB
Unlimited
Voltage
Power consumption
mA max.
Removable connector
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
WxHxD
Mounting
Weight
Conforming to standards
cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity
Activity, power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port
detected fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
Topology
Number of switches
Power supply
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
10
3/32
240
0.335 kg
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
Length of optical fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Attenuation analysis
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage
Power consumption
Removable connector
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
3x
2x
10/100BASE-TX
10/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fiber
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
3x
10/100BASE-TX
ports
2x
10/100BASE-TX
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
32,500 m (2)
8 dB
11 dB
16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
6.5 W
7.3 W
6.5 W
7.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
1090% non-condensing
IP 20
47 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.400 kg
IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 142 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper
port status and copper port activity
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault, communication port detected
fault, redundancy detected fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 043F1CU0
(1) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 2000 m).
(2) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 15,000 m).
10
3/33
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
3
Fiber optic ports
4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
Connectors
Medium
Length of optical fiber
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
Attenuation analysis
50/125 m fiber
62.2/125 m fiber
9/125 m fiber
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
Ethernet services
5
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Alarm relay
Reference
10
3/34
Operation
WxHxD
8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
5.3 W
5.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
1090% non-condensing
IP 20
47 x 131 x 111 mm
74 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.400 kg
0.410 kg
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active Power supply status, alarm relay status, active
redundancy, redundancy management,
redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
copper port status and copper port activity
port status and fiber port activity
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 043F23F0
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage
Power consumption
Removable connector
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
7 x 10/100BASE-TX
6 x 10/100BASE-TX
ports
ports
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fiber
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
7 x 10/100BASE-TX
ports
6 x 10/100BASE-T
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX port
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
32,500 m (2)
8 dB
11 dB
16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
6.5 W
7.3 W
6.5 W
7.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
1090% non-condensing
IP 20
74 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.410 kg
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
port status and fiber port activity
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 083F1CU0
(1) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 2000 m).
(2) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 15,000 m).
10
3/35
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors
Medium
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fiber
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
5
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
8 dB
11 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
9.4 W
11.8 W
15.5 W
6-way
0+ 60C
1090% non-condensing
IP 20
111 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.600 kg
0.650 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
Redundant power supplies,
Redundant power supplies, single ring, double ring
single ring
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 163F23F0
(1) Length is dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical
value: 2000 m).
10
3/36
Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet network
Cabling system
2
Switches
Interfaces
Fiber optic
Gigabit ports
(with SFP fiber module
to be mounted on SFP
connector)
8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
Total length of pair
Number and type
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
2x
2x
2x
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LH 1000BASE-LX
ports (1)
ports (2)
ports (3)
LC
Multimode
Single mode
Single mode
optical fiber
optical fiber
and multimode
optical fiber
Connectors
Medium
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Redundancy
Power supply Voltage
Power consumption
Removable connector
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Dimensions
Mounting
Weight
Conforming to standards
LED indicators
Alarm relay
Reference
Operation
WxHxD
550 m
275 m
8 -72,000 m
550 m
550 m
20,000 m
7.5 dB
11 dB
7.5 dB
11 dB
6 - 22 dB
11 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Unlimited
Up to 50
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV per IEC 61140)
8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fiber module
8.3 W
6-way
0+ 60C
1090% non-condensing
IP 20
111 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.410 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber
port status and fiber port activity
Power supply detected fault, Ethernet network detected fault or communication port detected
fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
(2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
(3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately. See page 3/27.
10
3/37
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
connectable devices
Introduction
Modicon M340
Lexium 15
Modicon STB
Lexium 05
Altivar 31
Modicon
Premium
1 to 63 slaves
CANopen bus
Osicoder
Altivar 71
TeSys Quickfit
FTB 1CN
This specification is the first standard available for developing an open standard
communication between Modbus/TCP and CANopen. It is driving Schneider Electric
network solutions toward better integration, diagnostics and configuration of
distributed applications. It allows machines and installations to be connected to an
Ethernet network continuously, while combining the advantages of each network in
its specific area.
The CANopen bus is a multi-master bus that helps to ensure reliable, deterministic
access to real-time data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based
on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, to help ensure optimum use
of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave
parameters.
On the Modicon M340 platform, the bus uses a double twisted pair cable. Up to 63
devices can be connected by using a daisy-chain or tap junction architectures. The
variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and 1 Mbit/s depends on the length of the bus
(between 20 m and 2,500 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line
terminator.
The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following
specifications:
b Open bus system
b Data exchanges in real time without overloading the protocol
b Modular design allowing modification of size
b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices
b Standardized configuration of networks
b Access to device parameters
b Synchronization and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled
processes (short system response time)
Connectable devices
10
TeSys Quickfit
3/38
The Modicon M340 automation platform, via its BMX P34 2010/2030 processors with
integrated CANopen link, performs the role of master on the machine bus.
The following Telemecanique devices can be connected to the CANopen bus:
v 58 mm Osicoder multi-turn absolute encoders:
- XCC 3510P/3515C S84CB, version u 1.0
v TeSys U starter-controllers:
- with LUL C08 communication module, version u 1.2
v TeSys T motor management system:
- with LTM RppCpp controllers, version u 1.0
v TeSys D motor-starters, using the TeSys Quickfit installation help system:
- with APP 1CCO0/O2 communication module, version u 1.0
Connectable devices
(continued),
software setup
Modicon M340
automation platform
CANopen machine and installation bus
_____________________________________________________________________________
(1) Requires the PowerSuite software workshop VW3 A8 104, version u 2.00.
(2) Requires the PowerSuite software workshop for Lexium 05 VW3 A8 104, ver. 2.2.0 patch V2.B.
(3) Requires the Unilink software, version u 1.5.
(4) Requires the Unilink software, version u 4.0.
(5) Requires the IclA Easy software, version u 1.104.
Configuration of bus
Configuration of the CANopen bus on the Modicon M340 platform is fully
integrated in the Unity Pro software. From the Unity Pro graphic editor, simply select
the devices available in the catalog and assign them their CANopen slave address.
Exchanges between the CANopen bus and the Modicon M340 processor can be
assigned by configuration to the fast or master task.
Predefined profiles or functions are used to create the user interface automatically
using process variables (PDO), in such a way that any subsequent modification to
the mapping of these variables will have no impact on their topological addressing.
Hardware Catalog Manager for integration of third party devices Depending on the devices, dedicated configuration screens are used to assign the
initial parameters.
The dedicated screens are available for CANopen specialists who wish to optimize
the performance of the CANopen bus or to re-assign the Process Data Objects
(PDO) differently.
A cyclical access to the Service Data Object (SDO) corresponding to any CANopen
object of a particular device is possible using the applications standard
communication functions READ_VAR and WRITE_VAR, or even from the
Unity Pro diagnostic screens. These screens can be used to display the bus status
graphically, as well as to access the diagnostics sent by an inoperative device with a
single click of the mouse.
Note: The max. number (63) of slave equipments connected on CANopen bus depends on the
type of devices. It is necessary to create an objects table (PDO/Cob Id) and occupation of memory
table (%Mi and Mwi). The sheet on pages 6/8 and 6/9, can be used to calculate by column (or
group of columns) and check that:
(objects x nb of products) y max. capacity
Introduction:
page 3/38
References:
page 3/41
Specifications:
page 3/40
Connection references:
pages 3/42
3/39
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Description,
specifications
Description
Both of the performance processors on the Modicon M340 platform,
BMX P34 2010 and BMX P34 2030, have an integrated CANopen communication
port. They have the following on the front panel:
1 Screw for securing the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprised of at least:
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational
v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus inoperative
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application
5 An RJ45 connector for serial link (with BMX P34 2010 model) or Ethernet
Modbus/TCP port (with BMX P34 2030 model)
6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the CANopen Master machine and installation bus
2
3
4
Specifications (1)
Type of bus
CANopen
services
Structure
CANopen
M20
Conformity class
Standard
Device profile
Special
Physical interface
Topology
Access method
m
m
64
160
Kb
Application layer
Transmission
CANopen
physical
configuration
(1)
Data rate
Medium
No. of slave devices
Data rate
Maximum length of bus (2)
Maximum length of tap-offs on one
tap junction (3)
Limitation per
segment
No. of devices
Maximum length
of segment (4)
Modicon M340
processor
No. of racks
Maximum no. of slots
Maximum no. in Discrete I/O
rack
Analog I/O
Process control
App. specific
Motion
Integrated
Ethernet
connections
CANopen bus
Serial link
USB port
Communication Ethernet
module
Modbus/TCP
Internal RAM capacity
32
185
16
205
(1) For more information, please refer to the Machines & Installations with industrial
communications catalog.
(2) Deduct 15 m per repeater from the length of the bus.
(3) For other restrictions, please refer to the CANopen hardware setup manual available at
www.schneider-electric.us/.
(4) With the use of TSX CAN Cp50/100/300 CANopen cables and TSX CAN CpDD03/1/3/5
preformed cordsets.
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
3/40
References:
page 3/41
Connection references:
pages 3/42
Modicon M340
automation platform
References,
connections
Memory
capacity
Reference
Weight
kg
4,096 Kb
integrated
CANopen bus
Modbus serial link
2 Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
network
0.210
CANopen bus
BMX P34 2030
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
network
0.215
Magelis
XBT Gp
12
Modicon STB
Modicon FTB
13
16
PC or
monitoring tool
16
Osicoder
17
24 V c
6a
5
10
14
6a
6b
IcLA
Modicon OTB
Altivar 31 Altivar 71
Lexium 05
Preventa
safety
controller
Lexium 15
TeSys Quickfit
Note: For numbers and references 1 through 17, see pages 3/42 and 3/43.
Different types of cables are available, making it possible to create any type of
application, including for harsh environments. For a definition of standard and harsh
environments, see page 3/42.
Several connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90 angled
connectors, or angled connectors with the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic
pocket PC.
Power can be supplied to the equipment by means of cables, cordsets and tap
junctions: one AWG24 pair for the CAN signals, one AWG22 pair for the power
supply and the ground.
10
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
Connection references:
pages 3/42
3/41
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
IP 20 CANopen tap
junction
TSX CAN TDM4
Description
No.
(1)
1
Straight (2)
90 angled with 9-way SUB-D for connecting a PC 4
or diagnostic tool
IP 20 connectors
CANopen female
9-way SUB-D.
Switch for line
termination
IP 67 M12 connectors Male
Female
2 RJ45 ports
IP 20 CANopen tap
junctions for Altivar
and Lexium 05
CANopen cables
(AWG 24)
Description
No.
(1)
Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 5
Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1)
Standard, UL certification, e marking:
flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2)
5
TSX CAN KCD F180T
Reference
Weight
kg
0.196
0.046
0.049
0.051
FTX CN 12M5
FTX CN 12F5
VW3 CAN TAP2
0.050
0.050
Length
Unit
reference
TSX CAN CA50
TSX CAN CA100
TSX CAN CA300
TSX CAN CB50
TSX CAN CB100
TSX CAN CB300
TSX CAN CD50
TSX CAN CD100
TSX CAN CD300
Length
6b
50 m
100 m
300 m
50 m
100 m
300 m
50 m
100 m
300 m
0.3 m
1m
3m
5m
0.3 m
1m
3m
5m
0,5 m
1m
3m
0.5 m
1.5 m
3m
5m
Weight
kg
4.930
8.800
24.560
3.580
7.840
21.870
3.510
7.770
21.700
0.091
0.143
0.295
0.440
0.086
0.131
0.268
0.400
Description
No.
(1)
12
Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
Unit
reference
FTX CN 3203
FTX CN 3206
FTX CN 3210
FTX CN 3220
FTX CN 3230
FTX CN 3250
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
3/42
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
Architecture:
page 3/41
Weight
kg
0.40
0.70
0.100
0.160
0.220
0.430
References (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
CANopen machine and installation bus
Wiring system
IP 20 connection accessories
Designation
No.
(1)
CANopen connector 9-way female SUB-D. Switch for line termination.
for Altivar 71 drive (2) Cables exit at 180
VW3 CAN A71
Unit
Weight
reference
kg
VW3 CAN KCDF 180T
10
0.3 m
1m
CANopen bus
Hardware interface for a link conforming to the
adaptor for Lexium 15 CANopen standard + one connector for a PC
servo drive
terminal
14
0.110
TCS CTN011M11F
No.
(1)
13
Length
m
Reference
FTX CNTL12
Weight
kg
0.010
16
0.6
1
2
5
1.5
3
5
FTX DP2206
FTX DP2210
FTX DP2220
FTX DP2250
FTX DP2115
FTX DP2130
FTX DP2150
FTX CNCT1
0.150
0.190
0.310
0.750
0.240
0.430
0.700
0,100
Sold
in lot of
Reference
FTX C78M5
FTX C78F5
XZ CC12MDM50B
XZ CC12FDM50B
XZ CC12MCM50B
XZ CC12FCM50B
FTX CM08B
FTX CM12B
0.050
0.050
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.100
0.100
FTX C78B
FTX CY1208
0.020
0.020
FTX CY1212
0.030
10
10
FTX DG12
FTX BLA10
FTX MLA10
0.020
0.010
0.010
Y-connector
Description
CANopen/Modbus
Length
IP 67 connection accessories
For Modicon FTB monobloc I/O splitter boxes
Designation
Composition
FTX DP21pp
T-junction box
for power supply
17
Connectors
XZ CC12pDM50B
Composition
Sealing plugs
XZ CC12pCM50B
Y-connector
Diagnostics adaptor
Marker labels
FTX CY1208
Separate parts
Designation
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Weigh
t
kg
10
Introduction:
page 3/38
Description:
page 3/40
Specifications:
page 3/40
Architecture:
page 3/41
3/43
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
Magelis XBT
Modicon M340
LU9 GC3
Modbus
3
Preventa
XPS MC
Modbus
third party product
Twido
Lexium 05
Altivar 71
Description
The four BMX P34 1000 / 2000 / 2010 / 2020 processors in the Modicon M340
automation platform range integrate a serial link that can operate under Modbus
master/slave RTU/ASCII protocol or under character mode protocol.
For this serial port, these processors have the following on the front panel :
1 A display block comprised of among other LEDs:
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link (lit) or failure on
equipment present on the link (flashing).
2 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or character mode link
(RS 232C/RS 485, non-isolated) and its black indicator 3.
3
Note: For complete processor descriptions, see page 1/6.
8
1
3
2
3
BMX P34 2010
References:
page 3/45
Connections:
pages 3/46
10
3/44
Specifications,
references
Modicon M340
automation platform
Modbus and character mode serial link
Specifications
Protocol
Structure
Transmission
Configuration
Type
Method of access
Physical Interface
Mode
Frame
Data rate
Medium
Number of devices
Maximum number of link addresses
Maximum length of bus
Maximum length of tap links
Services
Requests
Security, control parameters
Monitoring
Modbus
Non isolated serial link (1)
Master/slave type
RS 232, 2 wires
RS 485, 2 wires
Asynchronous in baseband
RTU/ASCII, Half duplex
0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s)
Shielded twisted pair
Character mode
RS 232, 4 wires
RS 485, 2 wires
Asynchronous in baseband
Full duplex
Half duplex
0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s)
Simple or double
Shielded twisted pair
shielded twisted pair
2 (point-to-point)
32 max. per segment 2 (point-to-point)
32 max. per segment
248
248
10 m non isolated link
15 m
10 m non isolated link 15 m
1000 m isolated link
1000 m isolated link
(1) For an isolated link, you must use the TWD XCA ISO terminal port cable connector.
Modbus functions
Modbus functions available on serial ports integrated to
Modicon M340 processors
Code
01
02
03
04
15
16
Other
code
(1) DFB user function block [DAT_EXCHG] can be used to send Modbus/TCP requests on
Ethernet network.
6
References
I/O capacity
Memory
capacity
Integrated
communication ports
Reference
Masse
kg
Standard processor with integrated serial link BMX P34 10, 2 racks
512 discrete I/O
128 E/S analog I/O
20 applicationspecific channels
2,048 Kb
integrated
0.200
Performance processors with integrated serial link BMX P34 20, 4 racks
1024 discrete I/O
256 E/S analog I/O
36 applicationspecific channels
4,096 Kb
integrated
0.200
0.210
0.205
9
Serial link cabling system, see pages 3/46 and 3/47.
BMX P34 2020
10
Description:
pages 3/44
Connections:
pages 3/46
3/45
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections
Magelis XBT
Modicon Premium
Modicon Quantum
10
11
Modbus RS 232
RS 232
RS 485
Out
In
2
7
12
Altivar 31
5
c 24 V
Modbus
7
Modbus
Modicon OTB
Preventa XPS MC third party product
Twido
Lexium 05
2 12
Modicon M340
Altivar 71
4
Extension and adaptation elements for RS 485 serial link
Designation
Description
No.
Length
Unit
reference
LU9 GC3
0.3 m
1m
0.190
0.210
TSX SCA 50
0.520
TSX SCA 62
0.570
0.100
0.080
VW3 A8114
0.155
XGS Z24
0.100
Sold in
lots of 2
VW3 A8 306RC
0.200
TSX SCA 50
LU9 GC3
TSX SCA 62
Passive 2-channel
subscriber socket, 2 x
15-way female SUB-D
connectors and 2 x
screw terminals
T-junction box
Screw terminals for main
cable.
1 x RJ45 connector for
derivation
T-junction box
3 x RJ45 connectors
Modbus / Bluetooth
adaptor
9
TWD XCA ISO
10
Line terminator
VW3 A8 114
3/46
XGS Z24
12
Weight
kg
0.500
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Modbus and character mode serial link
Cabling system
Description
No.
Length
100 m
200 m
500 m
Unit
reference
TSX CSA 100
TSX CSA 200
TSX CSA 500
0.3 m
1m
3m
0.030
0.050
0.150
Cordsets for
Magelis XBT
display and terminal
Weight
kg
5.680
10.920
30.000
3m
VW3 A8 306
0.150
0.3 m
1m
3m
0.040
0.090
0.16
3m
0.150
3m
0.180
11
2.5 m
XBT Z938
0.210
11
3m
0.150
Description
Length
3m
Unit
Weight
reference
kg
TCS MCN 3M4F3C2
0.150
3m
0.150
10
3/47
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Input modules and mixed I/O modules
Applications
3
c
Type
Voltage
100120V
Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable
terminals
Type 3
Type 1
Type 1 (a)
Type 3
Positive
2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any type
Fallback
Module
BMX
DDI 1602
Page
2/16
Compatibility with
installation help system
TeSys Quickfit
Compatibility with
Modicon Telefast ABE 7
pre-wired system
Connection sub-bases
Passive connection
sub-base
Optimum Economy
Optimum Miniature
Universal
Fixed relays
Plug-in relays
Pages
9
Relay adaptor sub-base
10
a
48 V
Connection
Isolated outputs
c or a
24 V
16 isolated channels
48 V
Modularity
(Number of channels)
Isolated inputs
24 V
2/2
BMX
DDI 1603
Negative
2-wire c/a,
3-wire c PNP
or NPN any
type
2-wire a
BMX
DAI 1602
BMX
DAI 1603
BMX
DAI 1604
3
c
c
24 V I/O
24 V
c
24 V I/O
32 isolated channels
64 isolated channels
Type 3
Non-IEC
Positive
2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP
any type
Positive
Positive
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs
in case of detected internal fault
Yes
Protected
Not protected
Protected
Positive
Positive
2/16
2/17
Depending on model, 8- or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel
Depending on model, 16-channel active sub-bases with solid state or electromechanical, fixed or removable relays, 5...48 V c, 24 V c, 24 V...240 V a or
volt-free, with common or 2 terminals per channel, screw or spring-type connection
ABE 7H34pp0
ABE 7H34pp0
ABE 7H16Cpp
ABE 7H16Cpp
ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,
ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,
ABE 7H16R3p/7H16R23,
ABE 7H16S43,
ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,
ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,
ABE 7H16R3p/7H16R23,
ABE 7H16S43/7H16F43
ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7S16Sppp/7R16S
ABE 7P16F31pp
ABE 7P16F31pp
ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
5/8 to 5/11,
2/17
10
2/3
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Output modules
Applications
Type
c solid state
Voltage
24 V
Current
Modularity
(Number of channels)
32 protected channels
64 protected channels
Connection
Isolated outputs
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in
case of a detected internal fault
Yes
Protection
Logic
Positive
Page
2/16
Compatibility with
installation help system
TeSys Quickfit
Compatibility with
Modicon Telefast ABE 7
pre-wired system
Connection sub-bases
Passive sub-base
Optimum Economy
ABE 7H34pp0
Optimum Miniature
ABE 7H16Cpp
Universal
ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,
ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,
ABE 7H16R3p
ABE 7H16F43
Fixed relays
Removable relays
ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
8
Relay adaptor sub-base
Fallback
Pages
10
2/4
c solid state
a triac
c/a relay
24 V c
100240 V
24 V c, 24...240 V a
16 protected channels
16 non-protected channels
8 non-protected channels
16 non-protected channels
Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output
control and resetting of outputs in case of a detected internal
fault
Yes
Yes
Positive
Negative
2/16
10
2/5
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
Discrete I/O modules in the Modicon M340 offer are standard modules occupying
a single slot, equipped with either of the following:
v A connector for a screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
v One or two 40-way connector(s)
A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs can be used to meet whatever
requirements arise in terms of:
v functions, AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic
v modularity, 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels per module
The inputs receive signals from the sensors and perform the following functions:
v
v
v
v
v
acquisition
adaptation
electrical isolation
filtering
protection against interference signals
The outputs memorize commands issued by the processor to enable control of the
preactuators via the decoupling and amplification circuits.
Description
BMX DpI/DpO/DRA discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a
case that helps to ensure IP 20 protection of the electronics, and are locked into
position with a captive screw.
1
2
8
To be ordered separately:
5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (label supplied with each I/O
module) or a preformed cordset with a 20-way removable terminal block at one
end and flying leads at the other (see page 2/7).
8
4
1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
3 Channel status display block
4 One or two 40-way connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or
preactuators
5 With the 64-channel module, successive actuations of a pushbutton cause the
display of the states of channels 0 ... 31 or 32 ... 64 on the block 3 (see page 2/9)
9
32- and 64-channel modules with for connection via
40-way connector(s)
Specifications:
pages 2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
10
2/6
References:
pages 2/16
Introduction (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
3
B
A
B
The capacity of each terminal in the BMX FTB 2020 spring-type terminal blocks is:
v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (AWG 22)
v Maximum: One 1 mm2 wire (AWG 18)
2
5
3
b Preformed cordsets can be used for easy direct wire-to-wire connection between
the I/O of modules with connectors 1 and the sensors, preactuators or intermediate
terminals.
These preformed cordsets are comprised of:
v At one end, a 40-way connector 2 with either of the following:
- One sheath containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22)
(BMX FCW pp1)
- Two sheaths 3 , each containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2
(AWG 22) (BMX FCW pp3)
v At the other end 4, color-coded flying leads conforming to standard DIN 47100
(see page 2/21)
c Two types of cordset can be used for connecting the I/O of modules with 40-way
1
7
6
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/7
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions
Functions
Hot swapping
Protection of DC inputs
The 24 and 48 V c inputs are constant-current type. This characteristic makes it
possible to:
v Help ensure minimum current in active state in compliance with the IEC standard
v Limit the current consumption when the input voltage increases to avoid unwanted
temperature rise in the module
v Reduce the current consumption on the sensor power supply provided by the PLC
power supply or by a process power supply
Protection of DC outputs
Protected solid state outputs have a protective device. When an output is active, the
protective device can detect the occurrence of the following:
v An overload or short-circuit: This deactivates the output (tripping) and indicates a
detected fault on the display on the module front panel (the LED for the affected
channel flashes, the I/O module detected fault LED lights up).
v Reverse polarity: This will short-circuit the power supply without damaging the
module. For this protection to work in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a
fast-blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.
v Inductive overvoltage: Each output is protected individually against inductive
overvoltages and has a fast zener diode demagnetization circuit for electromagnets
that can reduce the output response time for some fast machines.
Reactivation of DC outputs
If a detected fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated using
this parameter if no other terminal detected fault is present.
Reactivation is defined for each group of 8 channels. It has no effect on an inactive
channel or one that is OK.
The reactivation command can be:
v Programmed: Reactivation is carried out by a command from the PLC application
or via the debug screen. To avoid repeated reactivations too close together, the
module automatically allows a time delay of 10 s between two reactivations.
v Automatic: Reactivation takes place automatically every 10 s until the detected
fault disappears.
RUN/STOP command
An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC.
This is taken into account on a rising edge. A STOP command from an input has
priority over a RUN command from a programming terminal or via the network.
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
2/8
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions (continued)
Functions (continued)
Output fallback
This parameter defines the fallback mode used by the DC solid state outputs when
the PLC stops following a:
v Processor detected fault
v Detected rack fault
v Detected fault on the cable connecting the racks
The outputs must be set to a state that is not harmful to the application. This state,
known as the fallback position, is defined for each module when the DC solid state
outputs are configured. This configuration offers a choice between:
v Fallback: The channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the fallback value defined for
the group of 8 corresponding channels.
v Maintain: The outputs maintain the state they were in before the stop occurred.
Each discrete I/O module is equipped with a display block on the front panel
centralizing all the information necessary for module control, diagnostics and
maintenance. The display block comprises:
1 A set of 8, 16 or 32 green LEDs depending on the module modularity. Each LED
is associated with one channel:
- On: channel in state 1; Off: channel in state 0
- Flashing: channel inoperative, overloaded or short-circuited
2 Three LEDs indicating the module status:
- RUN (green): On: Normal operation
-ERR (red): On: Detected internal module fault; Flashing: Detected
communication fault between the module and the processor
-I/O (red): On: External detected fault (sensor/preactuator voltage, overload,
short-circuit, etc.); Flashing: Detected terminal block fault
3 A +32 LED (green) indicating, in the case of 64-channel modules, whether the set
of 32 LEDs 1 displays the state of channels 0...31 (off) or the state of channels
32...63 (on). This +32 LED is activated or deactivated by a pushbutton located on
top of the module.
Diagnostics via Unity Pro
Using the integrated diagnostics in Unity Pro, this local diagnostics on the modules
front panel is complemented by system diagnostics based on predefined screens at
global hardware configuration level, module level and channel level (see pages 4/23
and 4/24).
Remote diagnostics using a web browser on a Thin Client PC
In addition, the diagnostics described above can be performed remotely using a
simple web browser thanks to the standard web server integrated in the Modicon
M340 platform (processor with integrated Ethernet port or Ethernet module), using
the ready-to-use Rack Viewer function (see page 3/4).
24 V c
Non-IEC
positive log.
(sink)
48 V c
type 1
positive log.
(sink)
24 V c
type 3
positive log.
(sink)
24 V a
type 1
48 V a
type 3
100...120 V a
type 3
(1)
9
Compatible
Compatible
with restriction
Not compatible
10
For combinations with Osiprox inductive proximity sensors, see pages 6/10 and 6/11.
For combinations with Osiris photo-electric sensors, see page 6/12.
(1) 24 V a sensors can be used as negative logic (source) 24 V c inputs compatible with 3-wire c sensor NPN type, but in this case, are not IEC-compliant.
2/9
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Common specifications
Environment
Temperature derating
The specifications at 60C are validated for 60% of inputs and 60% of outputs at state 1.
Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Input limit
values
At state 1
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Logic
V
mA
Voltage
Current
V
mA
Voltage
Current
V
mA
24 c
3.5
Positive (sink)
48 c
2.5
24 c
2.5
3
Negative (source)
u 11
u 34
>2
(for U u 11 V)
<5
y 1.5
>2
(for U u 34 V)
< 10
y 0.5
u 11
>2
(for U u 11 V)
<5
y 1.5
u 15
>1
(for U u 15 V)
u 14
>2
ms
ms
4
7
Number
Typical
Maximum
9.6
M
V rms
V
Protected
Type 3
Type 1
Type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Yes
No
Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m)
500 c
V
V
Current sink
> 18 c
< 14 c
Consumption
mA
10
References:
pages 2/16
2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
24
6.4
10
20
Reverse polarity
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Paralleling of inputs (1)
Protection of inputs
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Primary/Secondary
Between groups of
channels
Type of input
Sensor voltage control
OK
threshold
Out of range
Typical
y 0.5
No
Non-IEC
Resistive
> 36 c
< 24 c
> 18 c
< 14 c
2.5
3.6
3.9
4.3
3
None
(1) This characteristic allows several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module or on
different modules for input redundancy.
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
Input limit
values
At state 1
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Frequency
V
mA
Hz
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Current
V
mA
V
mA
Hz
V
u 15
u2
y5
y1
47...63
20...26
y 10
u 74
u 2.5
y 20
40...52
85132
mA
95
240
k
ms
ms
6
15
20
9
10
13
M
V rms
V
V
Type 1
Type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
>10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m)
Resistive
Capacitive
> 18
> 36
< 14
< 24
mA
1,504,958
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
Number
Frequency
Sensor power supply
(ripple included)
Current peak
At nominal voltage
on activation
Input impedance at nominal voltage and F = 55 Hz
Response time (filtering)
Activation
Deactivation
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Protection of inputs
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Type of input
Sensor voltage control threshold OK
Out of range
Reliability
Consumption
MTBF in hours
At Tambient = 30C
Typical
3
None
u 34
100...120 a
4
> 82
< 40
3.8
Number
Nominal
Limit
Maximum
Minimum
V
V
A
At state 0
At state 1
Activation
Deactivation
A
mA
V
ms
ms
Typical
V rms
M
mA
y 20/cycle
y 1.5 for 120 V a, 60 Hz, 3 for 240 V a, 60 Hz
y 1.5
y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Passage through zero
Varistor
None (use an external fast-blow fuse)
2,830 a/3 cycles (up to 2,000 m)
> 10 at 500 V c
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
10
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/11
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
Module
Number of inputs
Commons
Connection
Output nominal values
V
A
Voltage
(ripple included)
Current per
channel
Current per
module
0.625
0.125
10
3.2
W
mA
V
6 maximum
< 0.5
< 1.2
1.2 maximum
0.1 (for U = 30 V)
At state 0
At state 1
ms
ms
Paralleling of outputs
Switching frequency on inductive load
Hz
Built-in protection
Against
overvoltages
Against inversions
Against
short-circuit and
overloads
Preactuator voltage control
At state 0
V
threshold
Out of range
V
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
M
Output/ground or V rms
output/internal
logic
Between groups of V
channels
Typical
mA
10
References:
pages 2/16
2/12
Voltage
Current
Logic
Consumption
Number
Connections:
pages 2/18
48
1.2
Yes
Yes (2 max.)
0.5/LI2
Yes, by Transil diode
0.1
Positive (source)
6.4 if 40C
5.1 if 50C
3.8 if 60C
15
Yes
Yes (3 max.)
500 c
2.26
3.6
6.85
See Current per
module above
(1) Outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge
time for the electromagnets < L/R.
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
DC
AC
V
V
A
mA
3
1 at 5 V c
Minimum
VA
24 V
VA
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
24 V
Number
Thermal current
Switching load
Electrical life
AC load
Power
cos = 0.7
Power
cos = 0.35
Power
DC load
Voltage
AC load
DC load
Resistive loads
AC-12
Inductive loads
AC-15
(cos = 0.3)
Inductive loads
AC-14
(cos = 0.7)
Resistive loads
DC-12
Inductive loads
DC-13 (14)
Response time
Built-in
protection
48 V
50 (4),
110 (5)
10 (6),
24 (7)
Power
VA
50 (3)
Power
VA
24 (5)
Power
VA
Power
Power
Activation
Deactivation
ms
ms
24 (4),
40 (13)
10 (7),
24 (4)
< 10
<8
Typical
Dissipated power
Temperature derating
110...
120 V
110 (4),
220 (5)
10 (8),
50 (9),
110 (10)
200...
240 V
220 (4)
10 (8),
50 (11),
110 (4),
220 (12)
2
100 V
10 (1),
3 (2)
100 V
200 V
300 (1),
80 (2)
200 (1),
60 (2)
240 V
240 (1),
72 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
200 V
240 V
200 (1),
60 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
300 (1),
80 (2)
240 (1),
72 (2)
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
10 (1),
3 (2)
< 12
24 V
M
V rms
mA
> 10 at 500 V c
2,000 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
2.7 max.
None
10
References:
pages 2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
Module
Number of inputs/outputs
Commons
Connection
Nominal values Inputs
Outputs
2
Input limit
values
Voltage
Current
DC voltage
Direct current
AC voltage
Alternating current
At state 1
Voltage
Current
At state 0
Voltage
Current
Sensor power supply
(ripple included)
Input impedance at nominal voltage
Input response time
Typical
Maximum
V
mA
V
A
V
A
u 11
u 2 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 hour in
every 24 hours)
6.8
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
No
Current sink
y 12
y 10
5 V c/1 mA
264 a/125 c
u 20 million
V
V
> 18
< 14
VA
24 V
VA
M
V rms
V
V rms
mA
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
500 c
24 (1),
7.2 (2)
3,600 cycles/hour
V
mA
V
mA
V
k
ms
ms
Number
Switching load
Mechanical durability
Activation
Deactivation
Minimum
Maximum
No. of switching
operations
ms
ms
V
Fuse protection
Inductive loads
Power
DC-13
Maximum switching frequency
Insulation resistance
Dielectric
Primary/secondary
strength
Between groups of I/O
Max. voltage
Consumption
Typical
Dissipated power
Temperature derating
10
References:
pages 2/16
2/14
Connections:
pages 2/18
3.5
24 c
2 (resistive load)
220 a, Cos = 1
3.1 maximum
None
(1) For 1 x 10 5 operating cycles
(2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles
2,830 a/cycle
200 V
300 (1),
80 (2)
240 V
240 (1),
72 (2)
200 (1),
60 (2)
120 (1),
36 (2)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications (continued)
W
V
mA
V
mA
V
6 maximum
u 11
> 3 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930
2.5
Positive (sink)
u 11
u 2 (for U u 11 V)
5
y 1.5
1930
100
Positive (source)
1.2 maximum
1930
1930
A
A
0,625
5
0,125
3.2
k
ms
ms
6.8
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
9.6
4
7
Protected
Yes, type 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
Leakage current
At state 0
Residual voltage
At state 1
Minimum load impedance
Output response time (1)
Max. overload time before detected fault state
Compatibility with IEC 61131-2 DC inputs
Paralleling of outputs
Switching frequency on inductive load
Built-in protection
Against
overvoltages
Against inversions
mA
V
ms
ms
< 0.5
< 1.2
48
1.2
15
Yes
Yes (2 maximum)
0.5/LI2
Yes, by Transil diode
0.1
< 1.5 (for I=0.1 A)
220
1.2
15
Yes
Yes (3 maximum)
0.5/LI2
Yes, by Transil diode
Yes, by
reverse-mounted
diode. Use a 2 A fuse
on the preactuator
+ 24 V
Yes, by current limiter
and electronic
circuit-breaker
1.5 ln < Id < 2 ln
Yes, by
reverse-mounted
diode. Use a 2 A fuse
on the preactuator
+ 24 V
Yes, by current limiter
and electronic
circuit-breaker
0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
Number of inputs/outputs
Commons
Connection
Number
Nominal values
Voltage
Current
Logic
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Current
Possible up to
30 V, limited to
1 hour in every 24
hours
Possible up to
30 V, limited to
1 hour in every 24
hours
Per channel
Per module
At state 0
Sensor power
supply (ripple
included)
Output limit
values
Voltage (ripple
included)
Currents
V
mA
Hz
Against
short-circuits and
overloads
Sensor and preactuator voltage
control thresholds
OK
Out of range
Insulation resistance
Dielectric
Primary/secondary
strength
Between groups of inputs and outputs
Outputs/ground or outputs/internal
logic
Consumption
3.3 V c
Typical
Maximum
24 V c
Typical
preactuators (2)
Maximum
Maximum dissipated power
Temperature derating
References:
pages 2/16
M
V rms
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
> 18
< 14
> 10 at 500 V c
1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
500 c
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/15
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
Discrete input modules
Type of
current
c
Input voltage
Connection by
(1)
24 V (positive
logic)
Weight
kg
0.115
0.112
0.145
Non-IEC
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
0.115
48 V (positive
logic)
Type 1
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
0.115
24 V
Type 1
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
0.115
0.115
0.115
100...120 V
BMX DDI 3202K
Reference
24 V (negative
logic)
48 V
IEC/EN
No. of channels
61131-2
(common)
conformity
Type 3
16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
Type 3
32 isolated inputs
(2 x 16)
Non-IEC
64 isolated inputs
(4 x 16)
Type 3
Type 3
c
24 V/0.5 A
solid state (positive logic)
24 V/0.5 A
Screw or spring-type 20-way
(negative logic) removable terminal block
24 V/0.1 A
(positive logic)
BMX
DDO 16p2
BMX DRA
0805/1605
IEC/EN
No. of channels
61131-2
(common)
conformity
Yes
16 protected
outputs
(1 x 16)
Non-IEC
16 protected
outputs
(1 x 16)
Yes
32 protected
outputs
(2 x 16)
Yes
64 protected
outputs
(4 x 16)
16 outputs
(4 x 4)
a triac
100...240
c or a
relay
Yes
24 V c/2 A,
240 V a/2 A
Yes
8 non-protected
outputs
(without common)
16 non-protected
outputs
(2 x 8)
8
BMX
DDO 3202K
BMX
DDO 6402K
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
2/16
Connections:
pages 2/18
Reference
Weight
kg
0.120
0.120
0.110
0.150
0.140
0.145
0.150
Modicon M340
automation platform
References (continued)
References (continued)
Discrete mixed I/O modules
Number
of I/O
16
BMX
DDM 160p2
BMX
DDM 3202K
32
Connection
via (1)
Screw
or spring-type
20-way
removable
terminal block
No. of inputs
(common)
8 (positive logic)
(1 x 8)
One 40-way
connector
16 (positive logic)
(1 x 16)
No. of outputs
(common)
8, solid state
24 V c / 0,5 A
(1 x 8)
8, relay 24 V c or
24...240 V a
(1 x 8)
16, solid state
24 V c / 0,1 A
(1 x 16)
Weight
kg
0.115
Inputs, type 3
0.135
Inputs, type 3
0.110
Type
Reference
Cage clamp
Screw clamp
Spring-type
Use
Weight
kg
0.093
0.075
0.060
Composition
Length
Reference
3m
5m
10 m
Weight
kg
0.850
1.400
2.780
No. of
sheaths
1 x 20
wires (16
channels)
Composition
Weight
kg
0.820
1.370
2.770
2 x 20
One 40-way connector 0.324 mm2 3 m
wires (32 Two ends with
5m
channels) color-coded flying leads
10 m
0.900
1.490
2.960
0.140
0.195
0.560
0.840
1.390
2.780
0.210
0.350
0.630
0.940
1.530
3.000
1 x 20
One 40-way connector
wires (16 One HE 10 connector
channels)
CrossLength
section
0.324 mm2 3 m
5m
10 m
Reference
10
Specifications:
pages 2/10
Connections:
pages 2/18
2/17
Connections
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Input modules
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
c 24 V
17
Fu
19
1
2
3
4
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
c 24 V
10
10
Sensors
+ -
c 24 V
20
Sensors
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Fu
c 24 V
+ -
c 24 V
Chnl
Fu
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
12
11
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
13
12
+ -
11
10
2
1
+ -
2
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
Fu
18
17
19
20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
L1
a
N
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chnl
Fu
18
+
c 48 V
Chnl
Chnl
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fu
18
18
19
20
2/18
c 24 V
+
Fu
20
19
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Output modules
BMX DDO 1602
Chnl Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chnl Preactuators
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+
c 24 V
-
16
17
Fu
+
-
c 24 V
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
18
19
20
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
Fu
+
c 24 V
-
1
2
Chnl Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+
c 24 V
-
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
+
c 24 V
-
Fu
Fu
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
2
-
4
-
4
5
6
7
8
9
For correspondence of the 40-way connector pins with the wire colors of BMX FCW p01/p03
prewired cordsets, in accordance with DIN 47100, see table on page 2/21.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fu
c 24 V
19
20
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
a 120/240 V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chnl
1
Fu
4
6
7
11
13
Fu
10
12
Fu
14
15
16
17
Preactuators
Chnl
1
Uc/a
2
3
Uc/a
4
5
Uc/a
6
7
Uc/a
8
9
Uc/a
10
11
Uc/a
12
13
Uc/a
14
15
Uc/a
Fu
18
Fu
16
17
18
19
19
20
20
U c 1224 V
U a 24240 V
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
Uc/a
5
6
7
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Uc/a
Fu
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fu
19
20
U c 1224 V
U a 24240 V
10
Description:
pages 2/6
Specifications:
pages 2/10
References:
pages 2/16
2/19
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Chnl
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fu
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
Fu
20
Fu
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
+
Fu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
c 24 V
Preactuators
10
2/20
Specifications:
pages 2/10
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
References:
pages 2/16
Description:
pages 2/6
c 24 V
c 24 V
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fu
15
Preactuators
14
19
1
2
c 24 V
13
c 24 V / a 24240 V
Chnl
12
18
Sensors
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
c 24 V
Chnl
1
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Preactuators
Fu
19
20
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Cordset color codes in accordance with DIN 47100
Connection cables with 40-way connector and end(s) with flying leads BMX FCW p01/p03
Correspondence of connector pins with the wire colors at the
sheath end
20 wires
Cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads
BMX FCW p01
20 wires
20 wires
Cordset with two sheathed ends with flying lead
BMX FCW p03
Connector
pin no.
B20
A20
B19
A19
B18
A18
B17
A17
B16
A16
B15
A15
B14
A14
B13
A13
B12
A12
B11
A11
B10
A10
B9
A9
B8
A8
B7
A7
B6
A6
B5
A5
B4
A4
B3
A3
B2
A2
B1
A1
Color at sheath
end
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
32/64-channel
inputs
Input 0/32
Input 1/33
Input 2/34
Input 3/35
Input 4/36
Input 5/37
Input 6/38
Input 7/39
Input 8/40
Input 9/41
Input 10/42
Input 11/43
Input 12/44
Input 13/45
Input 14/46
Input 15/47
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Input 16/48
Input 17/49
Input 18/50
Input 19/51
Input 20/52
Input 21/53
Input 22/54
Input 23/55
Input 24/56
Input 25/57
Input 26/58
Input 27/59
Input 28/60
Input 29/61
Input 30/62
Input 31/63
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
32/64-channel
outputs
Output 0/32
Output 1/33
Output 2/34
Output 3/35
Output 4/36
Output 5/37
Output 6/38
Output 7/39
Output 8/40
Output 9/41
Output 10/42
Output 11/43
Output 12/44
Output 13/45
Output 14/46
Output 15/47
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Output 16/48
Output 17/49
Output 18/50
Output 19/51
Output 20/52
Output 21/53
Output 22/54
Output 23/55
Output 24/56
Output 25/57
Output 26/58
Output 27/59
Output 28/60
Output 29/61
Output 30/62
Output 31/63
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
32-channel
I/O
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Output 0
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
+ 24 V
- 24 V
+ 24 V
- 24 V
Connection cables with 20-way terminal block at one end and flying leads at the other BMX FTW p01
Correspondence of 20-way removable terminal block pins with the wire colors (at sheath end)
Correspondence of terminal block pins with the wire colors at the Terminal
Color at sheath
sheath end
block pin no. end
1
White
2
Brown
3
Green
4
Yellow
5
Gray
6
Pink
7
Blue
8
Red
9
Black
20 wires
Cordset with 1 sheathed end with flying lead
BMX FTW p01
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Purple
Gray/pink
Red/blue
White/green
Brown/green
White/yellow
Yellow/brown
White/gray
Gray/brown
White/pink
Pink/brown
16-channel
inputs
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7/
Input 8
8- or 16-channel
outputs
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Power supply
+ common pwr sup.
Power supply
Power supply
16-channel
I/O
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Sensor + common
power supply
Sensor pwr supply
Output 0
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Preactuator pwr sup.
Preactuator pwr sup.
2/21
10
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Applications
Analog inputs
Type of I/O
Type
Multi-range
Range
Voltage
Current
Thermocouple,
Temperature probe,
Resistor
Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
Temperature probes type Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 and Cu 10, 2-,3- or 4-wire
Resistors 2-, 3- or 4-wire, 400 or 4,000
Modularity
4 channels
8 channels
Acquisition period
Conversion time
Resolution
16 bits
Isolation
6
Connection
BMX FCW p01S cordsets with one end with color-coded flying leads (3 or 5 m long)
Module
Page
2/31
Sub-base with 4 channels for direct connection of 4 thermocouples plus connection and
provision of cold-junction compensation
Type of module
Connection sub-base
ABE 7CPA412
Preformed cordsets
(length 1.5, 3 or 5 m)
BMX FCApp2
10
Pages
2/22
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Non-isolated high-level
inputs
Voltage/current
Non-isolated high-level
outputs
Voltage/current
Voltage/current
10 V
10 V
10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V,
1...5 V
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
4 channels
2 channels
4 channels
2 channels
y 1 ms
Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of
declared channels) ms
By default, 5 ms for 4
channels
16 bits
16 bits
5
y 1 ms
2/31
8
4-channel sub-base for direct connection of
4 inputs, delivers and distributes 4 protected
isolated power supplies
ABE 7CPA410
ABE 7CPA21
BMX FCApp0
BMX FCApp0
10
2/23
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
The analog I/O module offer consists of:
b Three isolated analog input modules:
v 4 analog high-speed channels (16 bits), voltage or current, BMX AMI 0410
v 4 and 8 analog channels (15 bits + sign) for thermocouples, Pt, Ni or Cu
temperature probes, BMX ART 0414/0814
b One analog output module with 2 voltage/current channels, BMX AMO 0210
b One mixed module (12 bits) with 4 analog input channels and 2 analog output
channels, non-isolated, voltage or current, BMX AMM 0600
Analog I/O modules are equipped with a connector for a 20-way removable terminal
block, except for BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules with
thermocouples/temperature probes that are equipped with a 40-way connector.
All analog modules occupy a single slot in the BMX XBP ppp racks. These modules
can be installed in any slot in the rack, except for the first two (PS and 00) which are
reserved for the power supply module in the BMX CPS pp0 rack and the BMX P34
pp0 processor module respectively.
The power supply for the analog functions is supplied by the backplane bus (3.3 V
and 24 V). Analog I/O modules are hot-swappable (see page 2/8).
Description
BMX AMp/ART analog I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a case
that helps to ensure IP 20 protection of the electronics, and are locked into position
by a captive screw.
1
1
2
2
3
8
4
4
To be ordered separately:
5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (label supplied with each I/O
module) or a preformed cordset with a 20-way removable terminal block at one
end and flying leads at the other (see page 2/30).
5
5
2
3
8
4
1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
3 Channel status display block
4 One or two 40-way connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or
preactuators
5 With the 64-channel module, successive actuations of a pushbutton cause the
display of the states of channels 0 ... 31 or 32 ... 64 on the block 3 (see page 2/31)
10
2/24
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections
One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with a 3 or 5 m long cordset
with color-coded flying leads (BMX FTWppS). These preformed cordsets, with
reinforced shielding have, at the other end 1, color-coded flying leads.
2
Connecting modules with 40-way connectors
BMX ART 0p14 modules with 40-way connectors
1
BMX FTW p01S cordset
(with 20-way removable terminal block at one end and flying
leads at the other)
2
BMX FCW p01S cordset
(with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at the other)
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA410 sub-base is mainly used in conjunction with
the BMX AMI 0410 voltage/current analog 4-input module. It is used to:
b Connect the four sensors directly
b Remotely locate the input terminals in voltage mode
b Power the 4...20 mA conditioners one channel at a time with a 24 V voltage,
protected and limited to 25 mA, while maintaining isolation between channels
b Protect the current impedance matching resistors integrated in the sub-base
against overvoltages
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA21 sub-base is compatible with the BMX AMO and
BMX ART 0210 voltage/current analog 2-output module. It is used to:
b Connect the two channels
b Help ensure continuity of the shielding
Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 cordset (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).
10
Functions:
pages 2/26
Specifications:
pages 2/28
References:
page 2/31
Connections:
page 2/32
2/25
Functions
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Functions
BMX ART 0414/0814 modules are multirange input modules with 4 or 8 low-level
isolated inputs (15 bits + sign) respectively.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer for each of
the inputs the following range:
b Temperature probe: Pt100, Pt1000, Cu10, Ni100 or Ni1000, with open-circuit
detection
b Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, with broken wire detection
b Resistor: 0...400 or 0...4000 , 2-, 3- or 4-wire
b Voltage: 40 mV, 80 mV, 160 mV, 320 mV, 640 mV, 1.28 V.
Functions
10
2/26
Functions (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Functions
Functions
10
Description:
page 2/24
Specifications:
pages 2/28
References:
page 2/31
Connections:
page 2/32
2/27
Specifications
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Input module
Input type
Number of channels
Nature of inputs
Voltage
Current
Analog/digital conversion
Voltage/current range
Maximum conversion value
Resolution
Input impedance
Typical
Permitted overload on Voltage range
the inputs
Current range
Voltage/current internal conversion resistor
Precision of internal conversion resistor
Filtering
Read cycle time
Measurement
tolerance (1)
M
V
mA
24 bits
10 V
5V
05 V
010 V
11.4 V
0.35 mV
10 (regardless of the input level)
30 c
90 ot short-circuit to + 24 V c
15 V
020 mA 420 mA 20 mA
30 mA
0.92 A
250
0.1% - 15 ppm/C
Fast
Default
ms
ms
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
%FS
%FS
0.075%
0.1%
0.15% (2)
0.3% (2)
30 ppm/C
Temperature drift
Recalibration
Common mode between channels
Digital value format
Isolation
Between channels
Between channels and bus
Between channels and ground
V
V
V
15 ppm/C
Internal
120
10,000 by default, 32,000 in user scale
300 c
1,400 c
1,400 c
Consumption
mA
Typical
dB
Input module
Input type
Number of channels
Nature of inputs
Analog/digital conversion
Resolution
Filtering
Read cycle time
ms
V
dB
dB
Cold junction
compensation
Recalibration
Isolation
Consumption
mV
- the dedicated Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base including the probe
- a Pt 100 temperature probe 2-wire on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
maintened)
- a Pt 100 temperature probe 3-wired on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
non maintened)
Between channels
Between channels and bus
Between channels and ground
Typical
V
V
V
mA
Internal
750 c
1,400 c
750 c
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
10
2/28
Specifications (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
M
mV
%FS
%FS
Resistor range
Type
Maximum conversion value
Maximum resolution
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
160 mV
320 mV
640 mV
1.28 V
80/214
160/214
320/214
640/214
1280/214
mV
%FS
%FS
400
2-, 3- or 4-wire
100%
400/214
0.12
0.2
4,000
4,000/214
ppm/C 25
Temperature drift
Temperature probe ranges
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
tolerance (1)
At 25C (2)
Maximum at 060C
C
C
Max. wiring
resistance
4-wire
2/3-wire
Temperature drift
C
C
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
Temperature drift
Thermocouple ranges (continued)
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
Temperature drift
80 mV
ppm/C 30
Temperature drift
Thermocouple ranges
Measurement range
Resolution
Detection type
Measurement
tolerance (1)
40 mV
10
102.5%
40/214
0.05
0.15
C
C
Pt100
Pt1000
Cu10
According to IEC: -200...+850
-100...+260
According to US/JIS: -100...+450
0.1
Open circuit (detection on each channel)
2.1
4
2
4
50
20
30 ppm/C
500
200
Ni100
-60...+180
Ni1000
2.1
3.0
0.7
1.3
50
20
B
E
J
+130...+1820
-270...+1000
-200...+760
0.1
Open circuit (detection on each channel)
3.5
3.7
2.8
5
5
4.5
500
200
5
K
-270...+1370
L
-200...+900
3.7
5
3.0
4.5
T
-270...+400
U
-200...+600
3.7
5
2.7
4.5
ppm/C 25
C
C
C
C
N
R
S
+270...+1300
-50...+1769
-50...+1769
0.1
Open circuit (detection on each channel)
3.7
3.2
3.2
5
4.5
4.5
ppm/C 25
(1) %FS: Tolerance as a% of full scale. 1C with Pt100 temperature probe range, - 100...+ 200C
10
2/29
Specifications (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Module
Output type
Number of channels
Ranges
Resolution
Conversion time
Output power supply
Output ranges
Adjustment range
Voltage
Current
bits
ms
Measurement
tolerance (1)
Temperature drift
Recalibration
Fallback mode (2)
Isolation
Consumption
Current
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
24 mA
y 600
Open circuit
Nominal
Maximum
V
V
At 25C
Maximum at 060C
%FS
%FS
0.10
0.25
V
V
V
mA
40 ppm/C
None, factory-calibrated
Default or configurable
750 c
1,400 c
1,400 c
See Power consumption table on page 6/13
Load impedance
Detection type
Between channels
Between channels and bus
Between channels and ground
Typical
Module
Channel type
Number of channels
Ranges
4
10 V
Maximum conversion
value
010 V 15 V
020
mA
0...30
420
mA
V
mA
11.25
Resolution
Filtering
Precision of internal conversion resistor
Read cycle time
Fast
bits
12
Default
Conversion time
Permitted overload on Voltage
the input channels
Current
Measurement
At 25C
tolerance (1)
Maximum at 060C
ms
ms
V
mA
%FS
%FS
14
12
13
12
12
1st order digital filtering by firmware
250 , 0.2% - 25 ppm/C
1 + 1 x no. of channels used
(periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
5 for 4 channels
y1
30
30
0.25
0.35
0.35
0.50
Temperature drift
30 ppm/C
100 ppm/C
Recalibration
Fallback mode (2)
Isolation
Consumption
Voltage
Current
05 V
Non-isolated high-level
outputs
2
10 V 020
420
mA
mA
11.25
0...24 mA
ms
50 ppm/C
Internal
750 c
V
V
1,400 c
1,400 c
Typical
mA
11
y2
11.25
0.25
0.60
0...24
None, factory-calibrated
Default or configurable
10
Description:
page 2/24
2/30
Functions:
pages 2/26
Connections:
page 2/32
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
Analog input modules
Input type
Isolated high-level
inputs
10 V, 0...10 V,
16 bits
0...5 V, 1...5 V, 5 V
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA, 20 mA
Isolated low-level
inputs
No. of
Reference
channels
4 fast
BMX AMI 0410
channels
Weight
kg
0.143
0.135
0.165
Weight
kg
0.144
Output signal
Resolution Connection
No. of
Reference
range
channels
10 V,
16 bits
Via cage clamp,
2 channels BMX AMO 0210
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
screw clamp or
spring-type
removable terminal
block
Signal range
Resolution Connection
No. of
Reference
channels
Via cage clamp,
Mixed I/O, non-isolated 10 V, 0...10 V,
14 bits or
I: 4
BMX AMM 0600
screw clamp or
0...5 V, 1...5 V,
12 bits
channels
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA depending spring-type
Q: 2
on the range removable terminal channels
block
Weight
kg
0.155
20-way removable
terminal blocks
Preformed cordsets
BMX FTW p01S
Type, composition
Length
Reference
Weight
kg
0.093
0.075
0.060
Cage clamp
Screw clamp
Spring-type
3m
5m
0.470
0.700
3m
5m
0.480
0.710
ABE 7CPA410
0.180
ABE 7CPA412
0.180
ABE 7CPA21
0.210
BMX FCA150
BMX FCA300
BMX FCA500
0.320
0.500
0.730
BMX FCA152
BMX FCA302
BMX FCA502
0.330
0.510
0.740
Description:
page 2/24
supplies
Delivers 4 protected isolated
power supplies for 4...20 mA
inputs
Direct connection of 4 inputs
Connection and provision of cold
junction compensation for
thermocouples
Direct connection of 4 inputs
Direct connection of 2 outputs
(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the analog modules.
See page 1/15.
(2) The BMX ART 0814 8-channel module requires two ABE 7CPA412 sub-bases and two
BMX FCApp2 cordsets.
Functions:
pages 2/26
Specifications:
pages 2/28
Connections:
page 2/32
2/31
10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Connections
Connecting with
20-way removable terminal block
20
20
20
20
19
19
19
19
18
18
18
18
17
17
17
17
16
16
16
16
15
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
13
13
13
13
13
15
12
12
12
12
17
11
11
11
11
10
10
10
10
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
14
16
18
19
20
Correspondence of connector(s) 40-pin with the wire colors at the sheath end of
BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets. See table on page 2/33.
3-wire cold-junction
compensation probe
DtC
CJ-
Thermocouple
CJ0
MSMS+
MSEX-
MSEX-
EX+
MS-
EX-
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
MS+
EX+
MS+
EX+
10
2/32
Connections (continued)
Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Cordset color codes
BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets with 40-way connector and flying leads
20 wires
BMX FCW p01S cordset with one sheathed end
with flying leads
Connector
pin No.
B20
N/C
A20
N/C
B19
A19
B18
A18
B17
A17
B16
A16
B15
N/C
A15
N/C
B14
N/C
A14
N/C
B13
N/C
A13
N/C
B12
A12
B11
A11
B10
N/C
A10
N/C
B9
N/C
A9
N/C
B8
N/C
A8
N/C
B7
A7
B6
A6
B5
N/C
A5
N/C
B4
N/C
A4
N/C
B3
N/C
A3
N/C
B2
A2
B1
A1
Color at
sheath end
White/blue
White/amber
Blue/white
Amber/white
White/brown
Brown/white
White/green
Green/white
Red/blue
Blue/red
White/gray
Gray/white
Red/green
Green/red
Red/amber
Amber/red
Red/gray
Gray/red
Red/brown
Brown/red
BMX ART
0414/0814 (A)
Cold-junction
compensation
Cold-junction
compensation
Input - ch. 0
Input + ch. 0
I - generator ch. 0
I + generator ch. 0
Input - ch. 1
Input + ch. 1
I - generator ch. 1
I + generator ch. 1
Input - ch. 2
Input + ch. 2
I - generator ch. 2
I + generator ch. 2
Input - ch. 3
Input + ch. 3
I - generator ch. 3
I + generator ch. 3
Input - ch. 4
Input + ch. 4
I - generator ch. 4
I + generator ch. 4
Input - ch. 5
Input + ch. 5
I - generator ch. 5
I + generator ch. 5
Input - ch. 6
Input+ ch. 6
I - generator ch. 6
I + generator ch. 6
Input - ch. 7
Input + ch. 7
I - generator ch. 7
I + generator ch. 7
Label
DtC
CJ+
CJ0
CJMSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
MSMS+
EXEX+
BMX FTW 301S/501S preformed cordsets with 20-way terminal block at one and flying leads at the over
Correspondence between terminal block way and colored of
wire
Terminal block
way No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Color at
sheath end
Blue/white
White/blue
Amber/white
White/amber
Green/white
White/green
Brown/white
White/brown
Gray/white
White/gray
Blue/red
Red/blue
Amber/red
Red/amber
Green/red
Red/green
Red/brown
Brown/red
Gray/red
Red/gray
V input ch. 0
Common ch. 0
I input ch. 0
V input ch. 1
Common ch. 1
I input ch. 1
V input ch. 2
Common ch. 2
I input ch. 2
V input ch. 3
Common ch. 3
I input ch. 3
Output ch. 0
Common ch. 0
Output ch. 1
Common ch. 1
V input ch. 0
I input ch. 0
Common ch. 0
V input ch. 1
I input ch. 1
Common ch. 1
V input ch. 2
I input ch. 2
Common ch. 2
V input ch. 3
I input ch. 3
Common ch. 3
Output ch. 0
Common ch. 0
Output ch. 1
Common ch. 1
2/33
10
10
Advantys, Altistart, Altivar, Concept, ConneXium, FactoryCast, Fipio, Fipway, Lexium, Magelis, M340, Modbus, Modbus Plus,
Modicon, Momentum, OSItrack, Phaseo, PowerSuite, Premium, Preventa, ProWORX 32, Quantum, Schneider Electric, Telefast,
TeSys, Transparent Ready, TSX Micro, Twido, TwidoSoft, TwidoSuite, Unity, Unity Pro, Vijeo Designer, Vijeo Look X-Way are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
1/0
2
Contents chapter 1
b Processor modules
v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4
v Memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
v Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/9
b Single-rack configuration
v
v
v
v
Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/14
1/14
1/15
1/15
b Multi-rack configuration
v Introduction, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/16
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/17
10
1/1
Selection guide
Modicon M340
automation platform
Modicon M340 processors
Racks
2 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
24
4 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48
Inputs/Outputs
Number of racks
Max. number of slots
(excluding power supply module)
In-rack discrete I/O (1)
In-rack analog I/O (1)
Distributed I/O
4
In-rack
application-specific
channels
512 channels
1024 channels
(modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
(modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
128 channels
256 channels
(modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels)
(modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels)
Limited depending on the type of medium: Over Ethernet Modbus/TCP network via network
module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function), over Modbus link (32 devices)
20
36
BMX EHC 0200, 60 kHz 2 channels or BMX EHC 0800, 10 kHz 8 channels modules
BMX MSP 0200, 200 kHz 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output module
for servo drives
5
Process control, programmable
loops
Integrated
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
communication ports
CANopen Master machine and
installation bus
Serial link
USB port
Communication
modules
Internal memory
capacity
2,048 Kb
1,792 Kb
128 Kb
1
1
32
64
No. of K instructions
executed per ms
5.4 K instructions/ms
4.2 K instructions/ms
8.1 K instructions/ms
6.4 K instructions/ms
10
100% Boolean
65% Boolean + 35% fixed arithmetic
4,096 Kb
3,584 Kb
256 Kb
8 Mb as standard
(2)
8 or 128 Mo (depending optional card
BMX RMS pp8MPF)
Page
1/9
(1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and counter channels and the number of networks are not cumulative (they are limited by the
max. number of slots in the configuration, 2 racks: 23, 3 racks: 35 and 4 racks: 47.
(2) User web pages with FactoryCast module BMX NOE 0110 (12 Mb) available.
(3) 5 Modicon M340 Packs references (pre-assembled configuration) with BMP P34 1000 66-processor are also available. See page 1/19.
1/2
1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48
36
BMX EHC 0200, 60 kHz 2 channels or BMX EHC 0800, 10 kHz 8 channels modules
BMX MSP 0200, 200 kHz 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output module for servo drives
MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (control of
drives or servo drives on the CANopen bus)
Process control EFB library
1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR client, E-mail notification, class B10 standard web server)
4,096 Kb
3,584 Kb
256 Kb
8 Mb as standard
(2)
10
1/9
1/3
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction
Processor modules
Introduction
This memory card can be replaced with an optional memory card (ordered
separately), that supports:
v Backing up the application and activating the standard web server
v An 8 or 128 Mb storage area for additional data organized in a file system
(directories and sub-directories)
The function block software libraries provide Modicon M340 processors with the
processing capability required to meet the needs of special applications in the
following areas:
b Process control via programmable control loops (EF and EFB libraries)
b Motion control with multiple independent axis functions (MFB) library. The axes
are controlled by Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives or Lexium 05/15 servo drives
connected over the CANopen machine and installation bus.
10
Description:
page 1/5
1/4
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Description
Processor modules
1
2
3
4
5
BMX P34 1000
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
BMX P34 2020
1
2
3
4
5
The USB terminal port 3 with a data rate of 12 Mbit/s is compatible with the
Unity Pro programming software and the OPC Factory Server (OFS).
BMX P34 p0p0 processors can be connected to a USB bus comprised of several
peripheral devices, however:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus.
b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer).
1/5
10
Memory structure
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processor modules
Memory structure
BMX P34 1000/20p0 processor with memory card supplied as standard
Application
internal RAM
User
internal RAM
Located data
Unlocated data
Program, symbols,
and comments
Constants
Constants
22
33
System data
4
Web services
This data area is backed up automatically when the PLC is turned off by duplicating
its contents in a 256 Kbyte non-volatile internal memory integrated in the processor.
It is also possible to back up this memory at any time with a user program.
2 Program, symbols and comments area: For program, this area contains the
executable binary code and IEC source code.
3 Constants area: This area supports the constant located data (%KWi).
4 Area for online program modification, see page 1/7.
The user can choose to transfer the source data to the executable program in the
PLC. The fact of having the program source in the PLC means that, when an empty
programming terminal is connected to the PLC, the elements needed to debug or
upgrade this application can be restored to the terminal. Comments and animation
tables can be excluded from the data embedded in the PLC.
Memory card
Modicon M340 processors are supplied as standard with an SD (Secure Digital) type
Flash memory card. This memory card is intended for backing up the program,
symbols, and comments area 2 and the constants area 3.
22, 33 Duplication areas: Duplication and retrieval (on return of power) operations
are managed automatically by the system and are therefore transparent to the
user.
6 Area for standard Web services: For BMX P34 2020/2030 processors with
integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port, this area of 2 Mb is dedicated to standard
Web services (Transparent Ready Class B10). See page 3/4.
Formatted by Schneider Electric and supplied with each processor, this card is
referenced as a replacement part BMX RMS 008MP.
10
(1) For different memory area sizes, see Specifications, on page 1/8.
Description:
page 1/5
1/6
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Processor modules
User
Application
internal RAM internal RAM
Located data
Unlocated data
Program, symbols
and comments
Program, symbols
and comments
22
Constants
Constants
33
System data
Area for online program
modification
4
Web services
File storage
4
BMX RMS 008/128MPF optional memory card
Instead of the BMX RMS 008MP memory card, the BMX RMS 008/128MPF memory
card can be slotted in BMX P34 2000/2010/2020/2030 processors.
With the four above mentioned processors, this card also offers (in addition to the
features of the BMX RMS 008MP card supplied as standard described on page 1/6):
5 File storage area: This area of max. 8 Mb max. (with BMX RMS 008MPF card) or
128 Mb max. (with BMX RMS 128MPF card) allows:
- Via FTP, hosting any user-defined Word, Excel, PowerPoint or Acrobat
Reader document (for example, maintenance manuals, wiring diagrams, etc)
- Via EFBs user function blocks storage of the additionnal data (for example,
production data, manufacturing recipes, etc)
The Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with
managing the structure and memory space occupation of the Modicon M340
automation platform.
As with Modicon Premium and Quantum platforms with Unity Pro software, the
online program modification function is available on the Modicon M340 automation
platform. The option of adding or modifying the program code and data in different
places in the application in a single modification session helps to ensure that the
modification is homogenous and consistent with the controlled process.
The applications internal RAM area 4 authorizes these program modification or
addition sessions while observing the recommendation to structure the application
program in several, reasonably-sized sections.
10
Description:
page 1/5
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
1/7
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Processor modules
The Modicon M340 Micro-PLC is designed to conform with the main national and international standards relating to electronic devices for
industrial control systems. See Standards, certifications and environmental conditions on pages 6/2 to 6/5.
Functions
Standard
BMX P34 1000
2
24
No. of racks
4, 6, 8 or 12 slots
Max. number of slots for processor and
modules (excluding power supply module)
Max. no. (1)
Discrete I/O
Analog I/O
Control channels
Application- Number
specific
Type
channels
Motion control
Integrated
connections
Ethernet Modbus/
TCP
CANopen master bus
Serial link
USB port
Communication Ethernet Modbus/TCP
module
10/100 Mbit/s
Real-time clock RTC
Internal user
RAM
Total capacity
Program, constants and symbols
Data
Memory card
Supplied as standard
(reference BMX RMS 008MP)
Application
structure
No. of
Instructions
executed per
ms
System
overhead
10
On
floating points
100% Boolean
% MF
512
1,024
128
256
Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library)
20
36
Counter modules 2 channels (60 kHz) or 8 channels (10 kHz)
Motion control module 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output for servo drives
Serial link integrated in processor (except BMX P34 2030 model)
Module 2 channels with PTO outputs Pulse Train Output for servo drives
1 (9-way SUB-D)
1 (9-way SUB-D)
1 RJ45 port, Modbus master/slave RTU/ASCII or character mode
bits
bits
Bytes
Bytes
Kb
s
s
s
s
Kinst/
ms
Kinst/
ms
ms
ms
32 (including 2
64 (including 2 with priority)
with priority)
0.18
0.12
0.38
0.25
0.26
0.17
1.74
1.16
5.4
8.1
4.2
6.4
1.05
0.20
0.70
0.13
Power
With 24 V c voltage
mA
72
72
90
consumption
(1) Only affects in-rack modules. The remote I/O on the CANopen bus is not included in these maximum numbers.
(2) Deduct the size of the located data (internal bits and data) and the configuration data from this value.
(3) BMX RMS 008MFP has the ability to use up to 14 Mb if the operating system update via OS-Loader software is not used.
1/8
To be ordered separately
(BMX RMS 008MPF or
BMX RMS 008MPF reference)
Kb
Kb
Kb
Performance
BMX P34 2000
4
48
95
135
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Processor modules
I/O capacity
Memory
capacity
Reference
(3)
Weight
kg
2,048 Kb
integrated
0.200
4,096 Kb
integrated
2 Ethernet Modbus/
TCP networks
0.200
0.210
0.205
0.215
Processor compatibility
Capacity
Reference
8 Mb / 8 Mb files
8 Mb / 128 Mb files
Memory cards
Description
Flash memory cards (1)
Weight
kg
0.002
0.002
Separate parts
Description
Terminal port/USB
cordsets
Use
From
Mini B USB port
on the Modicon
M340 processor
Length
To USB port type A
PC terminal
1.8 m
Magelis XBT GT/GK 4.5 m
and XBT GTW
graphic terminal
Reference
BMX XCA USB H018
BMX XCA USB H045
Weight
kg
0.065
0.110
Replacement parts
Description
BMX P34 2020
Use
Supplied as standard with each
processor that is used for:
- Backing up program, constants,
symbol and data
- Activating class B10 web server
Processor
compatibility
BMX P34 1000 / 20p0
Reference
BMX RMS 008MP
Weight
kg
0.002
(1) As replacement for the memory card supplied as standard with each processor that is used for:
- Backing up program, constants, symbol and data
- File storage
- Activating class B10 web server
10
BMX XCA USB H0pp
Description:
page 1/5
Specifications:
page 1/8
References:
page 1/9
Dimensions:
page 1/15
1/9
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules provide the power supply for each
BMX XBP pp00 rack and the modules installed on it.
Description
The power supply module is selected according to:
v The electrical line supply: 24 V c, 48 V c or 100...240 V a
v The required power (see the power consumption table on page 6/13) (1)
3
1
4
2
3
BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules have the following on the front panel :
1 A display block comprised of:
- OK LED (green), lit if rack voltages are present and correct
- 24 V LED (green), lit when the sensor voltage is present (for
BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules only)
2 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the application
3 A 2-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type)
for connecting the alarm relay
4 A 5-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type)
for connecting the following:
- c or a line supply
- protective earth ground
- dedicated 24 V c power supply for the input sensors (for BMX CPS 2000/3500
AC power supply modules only)
Included in the power supply modules: Set of two cage clamp removable terminal
blocks (5-way and 2-way) BMX XTS CPS10.
To be ordered separately (if necessary): Set of two spring-type removable terminal
blocks (5-way and 2-way) BMX XTS CPS20
6
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) This power consumption calculation for the rack can also be performed by the Unity Pro
programming software.
10
1/10
Modicon M340
automation platform
Functions
Functions
Alarm relay
The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact
accessible from the front of the 2-way connector.
The operating principle is as follows:
In normal operation, with the PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact
is closed (state 1).
The relay de-energizes and its associated contact opens (state 0) whenever the
application stops, even partially, due to any of the following:
b Occurrence of a detected blocking fault
b Incorrect rack output voltages
b Loss of supply voltage
RESET push-button
The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel;
when activated, this triggers an initialization sequence for the processor and the rack
modules it supplies.
Pressing this pushbutton triggers a sequence of service signals that is the same as:
b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed
b A power-up when the pushbutton is released
In terms of the application, these operations represent a cold start (forcing the I/O
modules to state 0 and initializing the processor).
The power available on this 24 V c voltage depends on the power supply model
(0.45 or 0.9 A) (see Specifications on page 1/12).
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
Description:
page 1/10
Specifications:
page 1/12
References:
page 1/13
1/11
Modicon M340
automation platform
Specifications
Specifications
Nominal
Limit (ripple included)
Input nominal I rms
Current
Initial power-up
at 25C
(1)
Micro-break duration
Integrated protection
Secondary
I inrush
I2t on activation
It on activation
Line (accepted)
Useful power
3.3 V c voltage
(2)
Max.
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Typical power
24 V rack c voltage
Nominal voltage
(3)
Nominal current
Typical power
Integrated protection on the voltages (4)
Max. dissipated power
Max. length of Copper wires with 1.5 mm2 cross-section
power supply Copper wires with 2.5 mm2 cross-section
cable
Insulation
Dielectric strength
Primary/secondary
and primary/ground
Insulation resistance Primary/secondary
and primary/ground
a Power supply module
Primary
Voltages
Nominal
Limit (ripple included)
Frequencies
Nominal/limit
Power
Apparent
Current
Input nominal I rms
Initial power-up
at 25C
I inrush
(1)
I2t on activation
It on activation
Micro-break duration
Line (accepted)
Integrated protection
Secondary
Useful power
Max. overall
Max. on 3.3 V c and
24 V c rack output
voltages
3.3 V c voltage
Nominal voltage
(2)
Nominal current
Power (typical)
24 V rack c voltage
Nominal voltage
(3)
Nominal current
Typical power
24 V c sensor voltage Nominal voltage
(4)
Nominal current
Typical power
Integrated protection on the voltages (5)
Maximum dissipated power
Insulation
Dielectric strength
Primary/secondary
(24 V/3.3 V)
Primary/secondary
(sensor 24 V)
Primary/ground
24 V sensor
output/ground
Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and
primary/ground
V
V
A
V
A
A 2s
As
ms
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
W
m
m
16.8
31.2
3.3
2.5
4.5
8.3
15
24 c
0.7
1.3
16.8
31.2
Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
8.5
20
10
30
15
V rms
10
V
V
Hz
VA
A rms
V
A
A 2s
As
ms
W
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
V
A
W
120
1.04 at 115 V a; 0.52 at 240 V a
120 a
240 a
30
60
1
3
0.05
0.07
36
31.2
W
V rms
3.3
2.5
4.5
8.3
15
24 c
0.7
1.3
16.8
31.2
24 c
0.45
0.9
10.8
21.6
Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
8.5
1500
V rms
2300
V rms
V rms
1500
500
100
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and
when sizing protection devices.
(2) 3.3 V c voltage for the I/O module logic power supply
(3) 24 V c rack voltage for the I/O module power supply and the processor
(4) 24 V c sensors output for the sensor power supply
(5) Protected by fuse
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
1/12
Description:
page 1/10
Functions:
page 1/11
References:
page 1/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
Each BMX XBP pp00 rack must be equipped with a power supply module. These
modules are inserted in the first two slots of each rack (marked CPS).
The power required to supply each rack depends on the type and number of modules
installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table
rack by rack to determine the BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module most suitable
for each rack (see page 6/13).
Power supply modules (1)
Line supply
24 V c
isolated
24...48 V c
isolated
100...240 V a
24 V
Total
sensor c
(4)
16.8 W
Reference
Weight
kg
0,290
15 W
31.2 W
31.2 W
0,340
8.3 W
15 W
16.8 W
31.2 W
10.8 W
21.6 W
20 W
36 W
0.300
0.360
Separate parts
Description
Set of 2
removable
connectors
Composition
Type
Reference
Spring-type
Weight
kg
0.015
5
Replacement parts
Description
Set of 2
removable
connectors
Composition
Type
Reference
Cage clamp
Weight
kg
0.020
(1) Includes the set of 2 cage clamp removable connectors BMX XTS CPS10.
(2) The sum of the absorbed power on each voltage (3.3 V c and 24 V c) should not exceed
the total power of the module. See the Power consumption table on page 6/13.
(3) 3.3 V c and 24 V rack c voltages for powering Modicon M340 PLC modules
(4) 24 V sensor c voltage for powering the input sensors (voltage available via the 2-way
removable connector on the front panel)
10
Introduction:
page 1/10
Description:
page 1/10
Functions:
page 1/11
Specifications:
page 1/12
1/13
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description,
function
Single-rack configuration
Introduction
BMX XBP pp00 racks are the basic element of the Modicon M340 automation
platform in a single-rack and muli-rack configurations.
These racks perform the following functions:
b Mechanical function: They are used to install all the modules in a PLC station
(power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analog and application-specific I/O). These
racks can be mounted on a panel, plate or DIN rail:
v Inside enclosures
v On machine frames, etc.
b Electrical function: The racks incorporate a Bus X (owner bus). They are used to:
v Distribute the power supplies required for each module in the same rack
v Distribute data and service signals for the entire PLC station
v Hot swap modules during operation
Description
3
2
BMX XBP pp00 racks are available in 4, 6, 8 or 12-slot versions, and comprise:
1 A metal frame that performs the following functions:
v Holds the Bus X electronic card and protects it against EMI and ESD type
interference
v Holds the modules
v Gives the rack mechanical rigidity
2 A ground terminal for grounding the rack
3 4 holes for mounting the rack on a frame. These holes are big enough for M6
screws.
4 2 mounting points for the shielding connection bar
5 Tapped holes to take each module locking screw
6 A connector for an expansion module, marked XBE.
7 40-way female DIN connectors forming the electrical connection between the
rack and each module, marked CPS, 0011 (when the rack is delivered, each
connectors are protected by covers that should be removed before inserting the
modules).
8 Slots for anchoring the module pins.
To be ordered separately:
BMX XSP pp00 cable shielding connection kit, used to protect against electrostatic
discharge when connecting the shielding of cordsets for connecting:
v Analog, counter and motion control modules,
v A Magelis XBT operator interface to the processor (via BMX XCA USBH0pp
shielded USB cable)
10
The cable shielding connection kit BMX XSP pp00 is comprised of:
9 A metal bar that takes the clamping rings
10 Two sub-bases to be mounted on the rack
11 Not included on the shielding connection kit spring clamping rings STB XSP 30p0
(sold in packs of 10, 1.56 mm2 or 511 mm2).
11
Function
Addressing modules in a single-rack configuration (1)
Each rack must contain a power supply module and a processor module.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
XBE
CPS
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) Multi-rack configuration with extension rack module BMX XBE 1000 (slot XBE).
See page 1/16.
10
1/14
Modicon M340
automation platform
References,
dimensions,
mounting
Single-rack configuration
Racks
Description
Racks
BMX XBP 0400
Type of module
No. of slots
to be inserted
(1)
BMX CPS power supply, 4
BMX P34 processor, I/O 6
modules and
8
application-specific
modules (counter, motion 12
control and
communication)
Reference
Weight
kg
0.630
0.790
0.950
1.270
Unit reference
Weight
kg
0.280
0.310
0.340
0.400
0.050
0.070
0.005
Accessories
BMX XBP 0800
Description
Shielding connection
kits comprised of:
- a metal bar
- two sub-bases
(1) Number of slots taking the processor module, I/O modules and application-specific modules
(excluding power supply module).
Dimensions, mounting
BMX XBP
Common side view
150 (2)
140 (1)
Front view
BMX XBP 0600
307.6
372.8
503.2
100
Rail (1)
a
242.4
150 (1)
160 (2)
AF1-EA6
Installation rules
16
4 holes (2)
60
100
u 80
(2)
e
23,4
(1)
u 60
b
a
11,2
24
19
(2)
(2)
b
207.8
273
338.2
468.6
eu
u 60
a
242.4
307.6
372.8
503.2
u 60
u 80
(2)
(2)
10
3 mm
1/15
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Multi-rack configuration
Bus X
The racks distributed on bus X are connected to each other via 3 bus X extension
cordsets whose total length is 30 m maximum.
The racks are connected to each other using BMX XBC pp0K (1) bus X extension
cordsets that are connected to one of the 7 and 8 two 9-way SUB-D connectors on
each 2 BMX XBE 1000 extension rack module.
3
1
Line terminators 4
The two BMX XBE 1000 extension rack modules located at the ends of the line must
have a TSX TLY EX line terminator 4 fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type
connector.
Note: The processor module is always positioned in the rack address 0. However on a bus X
chaining, the order of racks does not affect the operation. For example, the chaining order can be
0-1-2-3, 2-0-3-1, 3-1-2-0, and so on.
Description
5
5
6
6
8
The BMX XBE 1000 extension rack module has the following on the front panel:
5 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot XBE.
6 A display block comprised of 5 LEDs:
b RUN LED (green): module in operation,
b COL LED (red): each rack has the same address or the rack address 0 is not
equipped of BMX P34 ppp0 processor module,
b 0, 1, 2 and 3 LEDs (green): 0, 1, 2 or 3 rack address.
7 A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked bus X for to connect a 3 bus X cordset
from the previous rack or, if the first rack, for line ternination A/ included in the 4
TSX TLY EX lot.
8 A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked bus X for to connect a 3 bus X cordset
to next rack or, if the last rack, for line ternination /B included in the 4 TSX TLY EX
lot.
On the right side
Access to 3 micro-switches for defining the rack address: 03.
8
__________________________________________________________________
(1) BMX XBC pp0K daisy chaining cordsets length 0.8 m, 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m or 12 m with angled
connectors or TSX CBY p08K length 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 12 m, 18 m or 28 m with straight
connectors
10
1/16
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
Multi-rack configuration
Extension rack
Description
Use
Reference
Extension rack
module for
Modicon M340
Standard module for each rack (XBE slot), allows the connection
of extension racks:
- 2 max. with BMX P34 1000 processor module
- 4 max. with BMX P34 20p0 processor module
Weight
kg
0.178
0.700
Use
Composition
2 x 9-way SUB-D 9
Between
BMX XBE 1000 connectors
extension rack
modules
Type of
Length
connector
Bent
0,8 m
1,5 m
3m
5m
12 m
Reference
BMX XBC 008K
BMX XBC 015K
BMX XBC 030K
BMX XBC 050K
BMX XBC 120K
Weight
kg
0.165
0.250
0.420
0.650
1.440
Straight
1m
3m
5m
12 m
18 m
28 m
0.160
0.260
0.360
1.260
1.860
2.860
100 m
12.320
Sold in
lots of
2
Reference
5
Cable on reel
Description
TSX TLY EX
Length to be
fitted with
TSX CBY K9
connectors
Use
Composition
Line terminators
Compulsory
2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors
on the
labelled A/ and /B
BMX XBP ppp0
end daisy
chaining
Bus X straight
connectors
For
2 x 9-way straight SUB-D connectors 2
TSX CBY 1000
cable ends
Installation of
connectors
Mounting for
TSX CBY K9
connectors
2 crimping pliers,
1 pen
(1)
TSX TLY EX
Weight
kg
0.050
TSX CBY K9
0.080
7
TSX CBY ACC 10
8
(1) Installation of connectors on the cable also required .
10
Introduction:
page 1/16
Description:
page 1/16
1/17
Modicon M340
automation platform
Introduction,
description
Introduction
The Modicon M340 packs offer is designed to provide compact solutions with
optimized cost.
These 5 pre-assembled packs, built around the BMX P34 1000 Standard processor,
include one non-extendable rack (4 or 6 slots) with an AC or DC power supply
module and discrete I/O modules.
Note: The BMX FTB 2000 20-way removable terminals blocks of discrete I/O modules are
included but delivered in separate packaging.
Description
Modicon M340 packs with a 100240 V power supply (terminal blocks)
4
1
6
BMX PDM 48200
6
1
10
References:
page 1/19
1/18
Modicon M340
automation platform
References
References
These pre-assembled packs are comprised of:
b One non-extendable rack 4 or 6 slots (except power supply module).
b One BMX CPS 2000 AC power supply or BMX CPS 2010 DC power supply with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors.
b One BMX P34 1000 processor module with Modbus serial link and USB port for a programming
terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW advanced panel).
Depending on model:
b The discrete I/O modules with cage clamp 20-way terminal blocks or 40-way connectors.
b 0, 1 or 2 free slot(s).
No. free
slots
Connection
3 x BMX FTB 2000 0
cage clamp terminal
blocks
Reference
Weight
kg
2.600
2.900
No. free
slots
Connection
3 x BMX FTB 2000 0
cage clamp terminal
blocks
Reference
2.900
2.200
Weight
kg
2,600
(1) Preformed cordsets with 40-way connectors (and flying leads or HE10 connectors) BMX FCW/FCC pp3 preformed
cordsets with one connector 40-way.
10
Introduction:
page 1/18
Description:
page 1/18
1/19
__________________________________________Overview
________________________________Operation Description
Channel A
Channel B
MOS-1P
NC Klixon (thermal)
MOS-1PE
NC Klixon (thermal)
MOS-1PR
NC Klixon (thermal)
MSS-2P
MSS-2PE
MSS-2PR
MTT-2P
Thermistor
DIN44082/01D463
(thermal)
Thermistor
DIN44082/01D463
(thermal)
MRS-1P
The MOS Series combines detection circuits for both motor and MRS-1PE NC seal chamber float switch Pt100 RTC (thermal)
(seal-fail)
bearing over-temperature and seal-failure in a single plug-in unit.
In an alert condition, the appropriate LED is illuminated and relay MRR-2P
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
contacts associated with the condition toggle. Thus a load, such as
Thermistor
the motor contactor, may be turned off, or a warning light might be MRT-1P
DIN44082/01D463
Pt100 RTC (thermal)
turned on. Upon occurrence of the first alarm condition, the
(thermal)
proper LED will illuminate a steady alarm indication. If the alarm is
cleared automatically, the LED will then begin to flash, so that the
operator will know that one or more alarm occurrences has been ________________________Common Features (All Models)
detected, and automatically cleared.
Auto/Manual Reset: Channels that monitor temperature can
A low voltage supply provides power to the over-temperature and
be set for Manual or Auto reset after experiencing an alarm
seal-failure monitoring circuits which control relay outputs based
condition. (Seal failures automatically reset when the alarm
on instructions contained in a microprocessor. The microprocessor
condition is removed although the LED continues to flash until
circuitry includes power-on-reset and oscillator start-up timers as
reset.)
well as an independent watchdog timer to ensure reliable
Reset Push-button: The reset button is used to reset all alarm
operation. Both hardware and software filtering is implemented on
conditions and clear flashing LED states.
the sensor inputs for reliable signal integrity in noisy environments.
Test Push-button: The test button simulates an alarm condition
A Test push button simulates faults on both sensor channels, and a
in both channels until released. NOTE: In many cases this will
Reset push button clears the alert indicators after (1) The Test push
cause the pump to stop because of the simulated high
button has been depressed, or (2) an actual alert has been
temperature condition.
corrected.
The Reset push button performs a "hard"
microprocessor reset.
To prevent dislodgement of the module it is designed to be
mounted in an industrial type 12-pin socket with hold down clip.
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
2.42"
2.11"
0.98"
1.77"
Relay Contact
Rating
Sensor Voltage Varies with resistance. Not to exceed 10 VDC2%
LED States
GREEN:
no fault
(Both Channels) RED:
thermal fault
AMBER:
seal-fail fault
FLASHING: fault automatically cleared
Contact States N.O. contact closes on fault condition or on loss of supply
power.
MTT-2P
MRS-1P
MRS-1PE
MRR-2P
MRT-1P
R < 120k
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
Float switch
opens
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
R < 26k or
R > 40k
(seal-fail)
45 sec. or
3 15-sec. events
in 24 hours
R > 4k
130C nom.
(thermal)
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
R > 150
130 C nom.
(thermal)
7 sec. event
10
2.20"
0.18"
1
2.66"
____________________________________Electrical Wiring
CHANNEL A CHANNEL B
INPUTS
12-PIN SOCKET
7
7 sec. event
CHANNEL B
OUTPUTS
10
11
12
N.O.
MSS-2PR
7 sec. event
11
COM
MSS-2PE
Klixon open
(thermal)
12
N.C.
MSS-2P
7 sec. event
MOS-1PR
0.90"
1.68"
Klixon open
(thermal)
COM
MOS-1PE
Channel B
Fault
Timing
Klixon open
7 sec. event
(thermal)
24-240
VAC
MOS-1P
Channel A
Fault
Timing
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 26k or
45 sec. or
R > 40k
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R < 26k or
45 sec. or
R > 40k
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R > 4k
7 second event
130C nom.
(thermal)
R < 120k
45 sec. or
(seal-fail)
3 15-sec.
events in 24
hours
Float switch
45 sec. or
opens
3 15-sec.
(seal-fail)
events in 24
hours
R > 150
7 sec. event
130 C nom.
(thermal)
R > 4k
7 second event
130C nom.
(thermal)
2.86"
N.C.
Model
0.12"
N.O.
Measurement
Principle
Environment
Supply Voltage
Power
Consumption
CHANNEL A
7 sec. event
NOTE: Timing values are nominal. Hardware and digital filtering will affect
absolute response times by as much as 3 seconds total.
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
must ensure that either the remote device is guaranteed to stay within
the allowed ground potential range or an isolated RS-485 repeater must
be installed. Devices are commercially available. In all cases, proper
care should be taken to avoid grounding conflicts and ground loops.
__________________________________Broadcasting Operation
Each second the MOS sends a single ASCII string out the RS-485 bus.
During transmission the Green Power On LED on the MOS will
__________________________________________Revision Level momentarily blink OFF. This is a visual indication the unit is
This document applies to MOS firmware revisions 1.14 and higher.
broadcasting.
RS-485 requires three wires -- RS485+, RS485-, and Ground. The MOS
uses an RJ-11, six-wire connection to bring these signals out.
Illustration 1 shows the connections from the cable perspective.
RS-485 (+)
RS-485 Common
Not Connected
Not Connected
RS-485 Common
RS-485 (-)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Field
Summary Description
FR
CF
A0
A1
SF
F0
F1
RL
RH
The MOS references its internal ground signal to pins #2 and #4 on the
relay base. It is recommended that either pin #2 or pin #4 be referenced
to chassis or panel ground. NOTE: In the case of a one-wire moisture
probe, pin #4 is typically connected to panel ground. In isolated twowire sensor configurations, either pin #2 or pin #4 should be connected
to panel ground. Devices on the RS-485 bus must reference this same
panel ground or be guaranteed to stay within a maximum of 7 volts of
panel ground for proper operation. Ground voltages outside of this
range will produce unpredictable results and may result in hardware
damage.
In practice, all devices on the RS-485 bus should connect their zero volt
potential to the panel ground. In this case only pins #1 and #6 on the
RJ-11 connector are required. If a device is floating on the bus, then pins
#2 and #5 may be used to pull that device to the panel ground. These
pins are common with the MOS internal ground signal.
Multi-Tech Solutions, Inc.
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
Description
12
13
Conway
Arkansas 72032
Tel 501-336-8500
Fax 501-336-9225
MICROLARM AN-3196B
LED ANNUNCIATOR
OPERATING & SERVICE
MANUAL
ROCHESTER
APPROVED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOC-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-1
. 1-1
. 1-3
. 1-3
. 1-6
. 1-8
. 1-8
1-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-5
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TOC-1
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
A
B
C
D
E
F
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
3-1
4-1
7-1
7-2
7-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-4
. 1-5
. 1-6
. 1-9
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-14
. 2-7
. 3-1
. 4-2
. 7-3
. 7-4
. 7-6
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1
Table 5-1
TOC-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The Rochester Instrument Systems, Model AN-3196B MicroLarm
Annunciator is a self-contained, LED annunciating system for monitoring and
indicating the conditions of up to twelve inputs. The unit is multimicrocomputer based and is designed to provide long term, efficient
operation.
This manual gives detailed information on installation, operation, and
maintenance of the system. We recommend that everyone involved with
installation or maintenance of this equipment read and be familiar with the
entire manual. Operating personnel should read and be familiar with at least
"Section 3 - Controls & Operation".
The sections of this manual which deal with modifications and
maintenance assume a basic knowledge of servicing electronic equipment.
The installation section also assumes a basic knowledge of mechanical and
electrical maintenance skills.
Each Annunciator can be custom configured for a specific application.
"Appendix F" contains the Engineering Drawings for this specific
Annunciator. "Appendix A" shows the ISA Sequence Charts which are
pertinent to this equipment. "Appendix B" shows the MicroLarm Order
Code Specifications and "Appendix C" gives Spare Parts Information.
"Appendix E" gives information of parts returns and warranties. "Appendix
D" gives specific information pertinent to working with equipment which can
be damaged by Electrostatic Discharge.
Rochester Instrument Systems fully supports its systems with in-house
customer service and field service staffs. In addition, for a fee, Rochester
Instrument Systems can provide training programs for your personnel, startup assistance, and additional instruction manuals. Contact the factory for
further information.
TOC-3
TOC-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
C A U T I O N
ELECTRONIC DEVICES CAN BE DAMAGED IF DROPPED
OR IMPACTED. HANDLE WITH CARE.
1.1
RECEIPT
Inspect the shipment when the unit is first received. Check for any
opened or damaged containers. Check the shipment against the Packing
List or Bill of Lading and verify that the shipment includes all containers listed.
NOTE
REPORT ANY SHIPPING DAMAGES OR SHORTAGES
TO THE CARRIER AT THE TIME OF RECEIPT
.
Open each container and check the contents against its respective Packing
List. Inspect each of the components. Look for scratches or dents, loose or
dangling parts, or other obvious damage.
Each annunciator comes assembled as a unit. There are two modules
inside each unit, attached to the front faceplate. Make sure the faceplate
assembly is securely seated in the annunciator enclosure and the knurled
screw toward the bottom of the faceplate is tight. Check the Lamacoid
legend plates, used to label each LED, to make sure they are as specified by
1-1
If you anticipate the need to return any or all of the components, save all
packing materials for re-shipment. Refer to the "Procedures for Factory Repair
and Return" in "Appendix E - Repairs and Warranty" for proper procedures
and addresses for returning goods.
1-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
1.2
MOUNTING
W A R N I N G
THE BACK OF THE ANNUNCIATOR ASSEMBLY HAS
MANY EXPOSED ELECTRICAL CONTACTS. WHEN
CHOOSING A MOUNTING LOCATION FOR THIS UNIT,
MAKE SURE THESE CONTACTS WILL NOT TOUCH
OTHER ITEMS AND THAT NO ONE WILL BE ABLE TO
ACCIDENTALLY TOUCH THESE CONTACTS WHEN THE
UNIT IS IN SERVICE.
1-3
1-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
To mount the unit, first mark the cutout dimensions on the panel where
the annunciator is to be mounted. (Refer to Figure 1.2 for specific dimensions.)
Be sure to allow enough room around the cutout for the front mounting bezel to
miss any other components on the panel. Cut out the panel material.
The annunciator is shipped with the panel clamps mounted to the unit.
Remove these panel clamps from the annunciator and position the unit in the
cutout. From the rear of the unit, place the panel clamps into the notches at the
top and bottom of the annunciator. Finger tighten both clamps until the unit is
secured in the panel. Use a screwdriver to finish securing the unit.
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
Insert the screws through the holes in the mounting brackets and fasten
securely to the wall. Remove the panel clamps from the annunciator and
position the unit in the opening in the enclosure. From the rear of the unit, place
the panel clamps into the notches at the top and bottom of the annunciator.
Finger tighten both clamps until the unit is secured in the enclosure. Use a
screwdriver to finish securing the unit.
W A R N I N G
ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR THE ANNUNCIATOR
CONNECTS TO THE EXPOSED CONTACTS ON THE BACK
OF THE UNIT.
PROVISION MUST BE MADE FOR
ACCESS TO THESE TERMINALS TO MAKE THE WIRING
CONNECTIONS. HOWEVER, CARE MUST ALSO BE
TAKEN TO ASSURE THAT NO ONE WILL BE ABLE TO
ACCIDENTALLY TOUCH THE CONTACTS WHEN THE
UNIT IS IN SERVICE.
1-7
1.3
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
All electrical wiring to the annunciator connects to the two terminal blocks
on the back of the unit. Field contact connections are made to Terminal Block
TB1 as shown in Figure 1.4. All other connections are made to Terminal Block
TB2 as shown in Figure 1.5. Refer to "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings"
for the specific wiring connection patterns for this annunciator. Also, refer to
"Section 4 - Sequence Control Module" and "Section 5 - Common Services
Module" for additional information on options and settings which can affect the
wiring connections.
This unit requires a proper ground. A factory installed jumper is provided
from the bottom terminal of Terminal Block TB2 to the chassis ground stud
between TB1 and TB2. Check to make sure this jumper is in place and secured.
Connect electrical ground to the chassis ground stud before applying power to
the annunciator.
W A R N I N G
THIS UNIT MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
FAILURE TO PROVIDE AND USE A PROPER GROUND
CONNECTION CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
ANNUNCIATOR.
1-8
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
1-9
The Field Contact Voltage (FCV) is supplied by the six terminals labeled
"VA" through "VF" on Terminal Block TB1. This supply may be 24, 48, or 125
VDC. Refer to Figure 1.5 for identification of the proper supply and return
terminals for each of the field contact points.
Note optional Isolated/AC Input configuration, in which an AC or DC
voltage originating in the field is applied to the input terminals, with the
return side connected to "VF (RET)". As a variation of this, six mutually
isolated groups may be set up, having two inputs and one return terminal
each. Standard voltage levels which may be accepted are 120 VAC or
24, 48, or 125 VDC. See "Section 4 - Sequence Control Module" for
details on input circuit set up and operation.
Connect each of the field contacts to the appropriate terminals on
Terminal Block TB1. Refer to "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" to
determine which device is designed to be monitored by each input point. Verify
that the Legend Plate for each input matches the field contact being connected
to that terminal.
W A R N I N G
IMPROPER LABELING OR CONNECTIONS COULD
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE DEVICES BEING
MONITORED DUE TO INCORRECT RESPONSE.
1-10
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
1.3.2 TERMINAL BLOCK TB2
Terminal Block TB2 is used for all other external connections to the
annunciator. These outputs include Critical and Non-Critical Reflash, Critical
and Non-Critical Alarm Audible, and Ringback Audible. Devices or device inputs
controlled by these outputs connect to Terminals 6 through 15. Terminals 1
through 5 connect to remote push-button switches when these are utilized.
Terminals 16 and 17 connect to the prime supply voltage. Terminal 18 is a
factory ground connection.
Voltage to power external devices or device inputs may be supplied from
an external power source, or from the internal annunciator 24 VDC source. The
internal 24 VDC source is capable of providing 0.15 Amps. and is brought out to
TB2-4 (+24V) and TB2-14 (24V RET) for customer connections. TB2-4 is used
to power external push-button switches. The relay contacts are rated for 5A at
24 VDC/120 VAC, 3A, 240 VAC, or 0.1A at 125 VDC maximum.
1-11
AN-3196B Annunciator
RECEIPT & INSTALLATION
Connect each of the outputs to their proper terminals. Refer to "Appendix F Engineering Drawings" for the correct terminal connections for this
annunciator. Also, see "Section 5 - Common Services Module" for a
complete description of the output options and how they can be altered.
The annunciator is supplied with an integral, membrane switch pad for
push-button switch control. However, there are occasions when it is desirable to
have the push-button switches at a location which is remote from the
annunciator unit. When this is necessary, the remote push-button switches are
connected to the terminals on Terminal Block TB2 as shown in Figure 1.8.
There are five possible supply voltages to the AN-3196B annunciator:
120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VDC, 48 VDC, and 125 VDC. Each annunciator is
designed for a specific prime supply voltage and different internal modifications
must be made for each prime supply voltage. When 24 VDC supply voltage is
used, this supply voltage is used directly within the unit.
When 125 VDC or 48 VDC supply voltage is used, an invertor power
supply produces the proper internal voltage. When 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply
voltage is used, two transformers, connected in parallel or series, provide the
proper internal voltage.
Using a different prime supply voltage will cause damage to the unit. If a
change in prime supply voltages is desired, the annunciator should be returned
to the factory for alterations. Refer to the Customer Order Specifications and
"Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for the design voltage of this unit.
Connect the proper prime supply voltage to Terminals 16 and 17. If the
prime supply voltage is 24, 48, or 125 VDC, make sure the positive side is
connected to Terminal 16. It is also important to note that, when the prime
supply voltage is 24 VDC, only non-isolated 24 VDC is available for the Field
Contact Voltage. For power sources other than 24 VDC, the Field Contact
Voltage is isolated from the prime power and may be either 24 VDC or 125 VDC.
1-13
1-14
AN-3196B Annunciator
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1
GENERAL
b)
c)
2-1
OUTPUTS:
a)
b)
c)
CONTROLS:
a)
b)
2-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2
Inputs are provided to the Sequence Control Module (SCM) in the form of
voltages which are switched on or off in the field, according to the status of the
devices switching them. The SCM monitors and detects changes in the status of
each input by sensing presence or loss of the corresponding voltage. The
microcomputer in the module responds by storing status information in its
memory, sending certain alarm status information to the Common Services
Module by way of the Feedback Bus, and activating the proper LED (Light
Emitting Diode) according to the specified sequence.
Each Annunciator can monitor up to twelve inputs. Switches on the
module allow the user to select each input as having normally open or normally
closed contacts (voltage normally present or absent). Switches also allow the
user to define each input as Critical or Non-Critical.
Each individual input may also be configured to respond as a First-Out
Alarm. If a process has several monitored points, it may be important to know
which point in the process caused the problem, even though several other points
may have subsequently gone into alarm. Configuring each of these points as
First-Out Alarms allows you to know which point went into alarm first. This
First-Out Alarm will have a different display than the other alarmed points.
2-3
2.3
2-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Options are factory set based on the order specifications. Refer to
"Section 5 - Common Services Module" for detailed information on these
options. Refer to the Customer Order Specifications and "Appendix F Engineering Drawings" for details on your system.
The Common Services Module also supplies information to the Sequence
Control Module by way of the Serial Data Bus. This consists of the flash rates,
push-button switch status and the First-Out Blocking Bit. (First-Out Blocking
prevents Subsequent Alarms from displaying in the same manner as the First
Alarm.)
DIP switch assemblies on the Common Services Module select various
options for the Annunciator. These options include Optional Flash Rate,
Automatic Silence, Push-button Switch Interlock, and Pulsed Audible Alarm
options. The selections affect all twelve inputs.
2-5
2.4
SYSTEM BUS
The System Bus is carried between the Common Services Module and
the Sequence Control Module by means of a flat ribbon cable. The bus provides
a unified means of interconnecting the two modules so that synchronization of
related functions may be accomplished. The wire assignments of the bus are
listed in Table 2.1 below:
RESET
+5V
FEEDBACK DATA
SPARE (UNUSED)
LOGIC COMMON
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE SUPPLY
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE RETURN
The two data buses -- Serial Data and Feedback Data -- provide
continuous control and status information throughout the system. They are
logic-level buses. They switch back and forth from a logic low level (near 0V) to
a logic high level (near +5V). Each bus provides a repetitive sequence of data
bits, each of which is essentially a high or low level on the bus, for a specific
period of time. Therefore, an oscilloscope is required to monitor these buses.
2-6
AN-3196B Annunciator
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.4.1 SERIAL DATA BUS
The Serial Data (SERD) output from the Common Services Module is a bit
stream consisting of information to control flash rates, push-button switch status,
First-Out blocking bus, and synchronization of all microcomputers in the
AN-3196B Annunciator. Figure 2.1 gives a schematic representation of the
Serial Data bit stream and its relation to the Feedback line.
The Serial Data Bus is positive logic. A high electrical level (+5V) is a
logic "On" or "1". A low electrical level (0V) is a logic "Off" or "0". Each bit lasts
for 1.6 milliseconds (ms). The entire series repeats every 26 ms.
The first bit is "Frame Sync" and is always "On" (1). The second bit is a
space which is always "Off" (0). Next are the push-button switch bits: Test,
Acknowledge, Silence, Reset, and First-Out Reset. If a push-button switch is
activated, its corresponding bit will be "On" (1). If the push-button switch is not
activated, its corresponding bit will be "Off" (0).
The next bit, after First-Out Reset, is First-Out Blocking. This is a retransmission to the Sequence Control Module's microcomputers of the First-Out
Blocking bit on the Feedback Data bus. This bit is turned on by one of the
microcomputers when an input which is designated as a First-Out input goes into
alarm. It will force all other points set for First-Out sequence into Subsequent
Alarm mode instead of First Alarm mode.
The last two bits are the two Flash Sync bits (Flash 1 and Flash 2). They
are each set by the DIP switch positions on the Common Services Module to be
either a fast or slow flash rate. After a point has gone into alarm, the sequence
selected for that point will put the corresponding LED under control of one of
2-7
these two flash rates. When the corresponding bit is "On", the LED will be on.
When the bit is "Off", the LED will be off.
2-8
AN-3196B Annunciator
CONTROLS & OPERATION
3.1
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
T (TEST):
S (SILENCE):
A (ACKNOWLEDGE):
3-1
R (RESET):
3-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
CONTROLS & OPERATION
3.2
STANDARD OPERATIONS
3-3
3.3
OPTIONAL VARIATIONS
There are several options which can be selected which will affect the
operating procedures for the Visual Annunciator. These options are part of the
ISA sequences which can be chosen from DIP switch assembly S4 on the
Sequence Control Module. (Refer to "Section 4 - Sequence Control Module"
and "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for further details on the specific
switches involved.) The following discussion indicates the changes to the
standard operations caused by these options:
3-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
CONTROLS & OPERATION
3.4
TEST PROCEDURES
Start the system test procedure by pressing the Test push-button switch.
An abnormal process condition is simultaneously simulated on all inputs. All
points will be displayed on alarm. In addition, all points having a First-Out
configuration will be displayed as First Alarms.
Press each of the other push-button switches to complete the test
sequence. Observe the visual displays and audible alarms to determine if there
are any LED or circuit failures.
Hold the Test push-button switch down to cause all audible alarms,
except Ringback, to sound. Only the highest priority alarm will continue to sound
when the Test push-button switch is released. The Ringback audible alarm, if
used, is activated by depression of the Acknowledge push-button switch
following the release of the Test push-button switch.
W A R N I N G
THE TEST SEQUENCE MUST BE MANUALLY COMPLETED
TO ALLOW VISUAL DISPLAY AND AUDIBLE ALARMS
FOR ACTUAL ALARMS. DEPENDING ON THE SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION SELECTED, THE OPERATOR MUST
ACTUATE THE ACKNOWLEDGE AND/OR RESET
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES.
During test sequence operations, Reflash Relay outputs will reflect only
actual alarm conditions. If an actual alarm occurs during the test sequence, the
display, audible alarm and First-Out order information is stored. As soon as the
test sequence is completed, the alarm condition will be initiated, even if the input
has returned to normal in the mean time. However, the Reflash signal for the
actual alarm will respond immediately, since it is not affected by the test
sequence operations.
3-5
AN-3196B Annunciator
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
W A R N I N G
STATIC ELECTRICITY IS ALWAYS PRESENT ON YOUR
BODY AND CLOTHING. THEREFORE, YOU MUST
EXERCISE CARE WHEN HANDLING STATIC SENSITIVE
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES AND DEVICES. IMPROPER
HANDLING CAN CAUSE AN EXCESSIVE
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) WHICH CAN
DAMAGE OR DESTROY INTEGRATED CIRCUITS,
SEMICONDUCTORS, OR OTHER STATIC SENSITIVE
DEVICES. FOR FURTHER DETAILS AND DISCUSSION
ON ESD AND APPROPRIATE HANDLING TECHNIQUES,
SEE THE APPENDIX ON ESD.
The inputs are provided to the Annunciator as the presence or absence of
a voltage at each input terminal. The Sequence Control Module acts as the
interface between the inputs and the balance of the Annunciator. It monitors the
inputs and causes a response corresponding to a specified sequence.
When the condition of a field contact changes from normal to alarm for
more than 30 milliseconds, the corresponding microcomputer recognizes it as a
valid contact status change. The microcomputer stores this information in
Sequence Control Memory. It then processes the data in accordance with the
selected ISA Sequence settings and other information supplied by the Common
Services Module.
The corresponding Annunciator LED (Light Emitting Diode) is activated.
Other related outputs may also be activated, depending on the options selected.
4-1
4.1
DIP SWITCHES
AN-3196B Annunciator
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
The voltage provided to each input terminal may be normally present
(Contact Normally Closed), or normally absent (Contact Normally Open). In
addition, the signal being monitored by each input may be considered as Critical
or Non-Critical. (There can be one audible alarm for Non-Critical inputs and a
second, different sounding, audible alarm for Critical inputs.) The input may also
be designated as part of a First-Out grouping.
There is an 8-position DIP (Dual In-line Package) switch assembly (S4)
and three 12-position DIP switch assemblies (S1, S2, and S3) on the Sequence
Control Module. Switch assembly S4 controls the ISA Sequence for the all
twelve inputs of the annunciator. Switch positions 1 through 6 on S4 are used to
select any of the possible ISA Sequences as shown in the chart in Figure 4.1.
The attributes of each of these sequences is shown in "Appendix A - ISA
Sequence Charts".
Input type selections are controlled by switch assemblies S1 (inputs 1
through 4), S2 (inputs 5 through 8), and S3 (inputs 9 through 12). Each switch
assembly controls the choice of normally open or normally closed, Critical or
Non-Critical, and First-Out or Non-First-Out for the four related inputs. Refer to
"APPENDIX F - SCM SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING" for switch
assembly locations. Refer to SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE for removal of
modules from the chassis and switch access.
Switch positions 1 through 4 on S1 control the choice of normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) for inputs 1 through 4 respectively. Switch
positions 5 through 8 on S1 control the choice of Critical or Non-Critical for inputs
1 through 4 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S1 control the choice
of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 1 through 4 respectively.
Switch positions 1 through 4 on S2 control the choice of normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) for inputs 5 through 8 respectively. Switch
positions 5 through 8 on S2 control the choice of Critical or Non-Critical for inputs
5 through 8 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S2 control the choice
of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 5 through 8 respectively.
Switch positions 1 through 4 on S3 control the choice of normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) for inputs 9 through 12 respectively. Switch
positions 5 through 8 on S3 control the choice of Critical or Non-Critical for inputs
9 through 12 respectively. Switch positions 9 through 12 on S3 control the
choice of First-Out or Non-First-Out for inputs 9 through 12 respectively.
Determine the conditions required for each input and set the DIP switch
positions accordingly. For example, if the input contact for Point #1 will be
normally open (voltage absent), set DIP switch position 1 on S1 to "OFF". If it is
a Critical alarm, set DIP switch position 5 on S1 to "ON". If it is part of a FirstOut grouping, set DIP switch position 9 on S1 to "ON".
4-3
For those ISA Sequences which do not utilize a First-Out response (A, A4,
M, R, and R12), switch positions 9 through 11 on S1, S2, and S3 serve
secondary functions.
1.
2.
3.
4-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
4.2
TECHNICAL DATA
4-5
AN-3196B Annunciator
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
For Isolated/AC input configuration (six groups), JPD1 is installed, while
the other jumpers are omitted. This provides a return path to return terminal
TB1- VA (J4-3), which is connected to the field voltage return side for the first
two inputs.
The input voltage applied to TB1-1 (J4-1) produces a current through
Resistors R1A and R1B, Diode Bridge BR1, and Resistors R1C and R1D.
Resistor R1E acts as a shunt to prevent any spurious potential voltage from
building up and triggering an alarm while the true input voltage is absent. With
Resistors R1A, R1B, R1C, and R1D in place, the correct level of current will be
generated from an input voltage of 24V. Removing R1D sets up the circuit for
48V, while removing both R1D and R1A sets up the circuit for 125V.
Diode Bridge BR1 rectifies the current, so that the circuit may be activated
by AC, as well as DC of either polarity. The current then passes through
Resistor R1F, and through the Light Emitting Diode (LED) input of Optical
Coupler OC1. OC1 provides electrical isolation between the input circuitry and
the logic circuitry. It also facilitates isolation between inputs in the six group
configuration.
Current passing through this LED causes light to be emitted from it, which
activates the photo transistor output. This in turn switches +5V through R1H,
producing a high, or logic `1' level at input port PC0 of Z1. R1H in conjunction
with Capacitor C1A also provides an RC time constant of approximately 30
milliseconds. This serves as a filter, suppressing transients which may be
entering from the field wiring. R1G serves as a pull-down resistor, to maintain a
low, or logic `0' level at PC0 while OC1 is turned off. Ports PC1-PC3 similarly
monitor the status of the other three inputs.
Ports PB2 through PB7, PC6, PC7, PD0 through PD5, and PD7 are used
as inputs to monitor DIP switch status. The DIP switches select program
sequences and operating modes (refer to notes and tables on
Schematic/Assembly drawing). When a switch is open, the input is held high by
a 100K pull-up resistor. When the switch is closed, the input is forced low, to
Common. Strobe signals STRB1 AND STRB2 from PC4 and PC5, in conjunction
with diodes CR1C-CR4C and CR1D-CR4D, multiplex Data from eight DIP
switches (S1-1 through S1-8) onto four input ports (PD0 through PD3).
Ports PA0 through PA3, used as outputs, control FET's Q1A through
Q4A, which drive LED's LED1A through LED 4A respectively. Series resistors
R1J through R4J limit the +5V derived LED current to approximately 2
milliamperes.
4-7
4.3
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
There are several special applications possible with the Sequence Control
Module. These require modification to the module itself. Such modifications
should only be performed by knowledgeable personnel following proper
procedures for static protection.
4-8
AN-3196B Annunciator
SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE
4.3.3 HOST SYSTEM INPUTS
The inputs to the AN-3196B Annunciator can be driven from a host
system instead of from field contacts. To drive the inputs from open-collector
transistor outputs on the host system, remove JPB1-6 and JPC1-6, and install
JPA1-6. Connect +24V from TB2 to VF(RET) on TB1. Refer to SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for specific
part locations.
To drive the inputs from 5V logic level outputs (CMOS or TTL) on the host
system, remove R(1-12)A, R(1-12)B, and
C(1-12)A. Add a wire jumper from the J4(1-12) side feedthru pad of R(1-12)A to
the unused feed thru pad connected to OC(1-12)-4. Refer to SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for specific
part locations.
4-9
4-10
AN-3196B Annunciator
COMMON SERVICES MODULE
5-1
5.1
OPTIONS
SWITCH
1
2
3
ON
FLASH 1 SLOW
FLASH 2 FAST
AUDIBLE ALARM SILENCED
AUTOMATICALLY AFTER 30 SEC.
PUSH BUTTON INTERLOCK
OFF
FLASH 1 FAST
FLASH 2 SLOW
NO AUTOMATIC SILENCE
SUFFIX
F1
F2
AS
NO PUSH BUTTON
INTERLOCK
AUDIBLE ALARM
CONTINUOUS
RINGBACK AUDIBLE
ALARM CONTINUOUS
RINGBACK AUDIBLE
ALARM NORMAL
INT
PA
PR
CC
AN-3196B Annunciator
COMMON SERVICES MODULE
When an input goes into an alarm state, the LED associated with that
input comes on as a flashing indicator. The rate of flash is determined by the
selected ISA Sequence and the setting of switch positions 1 and 2 on S1 on the
Common Services Module. Most ISA Sequences look at the position of switch
position 1 when the sequence refers to fast flash and at the position of switch
position 2 when the sequence refers to slow flash. (The exception to this is
Sequence F3A which does just the opposite.)
By changing the positions of switch positions 1 and 2 on S1, you can
reverse the normal flash rates as shown in the ISA Sequence Charts or you can
have both flash rates the same. (For Non-First-Out Sequences, the lamps can
be made to come on steady instead of flashing. Refer to "Section 4 Sequence Control Module".)
5-3
5-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
COMMON SERVICES MODULE
5.2
5-5
5.3
TECHNICAL DATA
5-6
AN-3196B Annunciator
COMMON SERVICES MODULE
5.4
OUTPUT RELAYS
5-7
5.5
CONFIGURATION CHANGES
The standard module configuration is to have the contacts for all relays
normally open. To change the configuration of relay outputs K1 and K2 from
normally open to normally closed, it is necessary to change some of the jumpers
on the Common Services Module. These changes are also affected by whether
the module has normally energized or normally de-energized relays. (Refer to
"SCHEMATIC & ASSEMBLY DRAWING IN APPENDIX F" for the location of
these jumpers.)
The standard factory configuration is to have all relays normally deenergized. To have normally energized relays, it is necessary to install
transistors Q9 through Q12 for relays K1 through K4 respectively, and to change
jumpers on the Common Services Module. Refer to the SCHEMATIC &
ASSEMBLY DRAWING in "Appendix F - Engineering Drawings" for part
locations. TABLE 5.2 shows which jumpers should be in place (IN) on the
module and which jumpers should be removed (OUT) for each of the possible
choices.
Output Jumper
Configuration
In
Jumper
Out
Jumper In
Jumper
Out
NO
NC
JPF & Q9
JPE
JPN
JPM
NC
NO
JPF & Q9
JPE
JPM
JPN
NO
NC
JPH &Q10
JPG
JPP
JPO
NC
NO
JPH &Q10
JPG
JPO
JPP
NO
NC
JPI
Selected on TB2
NC
NO
JPJ &Q11
JPI
Selected on TB2
NO
NC
JPL &Q12
JPK
Selected on TB2
NC
NO
JPL &Q12
JPK
Selected on TB2
5-8
AN-3196B Annunciator
MAINTENANCE
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE
W A R N I N G
STATIC ELECTRICITY IS ALWAYS PRESENT ON YOUR
BODY AND CLOTHING. THEREFORE, YOU MUST
EXERCISE CARE WHEN HANDLING STATIC SENSITIVE
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES AND DEVICES. IMPROPER
HANDLING CAN CAUSE AN EXCESSIVE ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE (ESD) WHICH CAN DAMAGE OR DESTROY
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS, SEMICONDUCTORS, OR OTHER
STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. FOR FURTHER DETAILS
AND DISCUSSION ON ESD AND APPROPRIATE HANDLING
TECHNIQUES, SEE THE APPENDIX ON ESD.
Module (left side as viewed facing the enclosure) is aligned with the slides in the
enclosure. Slide the unit straight into the enclosure. Both cards must line up
with their respective edge connectors. Press the modules firmly into the edge
connectors and tighten the screw. Replace the Modbus connector on the rear, if
equipped.
CAUTION
The AN-3196B plug-in assembly is NOT
interchangeable with the earlier model AN-3196
plug-in module assemblies. Therefore, do not
attempt to service or repair any AN-3196 type
installation by exchanging plug in module
assemblies unless the model number suffixes
match each other and match the suffix on the
housing serial number tag. Even if the suffixes
match extra caution must be used to verify that
the assemblies are identical in the areas of
prime power, FCV and dip-switch settings.
6-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
MAINTENANCE
6.1
TROUBLE SHOOTING
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE SOLUTION
6-3
Nothing works.
6-4
AN-3196B Annunciator
ORDER CODE
Labeling:
Black lamacoid legend plates with white lettering for
each point, plus one for unit identification (see
engraving information)
AN-3196B Specifications
Input Signals:
NO or NC contacts, switch selectable
Output:
A. LED indicator per point
B. Audible and Reflash Output Relay
Contacts rated at:
5A @ 24 VDC/120 VAC, 3 A @ 240 VAC, or
0.1 A @125 VDC
C. Optional remote mounted audible devices
D. 24 VDC @ 0.15 A available for driving audible
device
Legend Plate
Engraving Sizes
Relative Humidity:
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Letter Size
B-1
1/8"(3.2mm)
5/32"
3/16
1/4
Other sizes available upon
request
Maximum #
of Lines
Maximum # of
Characters
Per Line
3
3
2
1
22
18
14
11
AN-3196B Ordering
The AN-3196B is supplied in the following versions, stocked and immediately available from the RiS
factory. Individual model numbers are defined by the following fill-in items:
AN-3196B -
1
Sequence
2
3
4
Prime
Field Contact
Audible
Power
Voltage
Options
1. Sequence
A
F2M-1
Optional:
Auto Reset
Manual Reset First-Out with no
subsequent alarm flashing and
silence push-button.
A4, R, M, R12, FFAM2, F3A, F1A,
F2A
2. Prime Power
F
24 VDC
E
48 VDC
C
125 VDC
B
120 VAC
A
240 VAC
5
Reflash
6
Enclosure
7
Engraving
4. Audible Options
*SNS Sonalert Steady Tone
Remote Mount
*SNP Sonalert Pulsing
Remote Mount
HAC 120 VAC Remote Horn
HDC
24 VDC Remote Horn
HDH 125 VDC Remote Horn
NR
Not Required
*Not integrally mounted in NEMA 4/12
5. Reflash Option
AR
MR
Automatic Reflash
Manual Reflash (Standard)
PM
SM
4WM
12WM
Customer Supplied:
D/C
125 VDC Isolated
X/C
24 VDC Isolated
T/C
48 VDC Isolated
Y/C
120 VAC Isolated
Panel Mount
Surface Mount
Wall mount, NEMA 4
Wall mount, NEMA 12
B-2
AN-3196B Annunciator
SPARE PARTS
SPARE PARTS
The MicroLarm AN-3196B Visual Annunciator is frequently used to monitor critical
operations. We strongly recommend that you stock sufficient spare parts to prevent
interruption to this monitoring function. The following lists give minimum
recommended quantities.
N O T I C E
ALWAYS PROVIDE THE ANNUNCIATOR SERIAL NUMBER
WHEN ORDERING SPARE PARTS TO MAKE SURE THAT
YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT PARTS.
DESCRIPTION
RIS PART #
QUAN
FOR PRIME
POWER
0620-310
All
0620-451
All
0620-450
24VDC, 48VDC
Amp Fuse
0620-451
125VDC, 120VAC
Lamacoid Tags
1036-106
As Req'd.
All
Microcomputer IC (SCM)
1070-412
All
Microcomputer IC (CSM)
1070-416
All
NOTE:
C-1
APPENDIX A
ISA SEQUENCE CHARTS
VISUAL:
The Visual (V) aspects of the annunciation may be On, Off, Flashing,
Slow Flashing, Fast Flashing, or Intermittent Fast Flashing.
AUDIBLE:
The status of the Audible (A) condition may be Audible (on) or Silent
(off). There are also additional Audible conditions defined for Alarm
Audible (AA) and Ringback Audible (RA).
In the Annunciator Sequence Charts, there is a block for each possible annunciator
state. The annunciator may change from one State to another if the Event indicated
by the arrow occurs. The events are either a Process change or operator action on a
push button such as Silence, Acknowledge or Reset.
P
S
V
A
P ro c e ss
S e q u e n ce
V isu a l
A u d ib le
LEG EN D
LAM P OFF
LA M P
F L A S H IN G
LAMP ON
HORN OFF
HORN ON
Option
Function
Description
Silence Pushbutton
Interlock Pushbutton
No Lock-In
No Audible
Automatic Silence
Common Ringback
10
No Ringback Audible
11
Common Ringback
Visual
12
Automatic Momentary
Ringback
APPENDIX B
ORDER CODE DEFINITION
and SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX C
SPARE PARTS
APPENDIX D
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
D.1 INTRODUCTION
We are all familiar with static electricity. It is the charge we build up when we walk
across a rug. It is possible to build up as much as a 25,000 volt charge on your body
or clothing. When this static electricity discharges from your body to a conductive
object or surface, such as may occur when touching a computer keyboard, the
discharge is referred to as an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
If this discharge occurs over a very short period of time, as it typically does,
exceptionally high currents, and therefore power (wafts) can be produced. For
example, if there is a 200 millijoule charge on your body and it discharges in 100
microseconds, a 2000 watt surge is produced. A 2000 waft surge is more than
sufficient to destroy most semiconductor junctions in transistors, diodes, or integrated
circuits.
In many cases, a device subjected to an Electrostatic Discharge is only damaged
initially. It does not actually fail until sometime later. That is, it is a time delayed failure.
As a result, it is not unusual for there to be repeated failure of the same device. That
is, the device can be mishandled during installation, leading to a time delayed failure.
A few weeks or months later the device again fails and is replaced, and potentially
again mishandled. This process can then repeat.
The time delay until failure can be a few days or several months, depending on how
severely the part was damaged by the Electrostatic Discharge. Studies have been
made on the failure mechanism of electronic devices. These studies have shown that
Electrostatic Discharge was the root cause of device failures in as many as 50% of the
cases.
Because you do not see or feel an Electrostatic Discharge, does not mean that one
has not occurred. For most people, a discharge has to be in the range of 2000 to 3000
volts before they even become aware of it. Voltage levels much lower than this can
destroy most electronic devices.
The device should be transported in a conductive bag or bin and; when making
repairs or handling parts or assemblies, service personnel should wear a wrist and/or
heel ground strap. Spare parts and assemblies should be stored in conductive bags or
conductive bins and should only be handled when at an appropriate repair station.
Even taking care to prevent the buildup of static electricity does not assure that there
never will be a dangerous static charge present. If a static charge is present, the goal
is to prevent a large, rapid discharge from occurring or, if it does occur, to make it
occur where it will do no damage. The ideal way to prevent a destructive discharge
from occurring is to discharge any static present through a large impedance.
Repair personnel should ground themselves through a wrist and/or heel strap. Their
tools should be grounded through a conductive mat before touching any potentially
static sensitive assemblies or devices. Conductive mats and heel and wrist straps
have megohms of impedance, and therefore any charge present is bled off in a
controlled manner through this large impedance.
When this is not possible or practical, personnel can minimize the probability of doing
damage to electronic parts by first touching a water pipe, the chassis or enclosure of
an electronic assembly, or some other ground point. However, this approach will likely
result in the charge being rapidly discharged. This can produce a high energy
magnetic pulse which, in turn, could produce potentially damaging eddy currents in
printed circuit board traces.
It is always best to discharge any charge present through a large impedance. When
handling printed circuit boards or other electronic assemblies, personnel should try to
avoid touching circuit traces or devices with their bare hands or fingers. That is, hold
the board by its edges. If at all possible, a board should be removed for repair and be
put into a conductive bag or bin and then taken to an appropriate repair station to be
worked on.
Do not forget that tools can also carry a static charge. Use only grounded soldering
irons. Touch tools to ground before touching an electronic assembly or device. Store
tools in a conductive tool carrier (metal or conductive plastic), and then ground the
carrier before using any tools.
D.3
1. Prevent static buildup by using conductive paints, carpeting, mats and metal
surfaces. Use appropriate grounding techniques, including wrist and heel straps for
personnel.
2. Store or transport electronic devices, parts or assemblies in conductive bags or
bins.
3. Only perform repairs at an appropriate repair station.
4. When handling electronic assemblies or printed circuit boards, try to avoid
touching traces on the printed circuit board or static sensitive devices.
5. Remember that tools are a source of static electricity. Only use grounded soldering
irons. Ground tools before using them to bleed off any charge buildup.
6. Discharge yourself before touching or handling any electronic assembly or device.
This can be done by touching a good ground point before touching any electronic
devices or assemblies. Preferably, discharge any static charge through a high
impedance such as a wrist or heel strap.
APPENDIX E
REPAIRS AND WARRANTY
DESCRIPTION
A-1052-675
C-1072-210
D-1074-342
D-1074-337
D-1072-029
D-1072-030
D-1072-216
D-1047-623
-ODEL
%LECTROMECHANICAL
$ESCRIPTION
4HESE lGURE !# OR $# HOUR METERS WITH RUNNING INDICATORS OFFER CRISP DISTINCTIVE STYLING FOR MANY PANEL APPLICATIONS !VAILABLE IN SQUARE AND ROUND
BEZEL mUSH MOUNT OR THREE
HOLE ROUND PANEL MOUNT %ACH IS LIGHT
WEIGHT LOW POWER AND CARRY 5, #3! AND #% APPROVALS
&EATURES
/PTIONS
s
s
s
s
s
s
lGURE
6ARIOUS VOLTAGE INPUTS
$ISTINCTIVE STYLING
4ERMINATIONS
$IN RAIL
6OLTAGES
3PECIlCATIONS
&IGURES
2ESET
6OLTAGES
0OWER
4ERMINATIONS
-ODELS
$ESCRIPTION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
WIRE LEADS
SCREW TERMINATION
-OUNTING
&RONT 0ANEL
4EMP 2ANGE
!PPROVALS
7EIGHT
-ODELS
$ESCRIPTION
6$#
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
&LUSH MOUNT
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
SCREW TERMINATION
$IMENSIONS
$IA &LUSH
(OLE 2OUND
!PPLICATIONS
-EDICAL EQUIPMENT
WWWREDINGTONCOUNTERSCOM
Accessories
Current Transformers with Terminals
The current transformer is equipped with terminals to permit easy connection to either an analog or a digital panel
meter. These terminals are # 8-32 brass studs and come
with flat washer, lockwasher, and regular nut (Leads are not
provided).
SIMPSON
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
#37023 300:5
XI
HI
A typical wiring setup is shown at right, depicting a terminal-type current transformer installed with a panel meter to
monitor current.
VAC POWER
SOURCE
@300AMPS
300AMPS
TO LOAD
Dimension Drawing
3.53"
(89.7mm)
3.00"
(76.2mm)
ACCURACY:
2.0% (100 Amp)
1.0% (100-1000 Amp)
INSULATION CLASS:
0.6kV BIL
10kV full wave
FREQUENCY:
50-400Hz
WEIGHT:
1.0lb (453.59g)
4 OPEN SLOTS
0.21" X 0.31"(5.3mm X 7.9mm)
0.44" (11.2mm)
XI
HI
3.78"
(96.0mm)
1.09"
(27.7mm)
1.77"
(45.0mm)
1.83"
(46.5mm)
2.75"
(69.9mm)
1.56" DIA
(39.6mm)
2.15"
(54.6mm)
Ordering Information
Range
100:5
150:5
200:5
300:5
500:5
1000:5
Burden
VA@60Hz
2.0
5.0
5.0
12.5
20.0
25.0
Catalog Number
37020
37021
37022
37023
37024
37025
Features
Lightweight, compact industrial design
Wide operation temperature range (00C to 500C)
Cold start capability
Phone/dataline surge protection
Software and cable included for easy installation
Simulated sinewave output
RS232 communication port
USB communication port (optional)
Form C dry contact relay (optional)
Panel/wall mounting brackets (optional)
Remote turn-on and shut-off capabilities
Two year limited warranty
230V Models
- EN62040-1-1
Related Products
Portable MCR Power Conditioners
STV Surge Protective Devices
SDN DIN Rail Power Supplies
STFV Plus Active Tracking Filters
Selection Table
Capacity
(VA/W)
Catalog
Number
500/300
SDU 500
850/510
SDU 850
500/300
SDU 500-5
850/510
SDU 850-5
E179213
Input/Output
Connections
4
2
4
Approx. Ship
Weight - lbs (kg)
10.7 (4.70)
11.4 (5.00)
11.5 (5.20)
11.9 (5.40)
* At full load.
SDU Accessories
Catalog
Number
64
Description
Approx. Ship
Weight - lbs (kg)
RELAYCARD-SDU
Dry contact I/O relay box, IP20 touch proof screw terminals, wire size range 12~22 AWG (IEC 2.5mm);
N.O./N.C. form "C" contact. Relay contact signal for "On Battery", "Low Battery" and "UPS Shutdown".
1.0 (0.45)
UPSMON-USB
1.0 (0.45)
SDU-PMBRK
1.0 (0.45)
SDU 500
SDU 850
SDU 500-5
SDU 850-5
500/300
850/510
500/300
850/510
0.6
10.7 (4.70)
11.4 (5.00)
11.5 (5.20)
11.9 (5.40)
Input Parameters
120 V (+10%, -20%)
Voltage
Frequency
Output AC Parameters
Step sinewave
+/- 5%
50 or 60 Hz
+/- 0.3 Hz
UPS automatic shutdown if overload exceeds 105% of nominal at 20 seconds, 120% at 10 seconds, 130% at 3 seconds
UPS output cut off immediately
Short Circuit
Battery Parameters
Battery Type
Transfer Time
4 - 6 ms typical
4.5/18
2.5/10
4.5/18
2.5/10
Operating Temperature
-15C to 60C
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
1% to 95%, non-condensing
Ambient Operation
Audible Noise
EMC
Elevation
Shock & Vibration
Mounting
65
Power Supplies
UL 60950
E137632
CUL/CSA-C22.2
No. 234-M90
Related Products
SDP Series
SFL Series
SCP Series
SCL Series
SDU UPS
Applications
Industrial/Machine Control
Process Control
Conveying Equipment
Material Handling
Vending Machines
Packaging Equipment
DeviceNetTM
Accessories
Chassis Mount Bracket (SDN-PMBRK2)
EMC and
Low Volt.
Directive
Power Supplies
DEMK0 06
ATEX 05 21715U
Catalog Number
SDN 2.5-24-100P
SDN 4-24-100LP
SDN 5-24-100P
SDN 10-24-100P
SDN 20-24-100P
Input
115/230 Vac auto select
Nominal Voltage
85-132/176-264 Vac
-AC Range
-DC Range1
90-375 Vdc
210-375 Vdc
47 - 63 Hz
-Frequency
Nominal Current2
-Inrush current max.
Efficiency (Losses3)
N/A
1.3 A. / 0.7 A
2.1 A / 1.0 A
typ. < 25 A
> 87.5% typ. (8.6 W)
2.2 A / 1.0 A
5 A / 2 A typ.
typ. < 20 A
> 88% typ. (13.1 W)
9 A/ 3.9 A
typ. < 40 A
Output
Nominal Voltage
24 Vdc
(22.5 - 28.5 Vdc adj.)
-Tolerance
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
(22.5 - 25.5 Vdc adj.)
(22.5 - 28.5 Vdc adj.)
< 2% overall (combination Line, load, time and temperature related changes)
< 50 mVpp
-Ripple4
Overvoltage Protection
Nominal Current
-Current Limit
Holdup Time5
Parallel Operation
2.5 A (60 W)
3.8 A (92 W)
5 A (120 W)
10 A (240 W)
20 A (480 W)
Fold Forward (Current rises, voltage drops to maintain constant power during overload up to max peak current)
> 50 ms
> 100 ms
> 100 ms
> 100 ms
Single or Parallel use is selectable via Front Panel Switch (SDN 2.5, 4 should not be used in parallel as Class 2 rating would be violated.)
General
EMC:
-Emissions
-Immunity
Approvals
Temperature
EN61000-6-3, -4; Class B EN55011, EN55022 Radiated and Conducted including Annex A.
EN61000-6-1, -2; EN61000-4-2 Level 4, EN61000-4-3 Level 3; EN61000-4-6 Level 3; EN61000-4-4 Level 4 input and Level 3 output; EN61000-4-5
Isolation Class 4, EN61000-4-11;
EN60950; UL508 Listed, cULus; UL60950, cRUus, CE (LVD 73/23 & 93/68/EEC). EN61000-3-2, IEC60079-15 (Class 1, Zone 2, Hazardous
Location, Groups A, B, C, D w/ T3A temp class up to 60C Ambient.) SEMI F47 Sag Immunity. SDN 2.5 & SDN 4 - UL60950 testing to
include approval as Class 2 power supply in accordance with UL1310.
Storage: -25oC...+85oC Operation. -10-60oC full power with operation to 70C possible with a linear derating to half power from 60oC to 70oC
(Convection cooling, no forced air required). Operation up to 50% load permissible with sideways or front side up mounting orientation. The relative
humidity is < 90% RH, noncondensing; IEC 68-2-2, 68-2-3.
Humidity
MTBF:
- Standard
5 years
Warranty
General Protection/
Safety
Status Indicators
Green LED and DC OK signal (N.O. Solid State Contact rated 200 mA / 60 Vdc)
Fusing
-Input
Internally fused. External 10 A slow acting fusing for the input is recommended to protect input wiring.
Installation
-Output
Mounting
Connections
Case
-Free Space
HxWxD
(inches/mm)
Weight (lbs/kg)
Outputs are capable of providing high currents for short periods of time for inductive load startup or switching. Fusing may be required for
wire/loads if 2x Nominal O/P current rating cannot be tolerated. Continuous current overload allows for reliable fuse tripping.
Simple snap-on system for DIN Rail TS35/7.5 or TS35/15 or chassis-mounted (optional screw mounting set SDN-PMBRK2 required).
Input: IP20-rated screw terminals, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5-6 mm2) for solid conductors. 16-12 AWG (0.5-4 mm2) for
flexible conductors. Output: Two connectors per output, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5 - 6 mm2) for solid conductors.
Fully enclosed metal housing with fine ventilation grid to keep out small parts.
25 mm above and below,
25 mm left and right, 10 mm in front
107
Power Supplies
+ +
Catalog
Number
OK
NEC Class 2
Power Supply
24-28 V
Parallel
S O LA
).$ #/.4 %1
(!
US LISTED
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 16-12-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
24 Vdc
Power Supply
SDN 2.5-24-100P
U
L
SDN 9-12-100P
Single
H
12 Vdc
OK
24 VDC / 2.5 A
SDN 2.5-24-100P
4.88 (124)
1.97 (50)
4.55 (116)
SDN 4-24-100LP
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-24-100P
4.88 (124)
2.56 (65)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-24-480
4.88 (124)
2.91 (73)
4.55 (116)
SDN 10-24-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
SDN 20-24-100P
4.88 (124)
6.88 (175)
4.55 (116)
SDN 5-48-100P
4.88 (124)
3.26 (83)
4.55 (116)
48 Vdc
S O LA
H
Power Supply
SDN 20-24-480C
).$ #/.4 %1
(!
Catalog
Number
110
Overload
Output:
24 VDC / 20 A
Electronically protected
2428V
+ + - -
OK
Single Use
L1 L2 L3
Parallel Use
Input:
3PH 380/500 VAC
1.7/1.5A/Phase 50/60 Hz
US LISTED
Continuous Mode
U
L
Fuse Mode
SDN 10-24-480
4.88 (124)
5.90 (150)
4.55 (116)
SDN 30-24-480
4.88 (124)
9.72 (247)
4.55 (116)
SDN 40-24-480
4.88 (124)
11.10 (282)
4.55 (116)
9001SKT38LGG31
Commercial Status
Commercialised
Range of product
Harmony 9001SK
Product or component
type
9001SK
Type of operator
Spring return
Operator profile
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. *Prices are indicative
Main
Complementary
Bezel material
Plastic
Mounting diameter
Octagonal
Light source
Bulb base
BA 9s
Direct
120 V AC/DC
Connections - terminals
Tightening torque
Cross slotted
Mechanical durability
5000000 cycles
Operating position
Any position
Contacts material
Positive opening
Without
10 A
Product weight
Environment
Standards
EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
JIS C 4520
JIS C 852
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
Product certifications
NEMA
UL 508
Protective treatment
TC
-40...158 F (-40...70 C)
-13...158 F (-25...70 C)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Class II
IP degree of protection
NEMA 4X
NEMA 4
NEMA 3R
NEMA 3
NEMA 2
NEMA 13
NEMA 12
NEMA 1
Discount Schedule
CS1
GTIN
00785901044482
Package weight(Lbs)
0.27
Product availability
Returnability
Country of origin
MX
Offer Sustainability
Sustainable offer status
RoHS
REACh
Contractual warranty
Period
18 months
30 mm Pushbutton Switches
SWITCHES
ENCLOSURES
30 mm Flush Head
9001SKR24RH13
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKR1GH13
9001SKR1RH13
9001SKR1UH13
Mfr.s
Type
Contact
Configuration
Color
EACH
70060421
70060422
70060423
70060424
70060425
70060426
70060428
70060429
70060430
9001SKR1BH13
9001SKR1BH5
9001SKR1GH13
9001SKR1GH5
9001SKR1RH13
9001SKR1RH6
9001SKR1UH13
9001SKR1UH5
9001SKR1UH6
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
68.92
56.16
68.92
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Red
Red
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
30 mm Guarded Head
30 mm Extended Head
INTERCONNECT
Stock
No.
POWER
Stock
No.
OPTOELECTRONICS
RoHS
70060443
70060444
70060445
70060446
70060447
70060448
70060449
70060431
70060432
70060433
70060434
70060435
70060436
70060437
70060438
70060439
70060440
70060441
70060442
Mfr.s
Type
Head Size
9001SKR24BH13
9001SKR24BH5
9001SKR24GH13
9001SKR24GH5
9001SKR24RH13
9001SKR24RH6
9001SKR25BH13
9001SKR25BH5
9001SKR25GH13
9001SKR25GH5
9001SKR25RH13
9001SKR25RH6
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
Contact
Configuration
EACH
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red (Emergency)
Red (Emergency)
Red
Red
Black
Black
Green
Green
Red
Red
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
117.38
95.29
117.38
95.29
120.81
101.22
117.38
95.29
117.38
93.41
112.33
95.29
117.38
95.29
Color
9001SKR2BH13
9001SKR2BH5
9001SKR2RH13
9001SKR2RH6
9001SKR2UH13
9001SKR2UH5
9001SKR2UH6
70060457
70060458
70060459
70060460
70060461
70060462
70060463
70060464
70060465
70060466
70060467
70060468
70060469
70060470
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
13/8"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
21/4"
9001SKR4BH13
9001SKR4BH5
9001SKR4GH13
9001SKR4GH5
9001SKR4R05H13
9001SKR4R05H6
9001SKR4RH13
9001SKR4RH6
9001SKR5BH13
9001SKR5BH5
9001SKR5GH13
9001SKR5GH5
9001SKR5RH13
9001SKR5RH6
9001SKR3BH13
9001SKR3BH5
9001SKR3RH13
9001SKR3RH6
9001SKR3UH13
9001SKR3UH5
9001SKR3UH6
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NO/1 NC
1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Black
Black
Red
Red
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
7 Color (BK, R, G, Y, O, BL, W)
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
75.70
56.16
56.16
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
Contact
Configuration
Color
EACH
70060471
70060472
70060473
70060474
70060475
70060476
9001SKR8P1RH25
9001SKR8RH25
9001SKR9GH13
9001SKR9P1GH13
9001SKR9P1RH13
9001SKR9RH13
2 NC
2 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
Red (Illuminated)
Red
Green
Green (Illuminated)
Red (Illuminated)
Red
227.15
120.81
159.94
268.82
268.82
159.94
Features
Universal Color Caps Reduce Inventory and Provide More Flexibility
Single Screw Mounting of Contact Blocks for Quick Installation
Color Coded Contact Blocks for Ease-of-Use and Troubleshooting
Wide Variety of Operating Heads
Oil Tight, Water Tight and Dust Tight (Indoor/Outdoor)
Fully Assembled Units
Complete with 1 NO/1 NC Contact Block
30 mm Diameter Mounting Hole with Positioning Notch
Use 6 VAC Lamp, ANSI 755
Approvals UL Listed File Number E42259 CCN NKCR CSA Certified
File Number LR25490 Class 3211 03 CE Marked
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
Cap
Color
Description
EACH
70060412
70060413
70060414
70060415
70060416
70060417
70060418
9001SK1L1GH13
9001SK1L1RH13
9001SK2L1G21H13
9001SK2L1GH13
9001SK2L1R20H13
9001SK2L1R21H13
9001SK2L1RH13
Green
Red
Green
Green
Red
Red
Red
196.53
196.53
184.58
184.58
184.58
184.58
184.58
ASSEMBLY
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
CAM
Code
Contact
Configuration
Contact Left
Contact Right
70060477
70060478
70060479
9001SKS11BH1
9001SKS11BH13
9001SKS11BH2
E
B
E
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
Closed/Open
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Open/Closed
EACH
90.18
90.18
129.31
INDEX
Selector Position
Stock
No.
Mfr.s
Type
CAM
Code
Contact
Configuration
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
70060480
70060481
70060482
70060483
70060484
70060485
9001SKS42BH1
9001SKS42BH13
9001SKS42BH2
9001SKS43BH1
9001SKS43BH13
9001SKS43BH2
E
B
B
C
C
C
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
2 NO/2 NC
Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Closed/Open
Closed/Open/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Open/Closed
Open/Open
Open/Open
Open/Open/Open/Open
Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed/Open/Closed
136 SWITCHES
EACH
90.18
90.18
129.31
90.18
90.18
129.31
4404InFocusInventorySheet2
12/16/04
9:33 AM
Page 1
Auxiliary Switch or
Alarm Contact
Shunt Trip
November 2004
S29450
Circuit Breaker Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch,
600VAC, 6A
Technical Characteristics
Circuit Breaker Type
Standard
General Application
Provides a Remote Signal Indicating the Circuit Breaker Contacts are Open or Closed,
Auxiliary Switch 1A/1B, Trip indication, Overcurrent indication
Ampere Rating
6A
Powerpact
Voltage Rating
600VAC
Discount Schedule
DE2
Article Number
785901506416
Package Quantity
Weight
0.07 lbs.
Availability Code
Non-Stock Item: This item is not normally stocked in our distribution facility.
Returnability
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.
09
Class 0611
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
Mounting and Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 34
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 45
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47
Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 59
MCP Instantaneous Trip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 70
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.40
[163]
7.52
[191]
06113261
1.38
[35]
4.12
[105]
1.38
[35]
4.12
[105]
2.87
[73]
3.44
[87]
2.87
[73]
3.44
[87]
Dimensions in.
[mm]
5
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113234
All PowerPact H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers are equipped with dual-break rotating contacts
that reduce the amount of peak current during a short circuit fault. This reduces the let-through
currents and enhances equipment protection.
The moving contact has the shape of an elongated S and rotates around an
floating axis. The shape of the fixed and moving contacts are such that the
repelling forces appear as soon as the circuit reaches approximately 15 times In.
06113262
Due to the rotating movement, repulsion is rapid and the device greatly limits
short-circuit currents, whatever the interrupting level of the unit (D, G, J or L). The
fault current is extinguished before it can fully develop. Lower let-through currents
provide less peak energy, reducing the required bus bar bracing, lowering
enclosure pressure, and delivering improved series or combination ratings.
Special constructions are designed for continuous operation at 100% of their current rating.
The 100% rated circuit breakers require a larger enclosure than the standard enclosures described on
page 42.
Push-to-Trip
The H-frame and J-frame circuit breaker handle can assume any of three positions, ON, tripped or
OFF as shown. The center tripped position provides positive visual indication that the circuit breaker
has tripped.
The circuit breaker can be reset by first pushing the handle to the extreme OFF position. Power can
then be restored to the load by pushing the handle to the ON position.
ON
Tripped
OFF
6
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Flexible Configurations
The PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers may be configured with lugs, bus bar connections, rear
connections, I-Line, drawout cradle, or plug-in base.
06113259
Figure 2:
7
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
250
Poles
Amperage
H H-Frame
J J-Frame
2 2P
3 3P
150 1515- A
250 150250 A
000 Switch
L
M
P
F
A
S
N
D
K
ABC (3P)
Trip Unit
Standard Fixed Trip Unit (Suitable for reverse connection) 6 CBA (3P)
1 AB (2P)
F06 60 A H-Frame Only (No trip unit)
2 AC (2P)
F15 150 A H-Frame Only (No trip unit)
3 BA (2P)
F25 250 A J-Frame Only (No trip unit)
4 BC (2P)
T
Complete Circuit Breaker (Frame + removable trip unit)
5 CA (2P)
S15 150 A Molded Case Switch (H-Frame automatic switch)
6 CB (2P)
S17 175 A Molded Case Switch (J-Frame automatic switch)
S25 250 A Molded Case Switch (J-Frame automatic switch)
C
100% Continuous Current Rating (See page 42 for minimum enclosure size)
M71 30 A H-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M72 50 A H-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M73 100 A H-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M74 150 A H-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M75 250 A J-Frame Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
D81 500 Vdc 150175 A J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker
D82 500 Vdc 200250 A J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Voltage
6 600 Vac
Table 1:
Frame
Terminations
Interrupting Rating
UL/CSA/NOM
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vdc
500 Vdc1
500/525 Vac
250 Vdc
500 Vdc
25 kA
18 kA
14 kA
20 kA
25/25 kA
18/18 kA
14/14 kA
20 kA
20 kA
65 kA
35 kA
18 kA
20 kA
20 kA
65/65 kA
35/35 kA
18/18 kA
20 kA
20 kA
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
20 kA
100/100 kA
65/65 kA
25/25 kA
20 kA
20 kA
125 kA
100 kA
50 kA
20 kA
125/125 kA
100/100 kA
50/50 kA
20 kA
20 kA
Table 2:
(4) Undervoltage
Release UVR
Voltage
Voltage
H-Frame
J-Frame
ML
48/60 Vac
S29440
S31548
Suffix
Contacts
Kit Number
Suffix
Kit Number
AA
1A/1B Standard
S29450
SK
S29384
UK
S29404
24 Vac
AB
2A/2B Standard
S29450 (2)
SL
S29385
UL
S29405
48 Vac
MA
120 Vac
S29433
S31540
AE
1A/1B Gold
S29482
SA
S29386
UA
S29406
120 Vac
MD
277 Vac
S29434
S31541
AF
2A/2B Gold
S29482 (2)
SD
S29387
UD
S29407
208277 Vac
MH
380/480 Vac
S29435
S31542
SH
S29388
UH
S29408
380480 Vac
MO
24/30 Vdc
S29436
S31543
SJ
S29389
UJ
S29409
525600 Vac
MP
48/60 Vdc
S29437
S31544
SN
S29382
UN
S29402
12 Vdc
MR
110/130 Vdc
S29438
S31545
MS
250 Vdc
S29439
S31546
Switch
Kit Number
BC
SO
S29390
UO
S29410
24 Vdc
BH
SU
S29391
UU
S29411
30 Vdc
BD
SDE Standard
S29450 +
S29451
SP
S29392
UP
S29412
48 Vdc
BJ
SDE Low-level
S29452 +
S29451
SV
S29383
UV
S29403
60 Vdc
BE
SD and SDE
Standard
S29450 (2) +
S29451
SR
S29393
UR
S29413
125 Vdc
BK
SD and SDE
Low-level
S29452 (2) +
S29451
SS
S29394
US
S29414
250 Vdc
Suffix
Kit
Number
RD10
S29337
RE10
RT10
Telescoping (black)
RD20
S29339
RE20
S29340
S29343
8
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113271
Table 3:
1560 A H-Frame
1125A
60A
(li)
(ln)
06113272
150250 A J-Frame
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
15 A
20 A
25 A
30 A
35 A
40 A
45 A
50 A
60 A
HT3015
HT3020
HT3025
HT3030
HT3035
HT3040
HT3045
HT3050
HT3060
70 A
80 A
90 A
100 A
110 A
125 A
150 A
HT3070
HT3080
HT3090
HT3100
HT3110
HT3125
HT3150
150 A
175 A
200 A
225 A
250 A
JT3150
JT3175
JT3200
JT3225
JT3250
2500
1250
250A
70150 A H-Frame
Amperage
(lm)
(ln)
06113269
Temperature1
Rating (A) In
-10
14
23
30
38
46
53
60
68
76
88
103
112
123
137
160
180
221
32
21
28
36
43
49
56
63
71
83
97
107
117
131
151
171
207
10
50
20
26
33
40
46
52
59
66
77
90
101
111
126
141
161
194
20
68
18
24
31
37
42
48
54
62
72
84
96
105
120
132
152
180
30
86
17
22
28
34
39
44
50
56
66
77
88
98
110
121
139
165
40
104
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
50
122
12
17
21
25
30
34
38
43
53
62
72
80
86
95
109
131
60
140
14
17
20
24
28
31
35
46
53
63
70
72
80
93
111
ln
li
Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 C (104 F).
Table 5:
Ampere Rating
1530 A
3550 A
6090 A
100150 A
Hold (A)
350
400
800
900
Trip (A)
750
850
1450
1700
9
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
t
06113270
Temperature1
Rating (A) In
-10
14
221
264
289
330
377
32
207
247
273
310
354
10
50
194
230
256
290
330
20
68
180
213
240
270
307
30
86
165
194
220
248
279
40
104
150
175
200
225
250
50
122
131
150
176
193
214
60
140
111
124
151
160
177
ln
lm
Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 C (104 F).
Table 7:
Ampere Rating1
150 A
175 A
200 A
225 A
250 A
Low (A)
750
875
1000
1125
1250
High (A)
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
UL magnetic trip setting tolerances are -20% +30% from nominal values shown.
NOTE: Apply circuit breakers according to guidelines detailed in the National Electric Code (NEC) and other local wiring codes.
UL 4893
NEMA AB1
NEMA AB1
NMX J-266
NMX J-266
NMX J-515
NMX J-515
CCC
CCC
CE Mark
CE Mark
UL 4891
IEC Standard 60947-2
CSA 22.2 No. 5-022
NEMA AB1
NMX J-515
CCC
CE Mark
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors are in UL File E10027
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors are in CSA File LR40970
Special Ratings
The H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers also comply with the following special ratings:
HACR rating
SWD switch duty rating (applies only to 15 and 20 A / 277 Vac or less, 2P and 3P)
HID high intensity discharge lighting rating (1550 A)
10
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
NOTE: Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the functionality of the
position indication system.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing the mechanical reliability of the position
indication system, the absence of leakage currents and the overvoltage withstand capacity between
upstream and downstream connections.
250 A J-Frame
HD
HG
HJ
HL
JD
JG
JJ
Number of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
15150
15150
15150
15150
150250
150250
150250
150250
240 Vac
25
65
100
125
25
65
100
125
480 Vac
18
35
65
100
18
35
65
100
600 Vac
14
18
25
50
14
18
25
50
250 Vdc
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
500 Vdc1
20
20
20
20
UL/CSA/NOM
(kA)
JL
500 Vdc rating applies only to catalog numbers with suffix D81 or D82, meeting UL489SC (Supplement C).
Table 10:
250 A J-Frame
HD
HG
HJ
HL
JD
JG
JJ
Number of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
15150
15150
15150
15150
150250
150250
150250
150250
220/240 Vac
25/25
65/65
100/100
125/125
25/25
65/65
100/100
125/125
380/440/415 Vac
18/18
35/35
65/65
100/100
18/18
35/35
65/65
100/100
500/525 Vac
14/14
18/18
25/25
50/50
14/14
18/18
25/25
50/50
250 Vdc
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
500 Vdc1, 2
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
IEC 60947-2
Icu/Ics (kA)
Insulation Voltage
Ui
750 Vac
750 Vac
Uimp
8 kVac
8 kVac
Operational Voltage
Ue
525 Vac
525 Vac
Rated Current
In
150 A
250 A
Utilization Category
2P in series
500 Vdc rating applies only to catalog numbers with suffix D81 or D82, meeting UL489SC (Supplement C).
JL
11
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
400 Hz Derating
Application of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers at frequencies above 60 Hz requires that special
consideration be given to the effects of high frequency on the circuit breaker characteristics. Thermal
and magnetic operations must be treated separately.
At frequencies below 60 Hz, the thermal rerating of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers is negligible.
However, at frequencies above 60 Hz, thermal rerating is required.
One of the most common high frequency applications is at 400 Hz.
Table 11:
400 Hz Derating
Circuit Breaker
H-Frame
0.95
J-Frame
0.90
For more information, refer to Data Bulletin 0100DB0101, Determining Current Carrying Capacity in
Special Applications.
12
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Altitude
Voltage
1.00
0.95
0.80
Current
1.00
0.99
0.96
Atmospheric Conditions
The materials used in PowerPact circuit breakers will not support the growth of fungus and mold.
Vibration
PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers meet IEC 60068-2-6 Standards for vibration:
2.0 Hz to 25 Hz - amplitude +/- 1.6 mm
Without Current
150 A H-Frame
4000
4000
250 A J-Frame
1000
5000
2P J-Frame
1
HL
JD
JG
JJ
3P H-Frame
JL
HD HG HJ
15150
150250
15150
240
240
480
HG HJ
42
42
65
100
42
42
65
100
18
35
65
3P J-Frame
HL
JD
JG
JJ
JL
150250
480
100
18
35
65
100
13
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113257
Figure 3:
2P
Circuit Breaker
Load
NOTE: Three-pole circuit breakers must be used on three-phase 480 Vac corner-grounded delta
systems. See Figure 2. The outside poles are to be connected to the ungrounded phases and the
grounded conductor connected to the center poles. Connecting the circuit breaker in a manner other
than that described or shown may result in an unsafe application of the circuit breaker.
Three-Phase 480 Vac Corner-Grounded Delta System
06113258
Figure 4:
3P
Circuit Breaker
Load
14
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PowerPact H-Frame 150 A Unit-Mount Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (600 Vac, 250
Vdc) with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Fixed AC
Current Magnetic Trip
Rating
@ 40 C
Hold
Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
80%
Rated
G
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
J
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
L
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
100%
Rated
Terminal Wire
Range
350 A
750 A
HDL26015
HDL26015C HGL26015
HGL26015C HJL26015
HJL26015C HLL26015
HLL26015C
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26020
HDL26020C HGL26020
HGL26020C HJL26020
HJL26020C HLL26020
HLL26020C
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26025
HDL26025C HGL26025
HGL26025C HJL26025
HJL26025C HLL26025
HLL26025C
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL26030
HDL26030C HGL26030
HGL26030C HJL26030
HJL26030C HLL26030
HLL26030C
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26035
HDL26035C HGL26035
HGL26035C HJL26035
HJL26035C HLL26035
HLL26035C
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26040
HDL26040C HGL26040
HGL26040C HJL26040
HJL26040C HLL26040
HLL26040C
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26045
HDL26045C HGL26045
HGL26045C HJL26045
HJL26045C HLL26045
HLL26045C
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL26050
HDL26050C HGL26050
HGL26050C HJL26050
HJL26050C HLL26050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26060
HDL26060C HGL26060
HGL26060C HJL26060
HJL26060C HLL26060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26070
HDL26070C HGL26070
HGL26070C HJL26070
HJL26070C HLL26070
HLL26050C AL150HD
143/0 AWG
HLL26060C Al or Cu
HLL26070C
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26080
HDL26080C HGL26080
HGL26080C HJL26080
HJL26080C HLL26080
HLL26080C
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL26090
HDL26090C HGL26090
HGL26090C HJL26090
HJL26090C HLL26090
HLL26090C
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26100
HDL26100C HGL26100
HGL26100C HJL26100
HJL26100C HLL26100
HLL26100C
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26110
HDL26110C HGL26110
HGL26110C HJL26110
HJL26110C HLL26110
HLL26110C
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26125
HDL26125C HGL26125
HGL26125C HJL26125
HJL26125C HLL26125
HLL26125C
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL26150
HDL26150C HGL26150
HGL26150C HJL26150
HJL26150C HLL26150
HLL26150C
350 A
750 A
HDL36015
HDL36015C HGL36015
HGL36015C HJL36015
HJL36015C HLL36015
HLL36015C
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36020
HDL36020C HGL36020
HGL36020C HJL36020
HJL36020C HLL36020
HLL36020C
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36025
HDL36025C HGL36025
HGL36025C HJL36025
HJL36025C HLL36025
HLL36025C
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36030
HDL36030C HGL36030
HGL36030C HJL36030
HJL36030C HLL36030
HLL36030C
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36035
HDL36035C HGL36035
HGL36035C HJL36035
HJL36035C HLL36035
HLL36035C
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36040
HDL36040C HGL36040
HGL36040C HJL36040
HJL36040C HLL36040
HLL36040C
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36045
HDL36045C HGL36045
HGL36045C HJL36045
HJL36045C HLL36045
HLL36045C
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36050
HDL36050C HGL36050
HGL36050C HJL36050
HJL36050C HLL36050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36060
HDL36060C HGL36060
HGL36060C HJL36060
HJL36060C HLL36060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36070
HDL36070C HGL36070
HGL36070C HJL36070
HJL36070C HLL36070
HLL36050C AL150HD
143/0 AWG
HLL36060C Al or Cu
HLL36070C
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36080
HDL36080C HGL36080
HGL36080C HJL36080
HJL36080C HLL36080
HLL36080C
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36090
HDL36090C HGL36090
HGL36090C HJL36090
HJL36090C HLL36090
HLL36090C
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36100
HDL36100C HGL36100
HGL36100C HJL36100
HJL36100C HLL36100
HLL36100C
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36110
HDL36110C HGL36110
HGL36110C HJL36110
HJL36110C HLL36110
HLL36110C
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36125
HDL36125C HGL36125
HGL36125C HJL36125
HJL36125C HLL36125
HLL36125C
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36150
HDL36150C HGL36150
HGL36150C HJL36150
HJL36150C HLL36150
HLL36150C
15
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PowerPact J-Frame 250 A Unit-Mount Thermal-Magnetic Current Limiting Circuit Breakers with Factory
Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Fixed AC
Current Magnetic Trip
Rating
@ 40 C
Hold
Trip
Interrupting Rating
D
80%
Rated
G
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
J
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
L
100%
Rated
80%
Rated
100%
Rated
Terminal Wire
Range
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150
JDL36150C JGL36150
JGL36150C JJL36150
JJL36150C
JLL36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175
JDL36175C JGL36175
JGL36175C JJL36175
JJL36175C
JLL36175
JLL36150C AL175JD
44/0 AWG
JLL36175C Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200
JDL36200C JGL36200
JGL36200C JJL36200
JJL36200C
JLL36200
JLL36200C
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225
JDL36225C JGL36225
JGL36225C JJL36225
JJL36225C
JLL36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250
JDL36250C JGL36250
JGL36250C JJL36250
JJL36250C
JLL36250
AL250JD
JLL36225C 3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
JLL36250C
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150
JDL36150C JGL36150
JGL36150C JJL36150
JJL36150C
JLL36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175
JDL36175C JGL36175
JGL36175C JJL36175
JJL36175C
JLL36175
JLL36150C AL175JD
44/0 AWG
JLL36175C Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200
JDL36200C JGL36200
JGL36200C JJL36200
JJL36200C
JLL36200
JLL36200C
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225
JDL36225C JGL36225
JGL36225C JJL36225
JJL36225C
JLL36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250
JDL36250C JGL36250
JGL36250C JJL36250
JJL36250C
JLL36250
AL250JD
JLL36225C 3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
JLL36250C
16
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Current
Rating @
40 C
Trip
Interrupting Rating1
D
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
Terminal Wire
Range
350 A
750 A
HDA26015( )
HGA26015( )
HJA26015( )
HLA26015( )
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26020( )
HGA26020( )
HJA26020( )
HLA26020( )
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26025( )
HGA26025( )
HJA26025( )
HLA26025( )
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDA26030( )
HGA26030( )
HJA26030( )
HLA26030( )
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26035( )
HGA26035( )
HJA26035( )
HLA26035( )
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26040( )
HGA26040( )
HJA26040( )
HLA26040( )
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26045( )
HGA26045( )
HJA26045( )
HLA26045( )
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDA26050( )
HGA26050( )
HJA26050( )
HLA26050( )
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26060( )
HGA26060( )
HJA26060( )
HLA26060( )
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26070( )
HGA26070( )
HJA26070( )
HLA26070( )
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26080( )
HGA26080( )
HJA26080( )
HLA26080( )
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA26090( )
HGA26090( )
HJA26090( )
HLA26090( )
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26100( )
HGA26100( )
HJA26100( )
HLA26100( )
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26110( )
HGA26110( )
HJA26110( )
HLA26110( )
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26125( )
HGA26125( )
HJA26125( )
HLA26125( )
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA26150( )
HGA26150( )
HJA26150( )
HLA26150( )
AL150HD
14-3/0 AWG
Al or Cu
350 A
750 A
HDA36015
HGA36015
HJA36015
HLA36015
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36020
HGA36020
HJA36020
HLA36020
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36025
HGA36025
HJA36025
HLA36025
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDA36030
HGA36030
HJA36030
HLA36030
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36035
HGA36035
HJA36035
HLA36035
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36040
HGA36040
HJA36040
HLA36040
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36045
HGA36045
HJA36045
HLA36045
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDA36050
HGA36050
HJA36050
HLA36050
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36060
HGA36060
HJA36060
HLA36060
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36070
HGA36070
HJA36070
HLA36070
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36080
HGA36080
HJA36080
HLA36080
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDA36090
HGA36090
HJA36090
HLA36090
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36100
HGA36100
HJA36100
HLA36100
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36110
HGA36110
HJA36110
HLA36110
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36125
HGA36125
HJA36125
HLA36125
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDA36150
HGA36150
HJA36150
HLA36150
AL150HD
14-3/0 AWG
Al or Cu
( ) Indicate phasing
17
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Current
Rating
@ 40 C
Trip
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
80% Rated
Terminal
Wire Range
750 A
1500 A
JDA36150( )
JGA36150( )
JJA36150( )
JLA36150( )
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDA36175( )
JGA36175( )
JJA36175( )
JLA36175( )
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDA36200( )
JGA36200( )
JJA36200( )
JLA36200( )
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDA36225( )
JGA36225( )
JJA36225( )
JLA36225( )
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDA36250( )
JGA36250( )
JJA36250( )
JLA36250( )
AL175JD
4-4/0 AWG
Al or Cu
AL250JD
3/0 AWG-350
kcmil
Al or Cu
750 A
1500 A
JDA36150
JGA36150
JJA36150
JLA36150
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDA36175
JGA36175
JJA36175
JLA36175
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDA36200
JGA36200
JJA36200
JLA36200
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDA36225
JGA36225
JJA36225
JLA36225
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDA36250
JGA36250
JJA36250
JLA36250
AL175JD
4-4/0 AWG
Al or Cu
AL250JD
3/0 AWG-350
kcmil
Al or Cu
( ) Indicate phasing
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting Rating
D
Hold
Trip
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
15 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36015T
HGL36015T
HJL36015T
HLL36015T
20 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36020T
HGL36020T
HJL36020T
HLL36020T
25 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36025T
HGL36025T
HJL36025T
HLL36025T
30 A
350 A
750 A
HDL36030T
HGL36030T
HJL36030T
HLL36030T
35 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36035T
HGL36035T
HJL36035T
HLL36035T
40 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36040T
HGL36040T
HJL36040T
HLL36040T
45 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36045T
HGL36045T
HJL36045T
HLL36045T
50 A
400 A
850 A
HDL36050T
HGL36050T
HJL36050T
HLL36050T
60 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36060T
HGL36060T
HJL36060T
HLL36060T
70 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36070T
HGL36070T
HJL36070T
HLL36070T
80 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36080T
HGL36080T
HJL36080T
HLL36080T
90 A
800 A
1450 A
HDL36090T
HGL36090T
HJL36090T
HLL36090T
100 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36100T
HGL36100T
HJL36100T
HLL36100T
110 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36110T
HGL36110T
HJL36110T
HLL36110T
125 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36125T
HGL36125T
HJL36125T
HLL36125T
150 A
900 A
1700 A
HDL36150T
HGL36150T
HJL36150T
HLL36150T
Terminal
Wire Range
AL150HD
143/0 AWG
Al or Cu
Circuit breakers will be labeled with Line and Load markings and are not suitable for reverse connections.
Only available on standard (80%) rated 3P unit-mount circuit breakers; not available with I-Line or Plug-In constructions.
18
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting Rating
D
Terminal
Wire Range
Low
High
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
150 A
750 A
1500 A
JDL36150T
JGL36150T
JJL36150T
JLL36150T
AL175JD
175 A
875 A
1750 A
JDL36175T
JGL36175T
JJL36175T
JLL36175T
4--4/0 AWG Al or Cu
200 A
1000 A
2000 A
JDL36200T
JGL36200T
JJL36200T
JLL36200T
225 A
1125 A
2250 A
JDL36225T
JGL36225T
JJL36225T
JLL36225T
250 A
1250 A
2500 A
JDL36250T
JGL36250T
JJL36250T
JLL36250T
AL250JD
3/0 AWG350 kcmil
Al or Cu
Circuit breakers will be labeled with Line and Load markings and are not suitable for reverse connections.
Only available on standard (80%) rated 3P unit-mount circuit breakers; not available with I-Line or Plug-In constructions.
Table 21:
H-Frame 150A and J-Frame 250 A 3P Basic Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Frame
Without Terminations or Trip Unit (600 Vac, 250 Vdc)
Interrupting Rating
H-Frame
J-Frame
Table 22:
Trip Unit
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
1560 A
HDF36000F06
HGF36000F06
HJF36000F06
HLF36000F06
70150 A
HDF36000F15
HGF36000F15
HJF36000F15
HLF36000F15
150250 A
JDF36000F25
JGF36000F25
JJF36000F25
JLF36000F25
1560 A H-Frame
H-Frame
70150 A H-Frame
150250 A J-Frame
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
Amperage
Cat. No.
15 A
HT3015
70 A
HT3070
150 A
JT3150
20 A
HT3020
80 A
HT3080
175 A
JT3175
25 A
HT3025
90 A
HT3090
200 A
JT3200
30 A
HT3030
100 A
HT3100
225 A
JT3225
35 A
HT3035
110 A
HT3110
250 A
JT3250
40 A
HT3040
125 A
HT3125
45 A
HT3045
150 A
HT3150
50 A
HT3050
60 A
HT3060
19
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CAUTION/PRECAUCION/
ATTENTION
Connect only as shown/Conectar solo asi/
Francher seulement comme suit:
300 V
300 V
600 V MAX.
or
MAX.
MAX.
o
ou
Load/Carga/
Charge
Load/Carga/
Charge
Ampere
Rating
Circuit Breaker
Cat. No.
Low
High
100 A
JGL37100D81
400
600
125 A
JGL37125D81
400
600
150 A
JGL37150D81
400
600
175 A
JGL37175D81
400
600
200 A
JGL37200D82
500
850
225 A
JGL37225D82
500
850
250 A
JGL37250D82
500
850
Interrupting Rating
@ 500 Vdc
20 k AIR
20 k AIR
20
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113533
Standard
dard
Stan
ient
gy Effic ace
Energie Efficente
Energia Efici
Ener
Energy Efficient
Energie Efficace
Energia Eficiente
Auto Setting
Motor Type / Tipo de Motor / Type de Moteur
06114001
Standard
t
Dampening for
Motor In-Rush
Energy Efficient
Energie Efficace
Energia Eficiente
I
Manual Protection Settings
The manual settings may be adjusted to multiples of current based on the dial setting for motor Full
Load Amps (FLA).
Instantaneous
= (FLA) x (Im)
Trip Point
21
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
t
Im
180 Amps
Frame
H-Frame
J-Frame
Current
Full Load
Amperes
Range
Adjustable
Instantaneous
Trip Range
Suffix
J Interrupting
(See SCCR Table
Below)
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
30 A
1.525 A
9325 A
M71
HJL36030M71
HLL36030M71
L Interrupting
(See SCCR Table
Below)
50 A
1442 A
84546 A
M72
HJL36050M72
HLL36050M72
100 A
3080 A
1801040 A
M73
HJL36100M73
HLL36100M73
150 A
58130 A
3481690 A
M74
HJL36150M74
HLL36150M74
250 A
114217 A
6842500 A
M75
JJL36250M75
JLL36250M75
Table 25:
Contactor/Starter
J Interrupting
L Interrupting
200240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
200240 Vac
480 Vac
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
100 kA
100 kA
600 Vac
50 kA
NEMA Type S
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
100 kA
100 kA
50 kA
22
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Table 26:
Horsepower Rating of Induction-Type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Motors 3 60 Hz NEC Full Load
Amperes
Starter Size
200 Vac
230 Vac
480 Vac
575 Vac
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
3/4
1
1/2
1-1/2
1/2
2
1-1/2
00
3/4
2
3/4
3
1
1
3
1-1/2
5
2
1-1/2
5
2
7-1/2
3
3
7-1/2
10
10
5
1
15
5
15
7-1/2
20
7-1/2
20
25
10
30
10
25
30
40
15
15
40
50
20
20
60
50
25
60
75
25
30
30
75
100
40
40
100
125
50
150
50
60
125
60
150
75
75
200
100
Shaded area is not covered by J-frame electronic motor circuit protector.
200
0.9 A
1.1 A
1.3 A
1.7 A
2.1 A
2.2 A
2.4 A
2.5 A
2.7 A
3A
3.2 A
3.4 A
3.7 A
3.9 A
4.2 A
4.8 A
4.8 A
6A
6.1 A
6.8 A
6.9 A
7.6 A
7.8 A
9A
9.6 A
11 A
14 A
15.2 A
17 A
17.5 A
21 A
22 A
25.3 A
27 A
28 A
32 A
32.2 A
34 A
40 A
41 A
42 A
48.3 A
52 A
54 A
62 A
65 A
68 A
77 A
78.2 A
80 A
92 A
96 A
99 A
104 A
120 A
124 A
125 A
130 A
144 A
150 A
154 A
156 A
177.1 A
180 A
192 A
221 A
240 A
248 A
HJL36030M71
and
HLL36030M71
1/210 hp
HJL36050M72
and
HLL36050M72
1025 hp
HJL36100M73
and
HLL36100M73
1550 hp
HJL36150M74
and
HLL36150M74
30100 hp
JJL36250M75
and
JLL36250M75
50150 hp
23
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Table 27:
H-Frame
Interrupting Performance
Poles
Catalog Number
UL 489
Withstand Ratings
2P
3P
2P1
2P1
3P
3P
2P1
3P
150 A
175 A
JLL36000S17
250 A
JLL36000S25
240 Vac 65 kA
65 kA
125 kA
125 kA
65 kA
65 kA
125 kA
125 kA
480 Vac 35 kA
35 kA
100 kA
100 kA
35 kA
35 kA
100 kA
100 kA
600 Vac 18 kA
18 kA
50 kA
50 kA
18 kA
18 kA
50 kA
50 kA
250 Vdc 20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
20 kA
AC Trip Point
2250 A
2250 A
2250 A
2250 A
3125 A
3125 A
3125 A
3125 A
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
525 Vac
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
500 Vdc
Rated Impulse
IEC
Withstand Voltage
60947-3
Rated Operational ac
Voltage
dc
1
J-Frame
Table 28:
Poles
3
1
L Interrupting
Ampere G Interrupting
Terminal
Rating
Cat. No.
Trip Point Cat. No.
Trip Point
Wire Range
150 A
HGL26000S151
2250 A
HLL26000S15
2250A
AL150HD
175 A
JGL26000S17
3125 A
JLL26000S17
3125 A
AL175JD
250 A
JGL26000S25
3125 A
JLL26000S25
3125 A
AL250JD
150 A
HGL36000S15
2250 A
HLL36000S15
2250 A
AL150HD
175 A
JGL36000S17
3125A
JLL36000S17
3125 A
AL175JD
250 A
JGL36000S25
3125A
JLL36000S25
3125 A
AL250JD
24
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PowerPact H-Frame and J-Frame I-Line Automatic Molded Case Switches, 600 Vac
with Factory Sealed Trip Unit (Suitable for Reverse Connection)
Ampere 2-pole
Rating Cat. No.
3-pole
Withstand Rating 1
Cat. No.
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
65
35
18
1300 A
65
35
18
2500 A
125
100
50
1300 A
Trip
Point
G Interrupting
150 A
HGA26000S15( )2
HGA36000S15
175 A
JGA26000S17( )
JGA36000S17
250 A
JGA26000S25( )
JGA36000S25
AL150HD
#14#3/0 AWG Al or Cu
AL250JD
#3/0350 kcmil Al or Cu
L Interrupting
150 A
HLA26000S15( )
HLA36000S15
175 A
HLA26000S17( )
JLA36000S17
250 A
JLA26000S25( )
JLA36000S25
125
100
50
AL150HD
#14#3/0 AWG Al or Cu
1300 A
AL250JD
2500 A
#3/0350 kcmil Al or Cu
The withstand rating is the fault current, at rated voltage, that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when
protected by a circuit breaker or fuse with an equal continuous current rating.
2-pole device with 3 in. (76 mm) mounting height, all other 2-pole circuit breakers use 3-pole module 4.5 in. (114 mm) mounting
height.
25
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Table 30:
I-Line
Drawout
Lug-Lug
Rear
Bus Bar
H-Frame
J-Frame
Mounting
H- and J-frame circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any
derating of characteristics.
Fixed-mounted H- and J-frame individually-mounted circuit breakers are supplied with two mounting
screws. These mounting screws are inserted through mounting holes molded into the circuit breaker
case and threaded into the mounting enclosure, rails or through the panel door for flush mounting.
A DIN rail mounting bracket (catalog no. S29305) is available for the H- and J-frame circuit breakers .
NOTE: DIN rail mounting is not compatible with motor operated applications.
06113275
Unit-Mounting Options
06113273
06113274
Figure 6:
Mounting on Rails
Mounting on Backplate
Flush Mounting
26
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113276
Mechanical Lugs
Unit-mount H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers can be ordered with mechanical line and load side
lugs. The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of compression-type lugs or bus
connections. All lugs are UL Listed for their proper application and marked for use with aluminum and
copper (Al/Cu) or copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable for copper and aluminum conductors are
made of tin-plated aluminum. Lugs suitable for use with copper conductors only are made of copper.
Mechanical Lugs for the H- and J-frame circuit breakers lay on top of the circuit breaker terminals and
can be installed without the use of any tools. The lugs are held in place with snap features built into the
insulative retainer and are secured with the clamp force applied to the wire binding screw.
Mechanical lugs come in both aluminum and copper versions and are sold either factory installed or as
field installable kits.
Table 31:
Frame
Ampere
Conductor
Range
06113289
HD/HG/HJ/HL 15150
Al/Cu
06113293
06113292
06113291
06113290
(1095 mm2)
Cu
AL175JD
JD/JG/JJ/JL
150175
Al/Cu
AL250JD1 JD/JG/JJ/JL
200250
Al/Cu
CU250JD
150250
Cu
JD/JG/JJ/JL
(1)44/0 AWG
(2095 mm2)
Wire
Strip Binding
Temp.
Length Screw
Torque
75C
75C
75C
75C
75C
75C
0.65 in.
50 lb-in
120 lb-in
0.65 in.
120 lb-in
1.0 in.
225 lb-in
1.0 in.
225 lb-in
1.0 in.
250 lb-in
27
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Terminal Nuts for Bus Bar Connection of H-Frame and J-Frame Circuit Breakers
06113279
Description
Frame
Tap
Cat. No.
HD/HG/HJ/HL
1/4-20
S37425
HD/HG/HJ/HL
1/4-20
S37444
HD/HG/HJ/HL
M6
S37426
JD/JG/JJ/JL
1/4-20
S37427
JD/JG/JJ/JL
1/4-20
S37445
JD/JG/JJ/JL
M8
S37428
Torque
8090 lb-in
(910.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(910.2 Nm)
Bar Dimensions
Dimension
H-Frame
J-Frame
0.250 in.
(6.4 mm)
0.3125 in.
(7.9 mm)
0.1250.375 in.
(3.29.5 mm)
0.1250.375 in.
(3.2.5 mm)
0.50 in.
(12.7 mm)
0.500.75 in.
(12.71.1 mm)
0.3 in.
(7.6 mm)
0.625 in.
(15.9 mm)
0.3 in.
(7.6 mm)
0.375 in.
(9.5 mm)
B
06113283
Table 33:
D
A
E
= =
Voltage Takeoff (Control Wire Terminals) for Mechanical Lugs and Terminal Nuts
06113294
Mechanical lugs may be equipped with a separate control wire termination. The kit is available factory
installed or as a field installable kit. The adaptor is secured underneath the lug and has a tab extension
suitable for attachment of a .250 inch slip-on connector.
Fully insulated type connectors must be used to prevent live parts from extending into the wiring gutter
area.
Table 34:
06114127
Frame
Cat. No.
HD/HG/HJ/HL
S37423
JD/JG/JJ/JL
S37424
HD/HG/HJ/HL
S37429
JD/JG/JJ/JL
S37430
Mechanical Lugs
Bussbar Connection
28
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113295
Table 35:
H-Frame
H-Frame
J-Frame
Kit Number
PDC6HD6
PDC3HD2
PDC6JD4
06113299
06113298
06113297
06113296
Frame
J-Frame
Number of Wires
Wire Range
86 AWG
(1016 mm2)
25 lb-in
(2.8 Nm)
1410 AWG
(2.56 mm2)
20 lb-in
(2.3 Nm)
62 AWG
(1635 mm2)
40 lb-in
(4.5 Nm)
148 AWG
(2.510 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
64 AWG
(1625 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
8 AWG
(10 mm2)
25 lb-in
(2.8 Nm)
1410 AWG
(2.56 mm2)
20 lb-in
(2.3 Nm)
146 AWG Cu
(2.516 mm2)
35 lb-in
(4.0 Nm)
and 1
32/0 AWG Cu
(3570 mm2)
50 lb-in
(5.6 Nm)
41 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
40 lb-in
(4.5 Nm)
and 1
32/0 AWG Cu
(3570 mm2)
50 lb-in
(5.6 Nm)
PDC3JD20
29
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113300
Lug
Type
62 AWG Cu or Al
YA060HD
(1635 mm2)
H-Frame
1/04/0 AWG Cu or Al
YA150HD
(5095 mm2)
Aluminum
13/0 AWG Cu or Al
06113302
YA150JD
(5095 mm2)
J-Frame
06113303
YA250J35
(95185 mm2)
CYA060HD
H-Frame
CYA150HD
Copper
CYA150JD
06113304
Ampere Lugs
Mounting
Rating Per Kit Screw Torque
J-Frame
CYA250J3
61/0 AWG Cu
(1650 mm2)
42/0 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
42/0 AWG Cu
(2570 mm2)
2/0 AWG300 kcmil Cu
(70185 mm2)
60 A
150 A
200 A
250 A
60 A
150 A
150 A
250 A
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
8090 lb-in
(9.010.2 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
130140 lb-in
(14.715.8 Nm)
Terminal Shields
Table 37:
06113493
Used With
Mechanical Lugs
Qty
Cat. No. Per
Kit
Description
Short Lug
Shield1
Frame
H-Frame 60 A
3 AWG
S37446
Dimension B (in.)
0.50
H-Frame 150 A
3/0 AWG
S37447
0.50
J-Frame
350 kcmil
S37448
0.24
Phase barrier or
terminal shield
extension past end
of circuit breaker
B See Table
Compatible with:
Compression Lugs
06113494
Power
Distribution
Connectors and
Compression
Lugs
PDC
H-Frame
Long Lug
Shield
J-Frame
Long Lug
Shield
Phase Barriers
Copper
PDC6HD6
YA060HD
CYA060HD
PDC3HD2
YA150HD
CYA150HD
PDC6JD4
YA150JD
CYA150JD
PDC3JD2
CYA250J3
S374492
2.24
S374502
1.68
29329
3.13
Extremity
of
Molded Case
w/Mechanical
Lugs
B See Table
Short lug shields provide IP20 protection for mechanical lugs and are compatible with control wire terminals.
J-frame terminal shield is not compatible with the YA250J35 compression terminal.
06114129
Aluminum
30
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
45 Angle
06113278
Horizontal
06113277
Figure 7:
Table 38:
Rear Connections
H-Frame
Device
Description
Poles
S37432
2 or 3
S374331
2 or 3
S37434
S37439
S37436
S37440
Consisting of:
1
J-Frame
2x
S37437
2x
S374381
06113282
H- and J-frame circuit breakers are available in I-Line construction for easy installation and removal in
I-Line panelboards and switchboards.
I-Line circuit breakers use blow-on type line side connectors. In case of a short circuit, increased
magnetic flux causes the plug-on connectors of the circuit breaker to tighten their grasp on the
panelboard or switchboard bus bars. The I-Line connectors and circuit breaker mounting bracket are
integral parts of I-Line circuit breakers and cannot be removed or replaced. I-Line circuit breakers
come with mechanical load side lugs.
Table 39:
2P Example
AB
HDA261501
AC
HDA261502
BA
HDA261503
BC
HDA261504
CA
HDA261505
CB
HDA261506
Standard
ABC
HDA36150
CBA
HDA361506
3P Example
31
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
The plug-in base is mounted through a front panel. The plug-in configuration makes it possible to:
Extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections
Allow for addition of future circuits at a later date
When the circuit breaker is in the connected position, the primary voltage is fed through the circuit
breaker by means of multiple finger disconnects. Control voltage of internal accessories is provided
through secondary disconnects.
06113284
06113311
Drawout Mounting
Primary
Disconnects
Plug-In Mounting
6
4
5
8
9
7
8
Secondary
Disconnects
06113285
Figure 8:
Table 40:
Mounting Through
a Front Panel
Mounting on Rails
Plug-In Mounting
Description
Suffix
Catalog No.
Kit for Compact NSF Circuit Breaker (Stationary and Moving Part)
29293
Stationary Part
29278
Plug-In Base
Consisting of:
Moving Part
Short Terminal Covers
HJ00
29321
29270
Power Connections
29268 (3)
32
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Removed
06113288
Connected
Table 41:
Drawout Mounting
Description
Suffix
Catalog No.
Kit for Compact NSF Circuit Breaker (Stationary and Moving Part)
29293
Stationary Part
29278
HJ00
29321
Plug-In Base
Fixed Part of Chassis
Consisting of:
Moving Part
Moving Part of Chassis
Short Terminal Covers
Toggle Collar
Table 42:
29282
29282
29270
Power Connections
29268 (3)
Description
Secondary
Disconnecting
Blocks
pus
h
to
Shutters
Chassis
Accessories
Catalog No.
Fixed Part
Moving Part
9-Wire Connector
29273
9-Wire Connector
29274
29275
29271
29286
29287
Chassis Functions
All functions of the plug-in base, plus:
Disconnected position: the power circuit is disconnected, the circuit breaker is simply withdrawn
and may still be operated (ON (I), OFF (O), push-to-trip)
Circuit breaker may be locked using one to three padlockspadlock diameters 0.190.31 in.
(58 mm)
33
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Section 3Accessories
Internal Accessories
Field-installable accessories provide flexibility for installation at point of use.
Auxiliary switches and the shunt trip or undervoltage release are easy to install, reliable and common
to many PowerPact circuit breakers.
Figure 10:
Accessory Locations
(OF1) Auxiliary Switch
06113305
SDE Adapter
Table 43:
Poles
Device
2P (HD + HG)1
3P
Combination
Accessory Connections
Electrical accessories are fitted with numbered terminal blocks for wires with the following maximum size:
16 AWG (1.5 mm2) for auxiliary switches (OF1 or OF2), and shunt trip (MX) or undervoltage trip (MN)
Auxiliary circuit wiring exits fixed mounted devices through a knock-out in the front cover.
Accessory Connections
06164128
Figure 11:
C2
T
C1
/SH
MX
0V
200/24
34
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Applications
OF/SD Switch
Bell alarm indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or ground fault, the
operation of a shunt trip or undervoltage trip or the push-to-trip button
Resets when the circuit breaker is reset
Indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or ground fault
Resets when the circuit breaker is reset
The above auxiliary switches are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g.,
for controlling PLCs or electronic circuits).
SDE
Installation &
Connection
The OF, SD and SDE switches snap into cavities behind the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker
One model serves for all indication functions depending on where it is fitted in the circuit breaker
The SDE function of a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit requires the SDE adapter
Standards
The internal accessories comply with requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
UL 489 and Canadian Standard Association C22.2 No. 5-02 Standards
All internal accessories are Listed for fixed installation per UL file E103955 and Certified under CSA file LR 69561
Auxiliary switches comply with UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5-02 and IEC 60947-5 Standards
Low-level switches are not UL Recognized
Table 44:
Electrical Characteristics
Standard
(Silver Contacts)
Low-Level
(Gold Contacts)
240/380
6A
5A
480
6A
5A
600/690
6A
24/48
2.5 A
2.5 A
240
0.5 A
0.8 A
380
0.3 A
0.3 A
Characteristic
Voltage
Vdc
Low-level (1 mA/4 V minimum load with a maximum current and voltage of 100 mA 10 V.
Breaking Capacity
at a Power Factor (p.f.) of 0.3
NOTE: NOTE: If the maximum voltage and current is exceeded, the low-level function of the switch will
be lost but the switch will continue to function as a standard switch with the following specifications.
Vac
Vdc
Table 45:
24/48
5A
240
5A
380
5A
24/48
5/2.5 A
125
0.5 A
250
0.3 A
Auxiliary Switch
Factory-Installed Suffix
Contacts
Factory-Installed Suffix
BC
S29450
1A/1B Standard
AA
S29450
BH
S29452
2A/2B Standard
AB
S29450 (2)
SDE Standard1
BD
S29450 + S29451
1A/1B Gold
AE
S29482
SDE Low-level1
BJ
S29452 + S29451
2A/2B Gold
AF
S29482 (2)
BE
BK
35
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Applications
Installation and
Connection
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold
Drops out between 35% and 70% of the rated voltage
Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 85% of the rated voltage
Permanent type
If an undervoltage condition exists, operation of the closing mechanism of the circuit breaker will not
permit the main contacts to touch, even momentarily. This is commonly called Kiss Free
Accessories are common to H- and J-frame circuit breakers and snap into cavities under the front
accessory cover of the circuit breaker
Each terminal may be connected by one #18#14 AWG (1.02.5 mm2) stranded copper wire
Operation
Table 46:
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 70% of its rated voltage
Impulse type 20 ms or maintained control signals
AC shunt trips are suitable for ground fault protection when combined with a Class I ground fault
sensing element
The circuit breaker must be reset locally after being tripped by shunt trip or undervoltage trip (MN or MX)
MN or MX tripping has priority over manual (or motor operator) closing; in the presence of a standing trip
order such an action does not result in any closing, even temporarily, of the main contacts
Endurance: 50% of the rated mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker for circuit breakers
Electrical Characteristics
Description
AC
Consumption
Seal-in (MN)
Table 47:
Voltage
DC
< 10 VA
<5W
< 5 VA
<5W
< 50
< 50
Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Trip Suffix Codes and Kit Numbers
Shunt Trip
Factory-Installed Suffix Field-Installable Kit No. Factory-Installed Suffix Field-Installable Kit No.
24 Vac
SK
S29384
UK
S29404
48 Vac
SL
S29385
UL
S29405
120 Vac
SA
S29386
UA
S29406
208-277 Vac
SD
S29387
UD
S29407
380-480 Vac
SH
S29388
UH
S29408
525-600 Vac
SJ
S29389
UJ
S29409
12 Vdc
SN
S29382
UN
S29402
24 Vdc
SO
S29390
UO
S29410
30 Vdc
SU
S29391
UU
S29411
48 Vdc
SP
S29392
UP
S29412
60 Vdc
SV
S29383
UV
S29403
125 Vdc
SR
S29393
UR
S29413
250 Vdc
SS
S29394
US
S29414
36
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
The Micrologic Ground-Fault Moduel (GFM) is a UL Listed circuit breaker accessory which protects
equipment from damage caused by ground faults. It is an add-on module which, when connected to a
PowerPact H- or J-frame circuit breaker, provides ground-fault sensing and ground-fault relay
functions.
HD/JD ground-fault modules feature:
Ground-Fault Module
Modulo de falla a tierra
Module de dfaut de mise la terre
GFM150HD
60A
40A
80A
1
4068715 H238
20A
52H
4
3
Fault-powered (via the sensing current transformer) for electronics, shunt trip, and integral test
feature. Meets NEC 230-95(c).
A 12 Vdc shunt trip module (Catalog No. S29382) is required in the circuit breaker. This may be
field installed or factory installed when the circuit breaker is ordered with an -SN suffix.
LISTED
Circuit
Breaker
Accessory
100A
ault Indicator
Ground-Fault Indicator
Push-to-test
Delay Band
Pick-up
Push to reset
Requires 120 V
1=min.
Pousser pour rinitialiser
Class I Ground-fault Protection
Indicador de falla a tierra
Proteccin de falla a tierra clase I
Oprima para restablecer
Protection de dfaut de mise la terre classe I
Indicateur de dfaut de
mise la terre
max.
Replace cover after adjusting/Replacer le couvercle avant aprs le rglage/Vuelva a colocar la cubierta despus de ajustar
DANGER PELIGRO
! DANGER PELIGRO
Table 48:
Ground-Fault Module
Catalog No.
Rating
Sensitivity
GFM150HD
150 A
GFM250JD
250 A
37
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
All ELMs are supplied for I-Line mounting and are easily convertible to unit-mount by removing
the I-Line mounting feet
Three poles; 240 to 600 Vac maximum: 3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral) and 1-phase, 2-wire
applications
Line-power obtained through internal bus to provide power for electronics, shunt trip, and integral
test feature.
A shunt trip is required in the circuit breaker; it may be field-installed or factory-installed in the
PowerPact H and J circuit breakers.
Table 49:
Size
Enclosure Space
Required I-Line
Switchboard
15150 A
LA
ELM150HD
150250 A
LA
ELM250JD
Catalog
Number
Pick-Up
Adjustments
Ground-Fault
Time Delay
Adjustments
30 mA
100 mA
300 mA
1A
3A
Instantaneous
60 ms
100 ms
500 msec
At 250 A, the ELM250JD can be used with 80% rated circuit breakers only.
38
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Motor Operator
The motor operator remotely operates the circuit breaker featuring easy and sure operation:
All circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible, including trip unit
settings and circuit breaker connection
Applications
Installation and
Connection
All installation (fixed, plug-in/drawout mounting) and connection capabilities are maintained
Connections of the motor operator module are to a built-in terminal block behind its front cover
Stranded copper wire 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
The motor operator is connected in series with the overcurrent (SDE) trip switch. (The SDE adapter is
included with the motor operator.) See wiring diagrams on page 44.
Automatic
Operation
Manual
Operation
Table 50:
ON (I) and OFF (O) by two impulse type or continuous control signals
Depending on the wiring, resetting can be done locally, remotely or automatically
Optional manual reset if tripping due to an electrical fault (with SDE)
Anti-pumping feature.
Opening
< 500
Closing
< 80
4
4860
110130
AC 50/60 Hz
208277
380480
Control Voltage
2430
4860
DC
110130
250
Consumption
AC (VA)
Opening/Closing
500
DC (W)
Opening/Closing
500
700
Operating Voltage
85110% rated
Table 51:
Voltage
J-Frame
48/60 Vac
ML
S29440
S31548
120 Vac
MA
S29433
S31540
277 Vac
MD
S29434
S31541
380/480 Vac
MH
S29435
S31542
24/30 Vdc
MO
S29436
S31543
48/60 Vdc
MP
S29437
S31544
110/130 Vdc
MR
S29438
S31545
250 Vdc
MS
S29439
S31546
Manual Mode
Switch
39
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
The directly mounted rotary operating handle replaces the circuit breaker front accessory cover (secured by screws).
The direct rotary handle maintains:
Operation
Models
I/ON
(Closed)
Tripped
O/OFF
(Open)
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
Machine tool control; complies with CNOMO E03.81.501N; degree of protection IP54
Early make or early break contacts may be installed into direct mount rotary handle
Variations
Standards
The directly-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA Certified under file LR 69561
Installation
A unit that replaces the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the
circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
An adjustable extension shaft
The handle mechanism can be used in NEMA 3R and 12 enclosure applications
The door mounted operating handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed in enclosure from the
front. The door mounted operating handle maintains:
Operation
Door Mounted Rotary
Operating Handle
Shaft
Length
Models
Variations
For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a telescopic shaft containing
two stable positions
Standards
The extended rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA Certified under file LR 69561
Table 52:
RD10
S29337
RE10
S29338
Telescoping (black)
RT10
S29343
RD20
S29339
RE20
S29340
40
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Installation
A mounting plate that provides a rotary actuator for a standard toggle circuit breaker
Handle assemblies available for NEMA 3, 3R, 4, and 4X
Available in standard or short (3 in.) handle assemblies
The door mounted operating handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed in enclosure from the front.
Operation
Shaft Length
Table 53:
Description
Catalog Number
9421LJ1
9421LJ4
Table 54:
Component Parts
Description
Catalog Number
Type 1, 3R, 12
9421LH6
9421LH48
9421LC48
Operating Mechanism
Includes Lockout
9421LJ7
Standard Shaft
9421LS8
Long Shaft
9421LS10
The circuit breaker may be locked in the off position by one to three padlocks
Door can be locked closed due to interlocking features of the handle operator
Handle is mounted on flange of enclosure using specified mounting dimensions while circuit breaker and
operating mechanism are mounted to inside of enclosure using two screws
Cable lengths available in 3-, 5- or 10-foot lengths to accommodate a variety of mounting locations
Handles are available in painted Nema 1, 3, 3R, 4 (sheet steel) and 12 ratings or chrome (Nema 4, 4x)
Applications
Installation
Table 55:
Class 9422
Cable Mechanisms
06113534
Cable Mechanism
Length
Catalog
Number
36 in.
9422CSF30
60 in.
9422CSF50
84 in.
9422CSF70
120 in.
9422CSF10
1.00
(25)
4.69
9.12
(119)
(232)
D
1.44
(37)
in.
Dimensions:
4.25
[mm]
(108)
Note: Bend radius in cable must never be less than 6 in. (152 mm). Electrical
clearances must be maintained between cable and live electrical parts.
41
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
06113535
Designed for installation in custom built control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective
devices are required.
All circuit breaker operating mechanisms are suitable for either right- or left-hand flange mounting,
convertible on the job.
Table 56:
Square D circuit breaker enclosures are UL Listed, CSA Certified and are suitable for use as
service entrance equipment, except as footnoted.
The short circuit rating of an enclosed circuit breaker is equal to the rating of the circuit breaker
installed, except as footnoted.
Circuit breakers are ordered and shipped separately for field installation.
Enclosure Dimensions
1.00 MIN
[25,4]
48996-053-01
1.00 MIN
[25,4]
00 MIN
4.00 MIN
[101,6]
Circuit
Breaker
Amperage
H-Frame
15150 A
J-Frame
150250 A
Enclosure Dimensions (h x w x d)
80%
100%
62 x 14 x 22.5 in.
(572 x 356 x 1575 mm)
62 x 14 x 22.6 in.
4.00 MIN
[101,6]
d
h
Table 57:
Rating
NEMA 1
Flush
Poles
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
15150 A
2, 3
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
150250 A
2, 3
J250F
NEMA 1
Surface
NEMA
3R1
NEMA 4, 4X, 5, 3, 3R
Stainless Steel
NEMA 12/3R, 5
(Without Knockouts)2
J250S
J250R
J250DS
J250AWK
HDL
15100 A
HD100S3, 4, 5
JDL
150250 A
JD250S3, 5, 6
Enclosures with NRB or RB suffix have provisions for 3/4 in. through 2-1/2 in. bolt-on hubs in top endwall. Enclosures with R suffix have blank endwalls and require
field cut opening. For details and hub catalog numbers see Digest 174 page 3-9.
Suitable for rainproof NEMA 3R application by removing drain screw from bottom endwall.
42
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Dimensions
Approximate Dimension
Series
HD100S
A01
17.00 in.
431.8 mm
7.90 in.
200.7 mm
4.75 in.
120.7 mm
J250F
A01
32.40 in.
823 mm
15.40 in.
391 mm
6.00 in.
152 mm
J250S
A01
31.36 in.
797 mm
14.36 in.
365 mm
6.00 in.
152 mm
J250R
A01
31.05 in.
789 mm
14.47 in.
368 mm
6.28 in.
160 mm
J250DS
A01
32.26 in.
819 mm
9.72 in.
247 mm
7.94 in.
202 mm
J250AWK
A01
32.26 in.
819 mm
9.72 in.
247 mm
7.94 in.
202 mm
Table 59:
W
W
D
WB enclosure
uses 2 circuit breakers
NEMA Type 1
Circuit Breaker
NEMA 1 & 3R
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
15100 A
SN100FA
SN100FA
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL
125150 A
SN400LA
SN400LA
(2) 1600 or
(4) 1250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4300 Al/Cu
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
150250 A
SN400LA
SN400LA
(2) 1600 or
(4) 1250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4300 Al/Cu
Table 60:
Ampere
Rating
Circuit Breaker
Cat. No. Prefix
HDL,HGL,HJL,HLL,
JDL,JGL,JJL,JLL
Ground Bar
Cat. No.
Number of
Terminals
Conductors
Per Terminal
Wire Range
PKOGTJ250
6 AWG300 kcmil
Al/Cu
Locking Systems
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with diameters of 0.190.31 in. (58 mm);
padlocks not supplied.
06113316
Table 61:
Control Device
Type
Padlock
Removable Device
Padlock
Fixed Device1
S29371
Padlock
Stationary Device
S37422
Padlock
None
Extended Rotary
Operating Handle
Padlock
None
Motor Operator
Padlock
None
Toggle
Removable Attachment*
Function
S29370
43
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Interlocking Systems
Interlocking of Circuit Breakers With Toggle Control
The toggle interlock system can receive one or two padlocks with diameters of 0.190.31 in. (58 mm).
Both interlocked circuit breakers should be fixed version or plug-in version. Two sliding interlocking
bars can be used to interlock three circuit breakers installed side-by-side, in which case one circuit
breaker is in the ON (I) position and the two others in the OFF (O) position. (Kit S29354. Not available
for 2P HD and HG devices.)
06113320
06113319
Figure 12:
44
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Table 62:
Connector Descriptions
Function
Description
Connector
OF/AX
Bell alarm
SD/AL
MN/UVR
Shunt trip
MX/SHT
Motor operator
MCH
Auxiliary Contacts
Remote Operation
harg
disc
Remote Operation
ed
O OFF
5...8
auto
u
man
OFF
push
ON
Function
Connector Description
Auxiliary Contacts
OF/AX
SD/AL
MN/UVR
22
14
94
84
24
06113097
22
24
D4
06113153
81
MN
MX
MX/SHT
C1
C2
Fault
82
Alarm Contacts
Fault
92
Remote Operation
82
84
12
SDE
92
94
SD/
AL
91
Closed
OF2/
AX
21
OF1/
AX
11
C2
MX/SHT
MCH
06113096
Remote Operation
12
14
Figure 13:
O
push
OF2/ OF1/
AX
AX
SD/
AL
SDE
or
C2
T
C1
/SH
MX
V
200/240
81
91
11
21
D4
C1
D1
D1
or
MN/UVR
45
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SDE
OAL
BPF
(close)
Description
B4
A4
81
06113111
A4
A2
B2
Connector
84
82
H2
Indicator
A2
B4
A1
L1
84
H1
H2
L1
SD / AL
11 grey
91 black
12 yellow
92 green
14 violet
94 red
SDE / OAL
OF2 / AX
21 grey
22 yellow
84 red
24 violet
MX / SHT
C1 white
C2 orange
B2
OR / O / OU
B4 blue
MN / UVR
D1 white
A2
white
A4 orange
L1 green
A1 black
D4 blue
B4
06113476
BPF
(close)
A4
A2
B2
L1
46
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
48996-016-01
Figure 17:
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
.20
[5,1]
MOUNTING HOLE
.69
[17,5]
1.38
[35,0]
2.74
[69,7]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.06
[52,4]
1.37
[34,8]
5.01
[127,3]
5.20
[132,0]
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:2
19.5
ON
.43
[10,8]
21.5
TRIPPED
3.44
[87,3] 3.24
[82,4]
.08
[2,0]
1.06
[27,0]
2.87
[72,9]
1.91
[48,5]
3.74
[95,1]
4.36
[110,8]
.69
[17,5]
SEE DETAIL A
.62
[15,9]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
3.69
[93,8]
Figure 18:
in.
[mm]
1.38
[35,0]
Dimensions:
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
1.38
[35,0]
2.06
[52,4]
.26
[6,7]
(1/4-20 TERMINAL NUT)
.29
[7,4]
.29
[7,4]
4.12
[104,7]
1.38
[35,0]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.04
[51,9]
.24
[6,0]
1.37
[34,8]
.47
[12,0]
SECTION B-B
SCALE 1:1
4.99
[126,7]
5.20
[132,1]
SCALE 1:2
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
19.5
ON
.08
[2,0]
.40
[10,3]
1.06
[27,0]
21.5
TRIPPED
.73
[18,6]
SEE DETAIL A
3.44
[87,4]
3.24
[82,4]
3.74
[95,1]
2.87
[72,9]
3.69
[93,8]
1.91
[48,5]
4.36
[110,8]
.62
[15,9]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
48
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
48996-012-01
6.40
[162,6]
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
5.66
[143,8]
.74
[18,8]
1.38
[35,0]
1.38
[35,0]
2.06
[52,4]
4.12
[104,7]
1.38
[35,0]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.04
[51,9]
1.37
[34,8]
4.99
[126,7]
5.20
[132,1]
5.96
[151,3]
17.9
OFF
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:2
.43
[10,8]
19.5
ON
.08
[2,0]
1.06
[27,0]
21.5
TRIPPED
.73
[18,6]
SEE DETAIL A
3.44
[87,4]
3.24
[82,4]
3.74
1.91 [95,1]
[48,5]
2.87
[72,9]
4.36
[110,8]
3.69
[93,8]
Figure 20:
.62
[15,9]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
DETAIL A
SCALE 1:1
49
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
.74
[18,8]
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
1.38
[35,0]
1.38
[35,0]
6.40
[162,6]
5.66
[143,8]
1.38
[35,0]
.20
[5,1]
(MOUNTING HOLE)
1.38
[35,0]
.74
[18,8]
2.06
[52,4]
2.06
[52,4]
1.38
[35,0]
Figure 22:
4.12
[104,7]
4.12
[104,7]
.44
[11,3]
1.24
[31,5]
1.89
[48,1]
2.16
[55,0]
1.38
[35,0]
1.37
[34,8]
5.04
[128,0]
5.71
[145,0]
5.96
[151,3]
.27
[6,8]
.44
[11,3]
1.20
[30,5]
2.02
[51,2]
1.37
[34,8]
5.00
[126,9]
5.27
[133,9]
.27
[6,7]
5.96
[151,3]
3.58
[91,0]
3.58
[91,0]
6.12
[155,4]
3.44
[87,4]
7.01
[178,1]
4.00
[101,7] 3.44
[87,4] 3.24 2.87
[82,4] [72,9]
5.63
[143,1]
4.82
[122,4]
3.24
[82,4]
2.87
[72,9]
3.54
[90,2]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
50
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
48996-045-01
Figure 28:
Dimensions:
48996-024-01
Figure 29:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
53
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
48996-046-01
Figure 30:
Dimensions:
48996-025-01
Figure 31:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
54
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Dimensions:
Figure 33:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
55
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Dimensions:
Figure 35:
in.
[mm]
H and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Toggle Handle With Escutcheon Door Cutout
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
56
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Dimensions:
Figure 37:
in.
[mm]
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
57
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Dimensions:
in.
[mm]
58
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Figure 39:
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5
10000
9000
8000
7000
7000
6000
6000
5000
5000
4000
4000
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Maximum
AC Voltage
Number
of Poles
1535
600
2, 3
3000
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
150
5000
200
150
4000
200
3000
300
2000
400
300
1500
500
400
800
900
1000
600
500
700
700
600
600
1000
900
800
700
500
1000
900
800
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40C ambient cold start.
Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.
400
1500
300
2000
1500
150
2000
This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The
EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during
coordination studies.
200
3000
100
90
80
100
90
80
70
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
15
15
10
9
8
10
9
8
1.5
1.5
1
.9
.8
1
.9
.8
.7
.7
.6
.6
.5
.5
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
70
60
.4
.4
30 A, 35 A
.3
.3
25 A
.2
.2
20 A
.15
.15
15 A
.1
.09
.08
.1
.09
.08
.07
.07
.06
.06
.05
.05
.04
.04
.03
.03
1 CYCLE
(50 Hz)
.02
1 CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.015
.02
.015
1/2
.01
.009
.008
CYCLE
(50 Hz)
1/2
CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.007
.01
.009
.008
.007
.006
.006
.005
35 25
30
20
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1500
TM
800
900
1000
700
600
500
400
300
200
150
80
90
100
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5
.005
15
Curve No. 0050TC0401
June 2004
Drawing No. 48095-050-01
59
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
500
500
400
400
300
300
200
150
150
150
200
8000
9000
10000
700
600
7000
1000
900
800
700
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40C ambient cold start.
Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.
6000
1000
900
800
2, 3
This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The
EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during
coordination studies.
5000
1500
Number
of Poles
600
4000
2000
1500
Maximum
AC Voltage
4060
3000
2000
Continuous
Ampere Rating
2000
3000
1500
3000
800
900
1000
4000
700
5000
4000
600
6000
5000
500
6000
400
7000
300
10000
9000
8000
7000
200
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.6
.5
100
90
80
100
90
80
70
70
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
15
15
10
9
8
10
9
8
1.5
1.5
1
.9
.8
1
.9
.8
.7
.7
.6
.6
.5
.5
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
60
.4
.4
50 A
.3
.3
45 A
.2
.2
40 A
.15
.15
60 A
.1
.09
.08
.1
.09
.08
.07
.07
.06
.06
.05
.05
.04
.04
.03
.03
1 CYCLE
(50 Hz)
.02
1 CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.015
.02
.015
1/2
.01
.009
.008
CYCLE
(50 Hz)
1/2
CYCLE
(60 Hz)
.007
.01
.009
.008
.007
8000
9000
10000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1500
800
900
1000
700
600
500
400
TM
300
200
150
80
90
100
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
8
9
10
1.5
.8
.9
1
.7
.005
.6
.006
.005
.5
.006
45
50 40
60
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Table 63:
Motor Type
FLA
NEMA
A, B, C, D
B, E
IEC
1.5
12
16.5
12
13.5
24
33
18
24
27
48
66
36
48
64
88
48
64
11
88
121
66
88
99
110
121
132
143
14
112
154
84
112
126
140
154
168
182
17
136
187
102
136
153
170
187
204
221
20
160
220
120
160
180
200
220
240
260
25
200
275
150
200
225
250
275
300
325
1300%
1700%
1300%
11x
12x
13x
Table 64:
Im Setting
6x
10x
11x
12x
13x
15
16.5
18
19.5
30
33
36
39
54
60
66
72
78
72
80
88
96
104
Motor Type
Im Setting
NEMA
A, B, C, D
B, E
IEC
14
112
154
84
112
126
140
154
168
182
17
136
187
102
136
153
170
187
204
221
21
168
231
126
168
189
210
231
252
273
24
192
264
144
192
216
240
264
288
312
27
216
297
162
216
243
270
297
324
351
29
232
319
174
232
261
290
319
348
377
32
256
352
192
256
288
320
352
384
416
36
288
396
216
288
324
360
396
432
468
42
336
462
252
336
378
420
462
504
546
1300%
1700%
1300%
9x
(FLA) x (Im)
FLA
8x
6x
8x
9x
10x
(FLA) x (Im)
70
05/2009
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
INDEX
internal accessories
interrupting rating
accessories
auxiliary switches 35
locations of internal 34
maximum combinations of 34
motor operator
36
accessory connections 34
accessory suffix codes 8, 36, 39
AIR See ampere interrupting rating
altitude.See operating conditions
ampere interrupting rating 5
automatic protection settings 21
35
auxiliary switches
34
11
L
locking systems
43
locks
direct rotary handle 43
extended rotary operating handle 43
43
motor operator
43
toggle
lugs
voltage takeoff for mechanical 28
dimensional drawings
47
H-frame
J-frame
51, 5355
DIN rail mounting bracket 26
drawout circuit breakers
chassis functions 33
33
mounting
numbering, catalog
bus-bar connections
28
E
endurance operations 13
F
features and benefits 24
common design envelope 5
dual-break rotating contacts 6
high interrupting ratings (AIR) 5
reduced let-through currents 6
field installable accessories 7
full load amp settings 21
H
handle position indication 6
H-frame dimensional drawings 47
I
I-Line circuit breakers 31
installation
plug-in circuit breakers 32
44
interlocking
O
open/closed position switch 45
operating conditions 24
13
altitude
13
temperature
vibration
13
operating handle
cable operating mechanism 41
operating handles
direct mounted rotary 40
door mounted rotary 4041
operating mechanism 6
operations, endurance 13
P
plug-in circuit breakers
mounting
32
parts of configuration 32
safety trip interlock 32
positive contact indication 11
R
ratings
circuit breaker interrupting 11
corner grounded delta 13
11
UL 489
re-rating
73
05/2009
S
safety trip interlock
32
shunt trip (MX) 3536, 45
special ratings
10
24
specifications
molded case switches 24
suffix codes
8, 36, 39
switch
35
alarm
auxiliary
35
35
changeover
electrical characteristics
36
MX/MN
OF, SD and SDE 35
MN undervoltage trip switch 36
MX shunt trip
36
switches
OF auxiliary switch 45
switches, automatic molded case 24
T
temperature See operating conditions
59, 70
trip curves
trip units
9
U
UL 489 ratings
11
45
undervoltage trip
undervoltage trip (MN) 36
unit-mount circuit breakers 26
bus-bar connections 28
mounting
26
V
voltage takeoff for mechanical lugs 28
W
wire sizes for accessory connections 34
74
05/2009
20042009 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Characteristics
RoHS
REACh
Period
Commercial Status
Commercialised
Range of product
QO
Product or component
type
Load Center Grounding Bar Assembly
Category
00102 - QO LC ACCESSORIES
Discount Schedule
DE3A
GTIN
00785901026426
Package weight(Lbs)
0.18
Product availability
Stock - Normally stocked in distribution facility
Returnability
Y
Country of origin
US
Offer Sustainability
Contractual warranty
18 months
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. *Prices are indicative
PK18GTA
ASSY
Main
Slot/Robertson screw
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Total
Quantity Each Size
Qty. See Wire Range Table below.
I
.3125
8
VI
in.
mm
1.75
44
4.61
117
1.38
35
1.63
41
2.25
57
1.25
32
Top
PK7GTA
2.88
73
1.25
32
Top
or
side
PK0GTA2
PK0GTA6
PK3GTA1
PK4GTA
PK5GTA
II
III
IV
Approximate
Distance
Overall
Between
Length
Mounting Holes Mounting
in.
mm
43
Top
Top
Top
Top
PK9GTA1
3.25
83
PK9GTA
3.78
96
3.13
80
Top
PK12GTA
12
12
4.70
119
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTA
15
15
5.63
143
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTAL
16
15
8.13
207
3.13
80
Top
PK15GTA6
21
15
5.88
149
Top
PK18GTA
18
18
6.56
167
3.13
80
Top
PK18GTAL
19
18
8.81
224
3.13
80
Top
PK23GTA
23
23
8.11
206
3.13
80
Top
PK23GTAL
24
23
9.44
240
3.13
80
Top
PK27GTA
27
or
26
27
26
9.36
238
3.13
80
Top
1
6
1
1
Top
PK27GTA includes one main grounding lug that mounts with two terminal screws and requires three terminals for
mounting.
3.13 in. (80 mm) on small terminals; 5.25 in. (133 mm) on large terminals.
Mounting screw 40205-065-01 (one required).
Mounting screw 21594-14220 (two required).
Mounting screw 21594-14302 (two required).
Mounting screw 21922-18360 (two required).
Mounting screw 21594-14241 (two required).
Mounting screws 21594-14241(two required) and 21594-17121(two required).
Cu (AWG)
Al (AWG)
II
(1) #14/0
III
(1) #62/0
(1) #62/0
IV
(1) #63/0
(1) #63/0
(1) #141/0
(1) #141/0
VI
(1) #102/0
(1) #62/0
63
09/00
Square D
General Purpose Relays
Class 8501K universal relays
Catalog
2014
Contents
bb Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
bb References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
bb Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
bb Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Specifications
General Specifications
Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage
Operation
Vibration resistance
In operation
conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Not operating
Degree of protection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60529
Shock resistance
Opening
conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Closing
Protection category
Mounting position
C (F)
C (F)
Insulation Specifications
kV
4 (1.2/50 s)
Dielectric strength
(rms voltage)
Vac
Vac
Vac
2500
2000
1500
Contact Specifications
Relay type
8501KFR12ppp, 8501KFRD12ppp,
8501KPR12ppp, 8501KPRD12ppp,
8501KUR12ppp, 8501KURD12ppp
8501KFR13ppp, 8501KFRD13ppp,
8501KPR13ppp, 8501KPRD13ppp,
8501KUR13ppp, 8501KURD13ppp
2 C/O
3 C/O
Contact materials
AgNi
Conventional thermal
current (Ith)
For ambient
temperature y 55C
Conforming to IEC
in utilization
categories
AC-1 and DC-1
Conforming to UL
10
NO
10 at 250 Vac
10 at 28 Vdc
NC
5 at 250 Vac
5 at 28 Vdc
Resistive
Motor
HP
Pilot Duty
mA
Switching capacity
Maximum
Minimum
Vac
VA
Vdc
mW
170
No-load
18000
Under load
1200
Utilization coefficient
20%
Mechanical durability
Cycles
5,000,000
Electrical durability
Operating cycles
Resistive load
Inductive load
0.4
0.3
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
Specifications (continued)
Coil Specifications
Average consumption
VA
1.4
Response time
Operate time
ms
Release time
ms
20 max
12
24
48
110
120
240
V51
V53
V56
V60
120
470
1800
7300
Min.
Vac
9.6
19.2
38.4
88
Max.
Vac
13.2
26.4
52.8
121.0
V14
V20
V24
72
1700
6800
Min.
Vac
19.2
96
192
Max.
Vac
26.4
132
264
8501NR52
8501NR62
Socket Specifications(1)
Socket type
8501NR51
8501NR61
Mixed
Product certifications
cURus File E66924 CNN SWIV2, SWIV8; CSA; CE; RoHS Compliant
Conforming to standards
Electrical Specifications
Insulation Specifications
8501NR82
Separate
2000
Vrms 2000
2500
Vrms 2000
2500
2000
Vrms 2000
2500
2000
General Specifications
Degree of protection
IP 20
Cabling
Solid cable
without
cable end
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Flexible
cable with
cable end
Mounting
Terminal referencing
IEC, NEMA
Bus jumper
None
None
8501NH52
8501NH82
8501NH7
8501NH7
8501NH7
References
References
Pins
Control
circuit
voltage
Type KU
Flat (Faston type) terminals
Socket mount
8501KPDR12V60
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
8501KPDR12V51
8501KPDR12V53
8501KPDR12V56
8501KPDR12V60
8501KPR12V14
8501KPR12V20
8501KPR12V24
8501KUDR12V51
8501KUDR12V53
8501KUDR12V56
8501KUDR12V60
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR13V51
8501KPDR13V53
8501KPDR13V56
8501KPDR13V60
8501KPR13V14
8501KPR13V20
8501KPR13V24
8501KUDR13V51
8501KUDR13V53
8501KUDR13V56
8501KUDR13V60
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
8501KUR12V14
8501KUR12V20
8501KUR12V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KUR13V14
8501KUR13V20
8501KUR13V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KFDR12V51
8501KFDR12V53
8501KFDR12V56
8501KFDR12V60
8501KFR12V14
8501KFR12V20
8501KFR12V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KFDR13V51
8501KFDR13V53
8501KFDR13V56
8501KFDR13V60
8501KFR13V14
8501KFR13V20
8501KFR13V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR12P14V51
8501KPDR12P14V53
8501KPDR12P14V56
8501KPDR12P14V60
8501KPR12P14V14
8501KPR12P14V20
8501KPR12P14V24
8501KUDR12P14V51
8501KUDR12P14V53
8501KUDR12P14V56
8501KUDR12P14V60
8501KUR12P14V14
8501KUR12P14V20
8501KUR12P14V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
8501KPDR13P14V51
8501KPDR13P14V53
8501KPDR13P14V56
8501KPDR13P14V60
8501KPR13P14V14
8501KPR13P14V20
8501KPR13P14V24
8501KUDR13P14V51
8501KUDR13P14V53
8501KUDR13P14V56
8501KUDR13P14V60
8501KUR13P14V14
8501KUR13P14V20
8501KUR13P14V24
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
0.086/0.190
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
Universal relays with standard clear cover and LED (sold in lots of 1)
Type KP
Cylindrical terminals
8501KPR13P14V20
Type KU
Flat (Faston type) terminals
Weight
kg/lb
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
24 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
8501KUDR12P14V60
References (continued)
References (continued)
Sockets
Contact terminal
arrangement
Mixed
8501NR62 +
Relay 8501KPR13P14V20
Separate
Connection
Relay type
Unit
reference(1)
Sold in
lots of
Screw connector
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR51
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR51B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR61
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR61B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR52
0.054/0.119
8501KPR12ppp
8501KPDR12ppp
8501NR52B
10
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR62
0.054/0.119
8501KPR13ppp
8501KPDR13ppp
8501NR62B
10
0.054/0.120
8501KUR12ppp
8501KUDR12ppp
8501NR82
0.054/0.121
8501KUR12ppp
8501KUDR12ppp
8501NR82B
10
0.054/0.122
Screw connector
Weight
kg /lb
(1) Please note that the B suffix only desginates quantities of 10 and is not printed on the socket.
8501NR82 +
Relay 8501KUDR12P14V60
Accessories
Description
8501NH7
For
use with
Unit
reference
Sold in
lots of
8501NR51 sockets
8501NR52 sockets
8501NR62 sockets
8501NR82 sockets
8501NH7
0.001/0.002
8501NR52 sockets
8501NR62 sockets
8501NH52
10
0.001/0.002
8501NR82 sockets
8501NH82
10
0.001/0.002
8501NH52
8501NH82
Weight
kg/lb
Dimensions
8501KF12ppp / 8501KF13ppp
1.9
(49.6)
0.032
(0.81)
2.75
(70.0)
0.27
(6.8)
2.38
(60.5)
0.16
(4.0)
0.11
(2.8)
0.062
(1.58)
0.63
(15.88)
8501KP12ppp
1.4
(35.4)
2.1
(50.3)
1.4
(34.9)
8501KP13ppp
1.4
(35.4)
2.1
(50.3)
1.4
(34.9)
8501KU12ppp / 8501KU13ppp
1.4
(35.4)
1.97
(50.0)
1.37
(34.9)
Dimensions (continued)
8501NR51
8501NR61
1.6
(40)
2.02
(51)
1.29
(33)
0.59
(15)
2.32
(59)
0.97
(24.6)
0.97
(24.6)
1.6 DIA.
(40)
0.16
(4.2)
2.12
(54)
3
2.05
(52)
11
1.02
(25)
8501NR52
10
9
8
2.16
(54.8)
8501NR62
1.45
(37)
1.42
(36)
1.1
(27.9)
3.0
(77.5)
22
11
12
24
21
14
0.15
(3.8
3.02
(76.8)
A2
INPUT
1.69
(43)
1.37
(35)
4
1
1.53
(39)
6
0.15
(3.81)
3.14
(80)
1.5
(38)
9
22
5
21
31
11
12
4
11
1
34
14
1.58
(40)
A1
INPUT
2
1.35
(34.2)
8501NR82
3.0
(76)
24
A2
INPUT
10
A1
INPUT
1.2
(30)
0.4
(10)
32
IEC:
NEMA:
IEC:
NEMA:
1.03
(26)
1.5
(38)
1.1
(27.9)
3.19
(81)
2.86
(72.7) 1.58
(40)
1
3
4
1.01
(25.6)
1.42
(36)
2.06
(52)
0.15
(3.8
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagrams
Universal relays
DPDT
1
3
22
5
22
14
24
11
31
8501KP12ppp
24
11
21
NEMA
IEC
B
A2
24
22
32
14
24
34
11
11
21
31
10
A1
A2
12
4
21
6
22
5
24
7
A1 2
8 31
10
11
11
11
3PDT
8501KF13ppp / 8501KU13ppp
32
8
14
A2
A1
2
1
A
A1
4
12
8501KP13ppp
22
5
12
4
14
14
A2
A1
8501KF12ppp / 8501KU12ppp
12
4
12
34
A2
31
12
32
22
14
34
24
11
31
21
A1
A2
NEMA
IEC
NEMA
IEC
NEMA
IEC
Sockets
8501NR51
8501NR61
A1
11
21
A2
INPUT
14
INPUT
11
31
11
A1
3
INPUT
8
5
12
14
12
22
24
24
21
NEMA
IEC
8501NR52
8501NR62
8501NR82
22
11
12
32
24
22
12
24
34
24
21
14
31
21
11
22
32
12
11
14
34
5
INPUT
NEMA
IEC
A1
A2
Coil Bus
Jumper
INPUT
NEMA
IEC
2
A1
B
A2
INPUT
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
1
MODULE
INPUT
10
2
3
6
2
11
MODULE
INPUT
Coil Bus
Jumper
10
14
A2
8
32
22
NEMA
IEC
10
34
INPUT
11
A2
10
A
A1
21
31
11
NEMA
IEC
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
2014 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its
affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
8501CT1406, 09/2014
Replaces 8501CT0301R07/08, 08/2008
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
PE86134
Applications
b Panel instrumentation
b Sub-billing, cost allocation and energy management
b Remote monitoring of an electrical installation
b Power quality analysis
b Utility bill verification, utility contract optimization and load preservation.
Front view of PowerLogic PM800 series meter with
integrated display.
Characteristics
Easy to install
Mounts using two clips, with no tools required. Direct connect the voltage inputs, with
no need for potential transformers (PTs) up to 600 VAC.
PB101823-50
Easy to operate
Intuitive navigation with self-guided, language-selectable menus.
System status at a glance
Large, anti-glare display with back-light provides summary screens with multiple
values. Bar charts graphically represent system loading and I/O.
Custom alarming with time stamping
Over 50 alarm conditions, including over or under conditions, digital input changes,
phase unbalance and more. The models PM850 and PM870 offer boolean logic that
can be used to combine up to four alarms.
PE86229
ANSI 12.20 Class 0.2S and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S accuracy for active energy
Accurate energy measurement for sub-billing and cost allocation.
PMD-S IEC61557-12 performance standard
Meets PMD/SD/K70/0.5 and PMD/SS/K70/0.5 requirements for combined
Performance Measuring and monitoring Devices (PMD).
Trend curves and short-term forecasting
The models PM850 and PM870 offer trend logging and forecasting of energy and
demand readings to help compare load characteristics and manage energy costs.
2014
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
PB101814 -36
Part Numbers
Description
PE86134
PM810UMG
PM850UMG
PM870UMG
PM820UMG
PB101822 -68
PM810MG
PM820MG
PM850MG
PM870MG
PM810RDMG
PM820RDMG
PM850RDMG
PM870RDMG
PE86135
PB101819 -32
2014
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
DB119011
Description
Optional modules
Ethernet communication module provides a 10/100BaseTx UTP port,
an RS-485 Modbus serial master port, Ethernet-to-serial line gateway
functionality, and an embedded web server that is fully compliant with
Transparent Ready - Level 1 (TRe1) systems.
DB119013
DB119012
The PM8ECC supports a private host PM8ECC MIB. Use of this MIB allows
the reading of Basic Metering Data, Configuration and Status of I/Os and
Configuration and Status of Alarms, plus SNMP Trap generation in response
to any PM8 on-board alarms.
2 relay outputs, 2 digital inputs
PM8M22
PM8M26
PM8M2222
PM810LOG
RJ11EXT
CAB4
CAB12
CAB30
PB1018216 -34
PB101824 -50
PM8ECC
2014
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
Selection guide
PM810
PM820
PM850
PM870
Performance standard
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
General
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power factor
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Hour counter
Energy values
Demand values
Current
Other measurements
Individual harmonics
63
63
b (2)
b
b
b
2 (1)
-
b
2
b
b
4
b
b
4
b
Trending / forecasting
GPS synchronisation
Alarms
Time stamping
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (1)
b
b (1)
b
White backlit LCD display
b
Multilingual
Digital input (standard/optional)
1/12
Digital output (standard/optional)
1 KY/4 RY
Analogue inputs (standard/optional)
0/4
Analogue outputs (standard/optional)
0/4
Input metering capability (number of channels) 5
Communication
RS 485 port
Modbus protocol
RS 232/RS 485, 2- or 4-wire Modbus RTU/
ASCII (with addition of PM8RDA module)
Ethernet 10/100Base Tx UTP port and RS485
Modbus serial master port with PM8ECC
DB109269
b
31
Waveform capture
EN50160 - ITI(CBEMA)/SEMI F-47
Sag and swell detection
Data recording
b
31 (1)
2-wire
b
b
b
(4)
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
1/12
1 KY/4 RY
0/4
0/4
5
2-wire
b
b
2-wire
b
b
2-wire
b
b
The PM800 can be fitted with 2 optional modules, unless otherwise indicated (3)
PM8ECC module
10/100BaseTx UTP port, RS-485 Modbus serial master port, Ethernet to serial line gateway,
embedded web server
Input/Output modules
Relay outputs
2
2
2
Digital inputs
2
6
2
Analogue outputs 4-20 mA
2
Analogue inputs 0-5 Vdc or 4-20 mA
2
* Includes a 24 Vdc Power Supply that can be used to power the digital inputs
(1) With PM810LOG, battery-backed internal clock and 80 kB memory. (2) Configurable. (3) Series 800
Power Meters supports up to two option modules. When PM8M2222 & PM8ECC are mounted together
with control power>370 V AC temperature rating must be reduced to -25C to 50C. Same applies when
using two PM8M2222. (4) PM850 does not include sag or swell detection.
2014
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
Electrical characteristics
Frequency
+/- 0.01 Hz at 45 to 67 Hz
+/- 0.01 Hz at 350 to 450 Hz
IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S and
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2S
Active Energy
Reactive Energy
Data update
rate
Input-voltage
Measured voltage
characteristics
1s
Input-current
CT ratings
characteristics
Control Power
Primary
Inputs/Outputs (2)
Standard
1 digital KY pulse output
(meter unit)
1 digital input
PM8M22
option
PM8M26
option
PM8M2222
option
Switching
frequency
(digital I/O)
6 digital inputs
24 V internal supply
6 to 240 V AC, 6 to 30 V DC
2 A rms, 5 A max. for 10 seconds per hour
2 digital inputs
20 to 150 V AC/DC, 2 mA max.
2 analogue outputs
4 to 20 mA dc into 600 ohms maximum
2 analogue inputs
Adjustable from 0 to 5 V DC or 4-20 mA
Standard
Input/output 25 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (20 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M22
Input/output 1 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (500 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M26 and
Input
25 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (20 ms ON/OFF)
PM8M2222
Output
1 Hz, 50 % duty cycle (500 ms ON/OFF)
2 relay outputs (1)
Environmental conditions
Operating
temperature
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Secondary 1 A or 5 A
Measurement input range
5 mA to 10 A AC
15 A continuous
Permissible overload
50 A for 10 seconds per hour
500 A for 1 second per hour
Impedance
< 0.1 W
Load
< 0.15 VA
AC
115 to 415 10 % V AC, 15 VA with options at
45 to 67 Hz or 350 to 450 Hz
DC
125 to 250 20 % V DC, 10 W with options
Ride-through time
45 ms at 120 V AC or 125 V DC
Meter
Display
Meter + display
0.6 kg
IP52 integrated display. Type 12 compliant
remote display (with gasket). IP30 meter body
96 x 96 x 70 mm (mounting surface)
96 x 96 x 90 mm (mounting surface)
-25 C to +70 C (2)
-10 C to +50 C
-40 C to +85 C
5 to 95 % RH at 40 C (non-condensing)
2
III, for distribution systems up to 347 V L-N /
600 V AC L-L
Dielectric withstand
As per EN 61010, UL508
Altitude
3000 m max.
(1) Mechanical endurance: 15 million operations, Electrical endurance:25000 commutations at
2 A / 250 V AC (2) Series 800 Power Meters supports up to two option modules. When
PM82222 & PM8ECC are mounted together with control power >370 V AC temperature rating
must be reduced to -25C to 50C. Same is true when using two PM8M2222.
Storage temp.
Humidity rating
Pollution degree
Installation category
2014
Intermediate metering
PM800 series
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electrostatic discharge
Conducted immunity
Flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Surge immunity
IEC 61000-4-12
IEC 61000-3-2
Safety
Europe
Onboard communications
RS 485 port
Model-dependent characteristics
Data Logs
Min./max.
Hour counter
Energy per shift
Forecasting
(PM850 and PM870 only)
PM850 waveform capture
PM870 enhanced waveform
capture
Alarms
Display characteristics
Languages
Display screen
Dimensions
73 x 69 mm
96 x 96 mm
2014
Overall
96 x 96 x 40 mm
0.81 kg
Remote display
0.23 kg
Intermediate metering
DB111766
DB111767
DB111765
Dimensions
DB111768
DB111770
DB111769
2014
Intermediate metering
DB111792
Flush mounting
DB111793
Surface mount
DB111794
2014
As standards, specifications and designs develop from time to time, please ask
for confirmation of the information given in this document.
PLSED303023EN
04-2014
PM820MG
Range of product
PowerLogic PM800
PM820
Product or component
type
Power meter
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Main
Complementary
Power quality analysis
Type of measurement
Supply voltage
Network frequency
45...67 Hz
350...450 Hz
Power consumption in VA
15 VA
Display type
Backlit LCD
Display resolution
6 lines
Sampling rate
128 samples/cycle
Measurement current
5A
1A
Input type
Measurement voltage
Number of inputs
Measurement accuracy
0.2 % power
0.002 power factor
0.01 Hz frequency
0.2 % energy
0.2 % voltage (10...227 V)
0.5 % current (0.5...10 A)
Accuracy class
Number of outputs
1 digital (static)
RS485
Data recording
Alarms
Event logs
Min/Max of instantaneous values
Time stamping
GPS synchronisation
Basic with 2 data logs
Memory capacity
80 kB
Environment
Electromagnetic compatibility
Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-voltage, conforming to IEC 61000-3-3
Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-11
Immunity to impulse waves class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-8
Conducted RF disturbances class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-6
1.2/50 s shock waves immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-5
Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-4
Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields class class III, conforming to IEC
61000-4-3
Electrostatic discharge immunity test class class III, conforming to IEC 61000-4-2
Conducted and radiated emissions, conforming to EN 55011 class A
Limits for harmonic current emissions, conforming to IEC 61000-3-2
Immunity to impulse waves, conforming to IEC 61000-4-12
Mounting mode
Flush-mounted
Mounting support
Panel
Type of installation
Indoor installation
Overvoltage category
III
IP degree of protection
Relative humidity
90 % 40 C
Pollution degree
-25...70 C
-40...85 C
Operating altitude
0...3000 m
Standards
IEC 61010-1
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
Product certifications
CE
CULus
Width
96 mm
Depth
70 mm (meter)
Height
96 mm
Product weight
0.6 kg
Offer Sustainability
Sustainable offer status
Available
Available
Type JCK
Class 9050 / Refer to Catalog 9050CT9601
9050JCK46V20
www.us.schneider-electric.com
FOR CURRENT INFORMATION
9050JCK32V36
with 8501NH7
Off
Delayb
$ Price
Off Delay
Power Trigger
0.110 seconds
JCK11f
52.00 JCK21f
65.00
JCK21PTf
0.330 seconds
JCK12f
52.00 JCK22f
65.00
JCK22PTf
0.660 seconds
JCK13f
52.00 JCK23f
65.00
JCK23PTf
1.2120 seconds
JCK14f
52.00 JCK24f
65.00
JCK24PTf
1.8180 seconds
JCK15f
52.00 JCK25f
65.00
JCK25PTf
0.110 minutes
JCK16f
58.00 JCK26f
71.00
JCK26PTf
0.330 minutes
JCK17f
58.00 JCK27f
71.00
JCK27PTf
0.660 minutes
JCK18f
58.00 JCK28f
71.00
JCK28PTf
1.2120 minutes
JCK19f
58.00 JCK29f
71.00
JCK29PTf
a
Two dials are provided for independently adjustable repeat cycle timing ranges.
b
Initiating contact can be up to 50 feet from the timer.
$ Price
Interval
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK31f
JCK32f
JCK33f
JCK34f
JCK35f
JCK36f
JCK37f
JCK38f
JCK39f
AC Amperes
120
240
3
1.5
10
10
10
10
1/3
1/2
10
28
23
Type JCK60
This On Delay timer uses a 5 position rotary switch to select the timing
range. The three pushbutton thumbwheels are used to select the time
value.
Table 23.158: Selection and Pricing
Timing
Modes
Timing
Ranges
.01s 0.059.99 seconds
0.1s 00.199.9 seconds
S
001999 seconds
On Delay 0.1m 00.199.9 minutes
M
001999 minutes
0.1h 00.199.9 hours
H
001999 hours
Type
$ Price
JCK60f 101.00
Two 5 position rotary switches are used to select the timing mode and
timing range. The three pushbutton thumbwheels are used to select the
time value.
File
Class
214768
3211 07
Without Socket
RoHS
9050JCK1-5 = 0627
Compliant
9050JCK6070=0648
as of date code
E3190
NLDX2
V36
V14
V17
V20
V24
Class
Type
$ Price ea.
8501
NH7
5.50
23-32
DC
Volts
hp
Type JCK70
12 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
24050/60
Inductive
Voltage
93.00
93.00
93.00
93.00
93.00
98.00
98.00
98.00
98.00
30
15
AC
Volts
File
CCN
JCK51f
JCK52f
JCK53f
JCK54f
JCK55f
JCK56f
JCK57f
JCK58f
JCK59f
DC Amperes
JCK1F(XXXX)cf
File
CCN
$ Price
Break
$ Price
0.1 to 180
52.00
181 to 3600
58.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
Off Delay e
JCK2F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
Off Delay with
JCK2F(XXXX)PTcf
Power Trigger
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
52.00
Interval
JCK3F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
58.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
One Shote
JCK4F(XXXX)cf
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
65.00
One Shot with
JCK4F(XXXX)PTcf
Power Trigger
181 to 3600
71.00
0.1 to 180
93.00
Repeat Cycle
JCK5F(XXXX)cdf
181 to 3600
98.00
c
(XXXX) denotes the timing period in seconds.
Example: Class 9050 Type JCK1F60 is an On Delay timer fixed at 60 seconds.
d
Fixed repeat cycle timers can be supplied with the same or different On-Time and
Off-Time.
e
Initiating contact can be up to 50 feet from the timer.
f
Voltage code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage codes
listed below and insert as shown in How To Order.
On Delay
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK41PTf
JCK42PTf
JCK43PTf
JCK44PTf
JCK45PTf
JCK46PTf
JCK47PTf
JCK48PTf
JCK49PTf
Repeat
Cyclea
Type
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
71.00
JCK41f
JCK42f
JCK43f
JCK44f
JCK45f
JCK46f
JCK47f
JCK48f
JCK49f
Continuous
Timing Mode
52.00
52.00
52.00
52.00
52.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
One Shot
$ Price Power Trigger $ Price
Make
Break
On
Delay
Make
Knob Adjustable
Timing Range
CP2
Discount
Schedule
Class Number
Type Number
Voltage Code
Modified
4/13/08
Catalog Number
Class
Type
9050
JCK11
Voltage
Code
V20
8502SDO2V02S
Full Voltage Magnetic Contactor , Non-Reversing,
NEMA Size: 2, 45A
List Price
$588.00 USD
Availability Stock Item: This item is normally stocked in our distribution facility.
Technical Characteristics
Control Source
8502CT9701
Depth
4.94 Inches
Width
4.94 Inches
Height
5.13 Inches
Ampere Rating
45A
Application
Used to switch heating loads, capacitors, transformer and electric motors where overload
protection is provided separately
Approvals
UL Listed File E78351 CCN NLDX - CSA Certified File LR60905 Class 3211 04
Enclosure Type
Open
600VAC
Mounting Type
Surface
NEMA Size
Number of Poles
3-Pole
Operating Voltage
120VAC@60Hz - 110VAC@50Hz
Phase
3-Phase
Action
Non-Reversing
Terminal Type
Screw Clamp
Type
Weight
6.75 Pounds
Discount Schedule
CP1
Article Number
785901881612
Package Quantity
Weight
5.75 lbs.
Availability Code
Returnability
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.
Product Details
Page 1 of 2
Return to search
Print Page
Product
Number:
23014
Order
Abbreviation:
F18T8CW/K24
General
Description:
Product Information
Abbrev. With Packaging Info.
23.78
604.0
7500
Base
Medium Bipin
Bulb
T8
60
4200
Diameter (in)
1.10
Diameter (mm)
27.8
Industry Standards
1190
1035
24
18.00
conditions and with ballast meeting ANSI specifications. If burning cycle is increased,
there will be a corresponding increase in the average hours life.
Print Page
http://ecom.mysylvania.com/sylvaniab2c/catalog/updateItems.do
6/17/2008
Overload Relays
Model 777-P2
Features:
SymComs Model 777-P2 is a fully programmable electronic overload
relay. It is designed to monitor and protect any 3-phase, 200-480VAC
motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90
amps). It provides unsurpassed protection from faulty voltage, underload
and overload conditions.
The 777-P2 incorporates a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming,
providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic
codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition.
SS-777-P2_B
Auxiliary Products:
www.
SSAC.com
...your timer & flasher specialists
Rev. 0810
Specifications
Enclosure Dimensions
Functional Specifications
Programmable Operating Points
LV-Low Voltage Threshold
HV-High Voltage Threshold
VUB-Voltage Unbalance Threshold
MULT-# of Conductors or CT Ratio (xxx:5)
OC-Overcurrent Threshold
UC-Undercurrent Threshold
CUB-Current Unbalance Threshold
TC-Overcurrent Trip Class and Linear
Overcurrent Trip Delay
RD1-Rapid-cycle Timer
RD2-Restart Delay after all faults except
undercurrent (motor cool-down timer)
RD3-Restart Delay after undercurrent (dry-well
recovery timer)
#RU- Number of restarts after all undercurrent
faults
ADDR-RS485 Address
#RF-Number of restarts after all faults except
undercurrent
UCTD-Undercurrent Trip Delay
GF-Ground Fault Current Threshold
0.200 [5.08]
170-524V
172-528V
2-25% or 999 (disabled)
1-10, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
(20-100A) MULT of 80-140% of CT Primary
(0, 10-98A) MULT or 40-140% of CT Primary
2-50% or 999 (disabled)
02-60, J02-J60; L00-L60 or oFF
2.650
[67.31]
2.280
[57.91]
3.050
[77.47]
0-999 seconds
2-500 minutes
2-500 minutes, A (automatic)
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (automatic)
3.100 [78.74]
A01-A99
0, 1, oc1, 2, oc2, 3, oc3, 4, oc4, A, ocA (automatic)
3.600 [91.44]
3.850 [97.79]
Input Characteristics
Supply Voltage
Frequency
Motor Full Load Amp Range
200-480VAC
50/60Hz
2-20A, (looped conductors required); 20-90A (direct); 80-800A
(external CTs required)
1.200
[30.48]
Output Characteristics
Output Contact Rating - SPDT (Form C)
Pilot Duty
General Purpose
Expected Life
Mechanical
Electrical
480VA@240VAC, B300
10A@240VAC
D. 0.650 [16.51]
1 x 106 operations
1 x 105 operations at rated load
5.050
[128.27]
General Characteristics
Operating Temperature
Ambient Operating
Ambient Storage
Accuracy at 25o C (77o F)
Voltage
Current
Timing
Ground Fault
Repeatability
Voltage
Current
Maximum Input Power
Pollution Degree
Class of Protection
Relative Humidity
Terminal Torque
Standards Passed
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted
Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated
Fast Transient Burst
Short Circuit
Surge
IEC
ANSI/IEEE
Hi-potential Test
Vibration
Shock
Safety Marks
UL
CE
Max Conductor Size through 777-P2
Dimensions
Weight
Mounting Method
How to order:
3.850 [97.79]
inches (millimeters)
SymCom
222 Disk Drive
Rapid City, SD 57702
www.SymCom.com
4.700
[119.38]
SSAC
8242 Loop Rd
Baldwinsville, NY 13027
www.SSAC.com
[email protected] [email protected]
800.843.8848 605.348.5580 605.348.5685 fax
Communication Module
Model RS485MS-2W
Features:
SS-RS485MS-2W-C
Rev. 0810
Specifications
Enclosure Dimensions
Functional Characteristics
Remote Reset
General Characteristics
Ambient Operating Temperature
Relative Humidity
Terminal (depluggable terminal block
Torque
Wire AWG
Class of Protection
Standards Passed
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated
Fast Transient Burst
Hi-Potential Test
Surge Immunity
Input Power
Inputs/Data Lines
Safety Marks
UL
CE
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Mounting Method
How to order:
SymCom
222 Disk Drive
Rapid City, SD 57701
www.SymCom.com
SSAC
8242 Loop Rd
Baldwinsville, NY 13027
www.SSAC.com
[email protected] [email protected]
800.843.8848 605.348.5580 605.348.5685 fax
Remote Monitor
Model RM-1000
Features:
Liquid crystal display
Satisfies new arc-flash safety requirements
Optional steel enclosure for added protection
from weather elements and vandalism
5-year warranty
Made in the USA
AUXILIARY PRODUCTS:
Specifications
Functional Characteristics
Communications
Baud Rate
Protocol
Serial Interface
Range
Enclosure Dimensions
1200-19200
Modbus RTU
RS-485
50 ft., 4000 ft. with separate isolated power supply
4.544"
Input Characteristics
Nominal Power Supply Voltage Rating
Max Current
General Characteristics
Ambient Operating Temperature
Protection Class
RM-1000
RM-1000-3R
RM-1000 NEMA 4
Relative Humidity
Terminal Torque
Standards Passed
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient Burst
Surge
Conducted RF
Voltage Dips & Interruptions
Safety Marks
UL listed
CE
Dimensions
Weight
Material
UV Exposure w/o degradation
Keypad Mechanical Lifetime
Keypad Material
Panel Thickness
3.619"
1.425"
0.9"
How to order:
AC/DC POWERED
Communication Interface Units
KEY FEATURES
All of these devices are powered from a unique power supply that enables them to operate on any AC or DC voltage
ranging from 48V to 240V. A low voltage version (-9 to -36VDC) is also available. The CIUs are designed to work in
temperatures from -40C to +85C, and are surge protected on both the power and analog lines.
All of this is bundled in a 5 x 4-1/4 x 1-1/4 Aluminum enclosure, suitable for desktop or wallmounting.
Multipoint Configuration
For point-to-multipoint (multi-drop)
communications, ask for information
on our Bell 202T modems.
Also see our data sheets on the
MIU/Powerport low voltage modems,
the Myriad Rack Mount Modem
Banks and the MIU202T (Bell 202T)
modems.
MIUx.x
Public
Switched Telephone
Network
(PSTN)
MIUx.x
MIUx.xL
RAYMAR INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY, INC.
MIU9.6FPD
+1-916-783-1951
Multi-Polling
FAX +1-916-783-1952
[email protected]
1-800-695-1951
Tech Support Hotline
1-800-747-1522
www.raymarinc.com
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD FEATURES
MIU9.6FPD
MIU28.8
MIU14.4
Model
Modem Line
Speeds:
Asynchronous
Standards:
4800, 9600,
14400bps
4800, 9600,
14400bps
14400, 9600,
4800, 2400,
1200, 300bps
57600, 38400,
19200kbps
V.32bis, V.32
V.22Bis, V.22
Bell 212A,
Bell 103
28800,19200,
14400,9600,
4800, 2400,
1200, 300bps
115200, 57600,
38400,19200kbps
V.34, V.32Bis,
V.32, V.22Bis,
V.22, Bell 212A,
Bell 103
MIU14.4
MIU28.8
RS232
RS232
RS232
48 to 240V
AC or DC
48 to 240V
AC or DC
48 to 240V
AC or DC
Power
Connection
3-pin
connector
3-pin
connector
3-pin
connector
Options Available
(see table below)
1, 2, 3, 5
1, 2, 3, 5
1, 2, 3, 5
Serial Interface
Power
Supply
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
ITEM
Dial Up
2 & 4-Wire
Leased Line
MIU14.4
1
MIU9.6FPD
1
MIU14.4L
None
Error Correction/
Data Compression
None
MNP 2, 4, 5 & 10
V.42, V.42bis
Power Connector
DESCRIPTION
ORDER
SUFFIX
MIU28.8
Compatibility
Power Supply
MIU9.6FPD
MNP 2, 4, 5 & 10
V.42, V.42bis
-LV
Included
-HC
-485
Digital Port
MIU2.4-485-LV
2400bps Modem
With Optional RS485 Interface
Analog Port
Surge Protection
(Power Line)
Surge Protection
(Analog Line)
Environment
3.75kVAC
3.75kVAC
WARRANTY
Certifications
1
The standard 9.6FPD and the 14.4L models are 4-wire full or half duplex,
point-to-point only. 2-wire, full duplex, point-to-point available on special order.
2011 Raymar-Telenetics
0070-0100-000 REV A
04/07/2011